Operation Manual
The Steinberg Documentation Team: Cristina Bachmann, Heiko Bischoff, Lillie Harris, Christina Kaboth, Insa Mingers, Matthias Obrecht, Sabine Pfeifer, Benjamin Schütte Translation: Ability InterBusiness Solutions (AIBS), Moon Chen, Jérémie Dal Santo, Rosa Freitag, Josep Llodra Grimalt, Vadim Kupriianov, Filippo Manfredi, Roland Münchow, Boris Rogowski, Sergey Tamarovsky This document provides improved access for people who are blind or have low vision.
Table of Contents 8 New Features 11 11 11 12 12 13 Introduction Platform-Independent Documentation PDF Documents and Online Documentation Documentation Structure Conventions Key Commands 14 14 15 24 29 Setting up Your System Studio Setup Dialog Setting up Audio Setting up MIDI Synchronizers 30 30 31 32 33 34 34 Audio Connections Audio Connections Window Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs Adding Input and Output Busses Presets for Input and Output Busses Monitoring Bus Bus Configurations 36 37
Table of Contents 238 239 250 Punch In and Punch Out Metronome Click Chase 252 252 253 On-Screen Keyboard Recording MIDI With the On-Screen Keyboard On-Screen Keyboard Options 254 254 259 261 265 274 274 Recording Basic Recording Methods Monitoring Audio Recording Specifics MIDI Recording Specifics Remaining Record Time Lock Record 275 275 282 Importing Audio and MIDI Files Audio File Import MIDI File Import 285 285 286 287 287 287 288 289 Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Functions Quantizing MI
Table of Contents 508 517 518 520 520 521 524 Pitch Changes Timing Modifications Showing MIDI Reference Tracks Formant Shifting Editing Volume Functions Menu Harmony Voices for Audio 527 528 533 533 533 534 Audio Part Editor Audio Part Editor Toolbar Info Line Ruler Lanes Operations 537 537 538 539 Extensions in Cubase Activating Extensions for Audio Events Removing Extensions from Audio Events Permanently Applying Extension Edits to Audio Events Activating Extensions for Audio Tracks Removing Extensi
Table of Contents 746 746 755 778 795 809 815 822 834 837 841 851 856 MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions Controller Display Key Editor Key Editor Operations Score Editor Score Editor Operations Drum Editor Drum Editor Operations Drum Maps List Editor List Editor Operations In-Place Editor 859 860 861 866 869 869 871 874 880 880 881 Note Expression VST Note Expressions MIDI Controllers Note Expression Inspector Section Note Expression Tools Controller Mapping Recording Note Expression Event Editor
Table of Contents 1061 1061 1062 1062 1063 Optimizing Audio Performance Performance Aspects Settings That Affect Performance Audio Performance Window ASIO-Guard 1065 1065 1067 1073 1073 1076 1078 1082 1082 1083 1084 1086 1087 1089 1089 Preferences Preferences Dialog Editing Editors Event Display General MIDI MediaBay Metering Record Transport User Interface VST VariAudio Video 1090 Index 7 Cubase Artist 12
New Features The following list informs you about the most important improvements in Cubase and provides links to the corresponding descriptions. New Features in Version 12 Highlights FX Modulator Plug-in ● This new multi-effect modulation plug-in combines several modulation effects that allow for extensive sound shaping, from classic ducking effects to exciting rhythmic patterns. You can create custom shaped LFOs and modulate up to 6 integrated effect modules at once.
New Features a breeze. Just set the scale and follow the chord track or let the Scale Assistant suggest the scale, based on your recorded notes. You can then instantly quantize the pitch of your recording or snap the VariAudio pitch editing to the scale. See Selecting a Musical Scale for VariAudio Segments. Permanently Applying Extensions ● You can now permanently apply extension edits to audio events. See Permanently Applying Extension Edits to Audio Events.
New Features Markers ● The new Markers window gives you a better overview of the markers used in your project and eases editing. See Markers Window. Sample Editor Editing Improvements ● The Sample Editor toolbar now comes with several improvements for displaying, zooming, and editing clips and events. See Sample Editor Toolbar. Extensions on Audio Track Level ● You can now apply ARA extensions at track level and conveniently edit all events within that track.
Introduction This is the Operation Manual for Steinberg’s Cubase. Here you will find detailed information about all the features and functions in the program. The screenshots are taken from Cubase Pro. Platform-Independent Documentation The documentation applies to the operating systems Windows and macOS. Features and settings that are specific to one of these platforms are clearly indicated. In all other cases, the descriptions and procedures in the documentation are valid for Windows and macOS.
Introduction Documentation Structure Padshop Describes the features and parameters of the included VST instrument Padshop. Verve Describes the features and parameters of the included VST instrument Verve . Steinberg Library Manager Describes how you can register and manage your VST Sound libraries. Documentation Structure In our documentation, we divide information into three different types of topics, according to their content.
Introduction Key Commands Important Informs you about issues that might affect the system, the connected hardware, or that might bring a risk of data loss. Note Informs you about issues that you should consider. Tip Adds further information or useful suggestions. Example Provides you with an example. Result Shows the result of the procedure. After Completing This Task Informs you about actions or tasks that you can perform after completing the procedure.
Setting up Your System To use Cubase, you must set up your audio, and if required, your MIDI system. Studio Setup Dialog The Studio Setup dialog allows you to set up your connected audio, MIDI, and remote control devices. ● To open the Studio Setup dialog, select Studio > Studio Setup.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio Reset All Devices Resets all devices in the devices list. Devices list Select a device in the Devices list to show its settings in the right section. The following options are available at the bottom of the page for each device: Reset Sends a reset signal to the active ASIO device and restarts the audio processing. This can solve problems with audio playback. NOTE This leads to a short interruption of the playback. Apply Applies your settings on the this page.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio Simple Stereo Input and Output Setup If you only use a stereo input and output from Cubase, you can connect your audio hardware, for example, the inputs of your audio card or your audio interface, directly to the input source and the outputs to a power amplifier and speaker.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio Word Clock Connections If you are using a digital audio connection, you may also need a word clock connection between the audio hardware and external devices. For details, refer to the documentation that came with the audio hardware. IMPORTANT Set up word clock synchronization correctly, or you may experience clicks and crackles in your recordings. Selecting an Audio Driver By selecting an audio driver, you allow Cubase to communicate with the audio hardware.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio NOTE The control panel is provided by the manufacturer of your audio hardware and is different for each audio interface brand and model. However, control panels for the Generic Low Latency ASIO Driver (Windows only) are provided by Steinberg. 4. Set up your audio hardware as recommended by the manufacturer. Audio System Page On the Audio System page you can select an ASIO driver for your audio hardware.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio Input Latency Shows the input latency of the audio hardware. Output Latency Shows the output latency of the audio hardware. ASIO-Guard Latency Shows the ASIO-Guard latency. HW Sample Rate Shows the sample rate of your audio hardware. HW Pull Up/Down Shows the pull up/down status of the audio hardware. In the Advanced Options section, the following options are available: Reset Allows you to reset the options in this section to their defaults.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio Disk Preload Allows you to specify how many seconds of audio are preloaded into RAM prior to starting playback. This allows for smooth playback. Adjust for Record Latency If this option is activated, the plug-in latencies are taken into account during recording. Record Shift Allows you to shift the recordings by the specified value. Volume Automation Precision Allows you to set the number of samples after which a new volume automation event is processed.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio The following options are available: Control Panel Opens the control panel for the audio hardware. Input Latency Shows the input latency of the audio driver. Output Latency Shows the output latency of the audio driver. Clock Source Allows you to select a clock source. Externally Clocked Activate this option if you use an external clock source. Direct Monitoring Activate this option to monitor via your audio hardware and to control it from Cubase.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio I/O The port input/output status. Port System Name The system name of the port. Show As Allows you to rename the port. This name is used in the Input Routing and Output Routing pop-up menus. Visible Allows you to activate/deactivate audio ports. State The state of the audio port. At the bottom of the page, the following options are available: Reset Sends a reset signal to the active ASIO device and restarts the audio processing.
Setting up Your System Setting up Audio Using Several Audio Applications Simultaneously You can allow other applications to play back via your audio hardware even though Cubase is running. PREREQUISITE Other audio applications accessing the audio hardware are set to release the audio driver. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2. In the Devices list, select Audio System. 3. Activate Release Driver when Application is in Background.
Setting up Your System Setting up MIDI Audio Bus Setup Cubase uses a system of input and output busses to transfer audio between the program and the audio hardware. ● Input busses let you route audio from the inputs of your audio hardware into Cubase. This means that audio is always recorded through one or several input busses. ● Output busses let you route audio from Cubase to the outputs of your audio hardware. This means that audio is always played back through one or several output busses.
Setting up Your System Setting up MIDI MIDI Connections To play back and record MIDI data from your MIDI device, for example, a MIDI keyboard, you need to connect the MIDI ports. Connect the MIDI output port of your MIDI device to the MIDI input port of your audio hardware. This way, the MIDI device sends MIDI data to be played back or recorded inside your computer. Connect the MIDI input port of your MIDI device to the MIDI output port of your audio hardware.
Setting up Your System Setting up MIDI MIDI Port Setup Page The MIDI Port Setup page in the Studio Setup dialog displays the connected MIDI devices and allows you to set up their ports. ● To open the MIDI Port Setup page, select Studio > Studio Setup and activate MIDI Port Setup in the Devices list. The following columns are displayed: Device The connected MIDI devices. I/O The port input/output status. Port System Name The system name of the port. Show As Allows you to rename the port.
Setting up Your System Setting up MIDI The following options are available: Use System Timestamp for 'Windows MIDI' Inputs Activate this option if you have persistent timing problems such as shifted notes. If this is activated, the system timestamp is used as a time reference. Use Device 'DirectMusic' If you do not use a device with a DirectMusic device driver, you can leave this option deactivated. This enhances the system performance.
Setting up Your System Setting up MIDI The following columns are displayed: Vendor Shows information about the vendor of the connected MIDI controller. Device The connected MIDI controller. Created By Shows information about the script creator for the connected MIDI controller. Input Shows the input port of your MIDI controller. Output Shows the output port of your MIDI controller. Open MIDI Remote in Lower Zone Opens the MIDI Remote tab in the lower zone of the Project window.
Setting up Your System Synchronizers Synchronizers When using Cubase with external tape transports, you most likely must add a synchronizer to your system. IMPORTANT Make sure that all equipment is turned off before making any connections. For information on how to connect and set up your synchronizer, refer to the documentation of your synchronizer.
Audio Connections To play back and record in Cubase, you must set up input and output busses in the Audio Connections window. The bus types that you need depend on your audio hardware, on your general audio setup, and on the projects that you use. Audio Connections Window The Audio Connections window allows you to set up input and output busses. ● To open the Audio Connections window, select Studio > Audio Connections.
Audio Connections Renaming the Hardware Inputs and Outputs The Device Port pop-up menu displays how many busses are connected to a given port. The busses are shown in square brackets next to the port name. Up to 3 bus assignments can be displayed in this way. If more connections have been made, this is indicated by a number at the end of the port name. For example, “Adat 1 [Stereo1] [Stereo2] [Stereo3] (+2)” means that the Adat1 port is already assigned to 3 stereo busses plus 2 additional busses.
Audio Connections Adding Input and Output Busses Activating and Deactivating Ports (macOS only) On macOS you can specify which input and output ports are active. This allows you to use the microphone input instead of the line input or to deactivate the audio card input or output. NOTE This function is only available for built-in audio, standard USB audio devices, and a certain number of other audio cards. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2.
Audio Connections Presets for Input and Output Busses RESULT The selected bus is used as default bus. The Main Mix is indicated by a speaker icon next to its name. RELATED LINKS Inputs/Outputs Tab on page 30 Presets for Input and Output Busses For input and output bus configurations, you can use different kinds of presets. ● A number of standard bus configurations. ● Automatically created presets tailored to your specific hardware configuration.
Audio Connections Monitoring Bus RESULT The preset is deleted. Monitoring Bus The default output bus (Main Mix) is used for monitoring. You can adjust the monitoring level in the MixConsole. RELATED LINKS Setting the Default Output Bus (Main Mix) on page 32 MixConsole on page 335 Bus Configurations After you have set up all the required busses for a project you can edit the names and change port assignments. The bus configuration is saved with the project.
Audio Connections Bus Configurations Renaming Multiple Busses You can rename all the selected busses at once using incrementing numbers or letters. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Audio Connections. 2. Select the busses that you want to rename. 3. Do one of the following: 4. ● Enter a new name for one of the busses, followed by a number. ● Enter a new name for one of the busses, followed by a space and a capital letter. Press Return .
Project Window The Project window provides an overview of the project, and allows you to navigate and perform large scale editing. Each project has one Project window. The Project window is displayed whenever you open or create a new project. ● To open a project, select File > Open. ● To create a new project, select File > New Project.
Project Window Showing/Hiding Zones The project zone shows the toolbar, the track list with the tracks, the event display with the parts and events of the project, and the Project window ruler. On the toolbar, you can activate/deactivate the status line, the info line, the overview line, and the Transport Bar. 3 Lower Zone The lower zone shows the Chord Pads, the Editor, the Sampler Control, the MixConsole, and MIDI Remote. 4 Right Zone The right zone shows the VSTi rack, and the Media rack.
Project Window Project Zone RELATED LINKS Track List on page 45 Event Display on page 46 Global Track Controls on page 46 Ruler on page 48 Status Line on page 50 Info Line on page 51 Overview Line on page 51 Transport Bar on page 52 Project Window Toolbar The toolbar contains tools and shortcuts for opening other windows and various project settings and functions.
Project Window Project Zone Minimizes the latency effects of the delay compensation. Left Divider Left Divider Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. Media & MixConsole Windows Open MediaBay Opens/Closes the MediaBay. Open Pool Window Opens/Closes the Pool window. Open MixConsole Opens/Closes the MixConsole. Track Visibility Configurations Track Visibility Configurations Allows you to create configurations that are useful for switching between different visibility setups.
Project Window Project Zone Suspend All Read/Write Automation Suspends all read/write automation. Auto-Scroll Auto-Scroll Keeps the project cursor visible during playback. Select Auto-Scroll Settings Allows you to activate Page Scroll or Stationary Cursor and to activate Suspend Auto-Scroll When Editing. Locators Go to Left Locator Position Allows you to go to the left locator position. Left Locator Position Shows the left locator position.
Project Window Project Zone Stop Stops playback. Start Starts playback. Transport Record Activates/Deactivates record mode. Tool Buttons Combine Selection Tools Combines the Object Selection tool and the Range Selection tool. Object Selection Selects events and parts. Range Selection Selects ranges. Draw Draws events. Erase Erases events. Split Splits events. Glue Glues events together. Mute Mutes events. Zoom Zooms in. Hold Alt/Opt and click to zoom out. Comp Assembles takes.
Project Window Project Zone Line Creates a series of contiguous events. Play Allows you to play back events. Color Allows you to colorize events. Color Menu Select Color for Selected Tracks or Events Opens the Colorize pane that allows you to colorize the selected tracks or events. Nudge Nudge Settings Allow you to set up a snap grid for the nudge commands. ● By default, the snap grid for nudge operations is set to Link to Grid, and the step width corresponds to the snap grid.
Project Window Project Zone Nudge End Left Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the left. Nudge End Right Increases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the right. Project Root Key Project Root Key Changes the root key of the project. Snap Snap to Zero Crossing Restricts editing to zero crossings, that is, positions where the amplitude is zero. Snap On/Off Restricts horizontal movement and positioning to the positions specified by the Snap Type.
Project Window Project Zone Open Quantize Panel Opens the Quantize Panel. Audio Performance Meter Audio Performance Meter The upper bar displays either the current realtime peak or the ASIO-Guard load, depending on which of the two has the higher value. The lower bar shows the hard disk transfer load of the disk engine. For a more detailed display of realtime and ASIO-Guard load, click to open the Audio Performance window.
Project Window Project Zone Markers on page 326 Automation on page 630 Synchronization on page 996 Left/Right Toolbar Divider The left and right toolbar dividers allow you to lock the position of specific tools at the left or at the right side of the toolbar, so that they are always shown. All other items are shown in the center of the toolbar. When you reduce the width of the Project window, these toolbar items are hidden successively. When you increase the width, they are shown again.
Project Window Project Zone ● Select Project > Divide Track List. ● Click Divide Track List in the top right corner of the Project window below the ruler. RESULT The track list is divided and video, marker, or arranger tracks are automatically moved to the upper track list. All other track types are moved to the lower track list. NOTE The area of the project zone that has the focus, is indicated by a highlighted and solid focus frame,whereas the non-active area is shown with a dashed frame.
Project Window Project Zone 1 Add Track Opens the Add Track dialog. 2 Use Track Preset Allows you to add a track using a track preset. 3 Number of Visible Tracks Displays how many tracks are hidden. Click this to show all tracks that are filtered out by the Visibility tab. NOTE If the track was outside the view or hidden, it is now shown. Tracks that are hidden using Set Track Type Filter are not shown. 4 Set Track Type Filter Determines which track types are shown in the track list.
Project Window Project Zone 2. Uncheck a track type to hide it. RESULT Tracks of the filtered type are removed from the track list and the color of the Set Track Type Filter button changes to indicate that a track type is hidden. Finding Tracks The Find Tracks function allows you to find specific tracks. This is useful if you have a large project with many tracks or if you have hidden tracks using the Visibility tab. PROCEDURE 1.
Project Window Project Zone NOTE To set the display format globally for all windows, use the Display Format pop-up menu in the Project Setup dialog, or the Select Primary Time Format pop-up menu on the Transport panel, or hold down Ctrl/Cmd and select a format in any ruler. RELATED LINKS Project Setup Dialog on page 98 Ruler Modes on page 50 Selecting the Primary Time Format on page 236 Ruler Display Format Menu You can select a display format for the ruler.
Project Window Project Zone RELATED LINKS Ruler Modes on page 50 Ruler Modes By default, the ruler follows the primary time format, that is the display format that you set up in the Project Setup dialog or on the Transport. The ruler modes, however, allow you show a different display format in the ruler than in the main time display. ● To show the ruler modes, click the arrow button to the right of the ruler. Time Linear Sets the ruler relative to the time.
Project Window Project Zone Record Format Displays the sample rate and the bit depth used for recording. Click in this field to open the Project Setup dialog. Project Frame Rate Displays the frame rate used in the project. Click in this field to open the Project Setup dialog. Project Pan Law Displays the current pan law setting. Click in this field to open the Project Setup dialog.
Project Window Left Zone In the overview line, events and parts are displayed as boxes. A rectangle indicates the section of the project that is displayed in the event display. ● To zoom the event display in or out horizontally, resize the rectangle by dragging the edges. ● To navigate to another section of the event display, drag the rectangle to the left or right, or click in the upper part of the overview.
Project Window Left Zone RELATED LINKS Inspector on page 53 Visibility on page 57 Project Window Toolbar on page 38 Inspector The Inspector allows you to show controls and parameters for either the selected track in the track list or the event or part that is shown in the editor in the lower zone. ● To show/hide the Inspector, click Show/Hide Left Zone in the Project window toolbar.
Project Window Left Zone The following tabs are available: Track Opens the Track Inspector for the selected track. Editor Opens the Editor Inspector for the event or part that is shown in the editor in the lower zone. RELATED LINKS Opening the Track Inspector on page 54 Opening the Editor Inspector on page 55 Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 63 Opening the Track Inspector The Track Inspector shows controls and parameters for the selected track in the track list. PROCEDURE 1.
Project Window Left Zone RESULT The Track Inspector for the selected track opens. If more than one track is selected in the track list, the controls and parameters for the topmost selected track are shown. NOTE In this documentation we use Inspector to refer to the Track tab of the Inspector. Opening the Editor Inspector The Editor Inspector shows controls and parameters for the event or part that is shown in the editor in the lower zone.
Project Window Left Zone RESULT The Editor Inspector for the event or part opens. NOTE The Editor Inspector only contains information if the lower zone shows an editor. Otherwise, it is empty. RELATED LINKS Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 63 Inspector Sections The Track tab and the Editor tab of the Inspector are divided into a number of sections that each contain different controls for the track, event or part. Not all Inspector sections are shown by default.
Project Window Left Zone MIDI Track Inspector on page 128 Sampler Track Inspector on page 125 Arranger Track Inspector on page 145 Marker Track Inspector on page 151 Signature Track Inspector on page 143 Tempo Track Inspector on page 141 Transpose Track Inspector on page 147 Video Track Inspector on page 150 Key Editor Inspector on page 788 Drum Editor Inspector on page 831 Sample Editor Inspector on page 457 Visibility The Visibility tab allows you to show or hide individual tracks from the track list and
Project Window Left Zone Opening the Visibility The Visibility tab allows you to show or hide individual tracks from the track list. PROCEDURE 1. Click Show/Hide Left Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the Left Zone. 2. At the top of the left zone, click the Visibility tab. 3. At the bottom of the left zone, click the Track tab. RELATED LINKS Showing/Hiding Individual Tracks on page 58 Showing/Hiding Individual Tracks The Visibility tab shows a list of all tracks of your project.
Project Window Left Zone NOTE ● The channels of the MixConsole in the lower zone are updated accordingly. This means that if you hide a track using the Visibility tab, the channel corresponding to that track is also hidden in the MixConsole in the lower zone. ● If you want to synchronize the track and the channel visibility in a separate MixConsole window, you must use the Sync Visibility of Project and MixConsole function.
Project Window Lower Zone RESULT The MixConsole opens in the lower zone. RELATED LINKS Opening the MixConsole in the Lower Zone on page 62 Lower Zone The lower zone of the Project window allows you to display specific windows and editors in an integrated and fixed zone of the Project window. This is useful if you work on single screen systems and notebooks, for example. To show/hide the lower zone, click Show/Hide Lower Zone on the Project window toolbar.
Project Window Lower Zone To close the lower zone, click Close Lower Zone to the left of the tabs. RELATED LINKS Opening Chord Pads on page 61 Opening the MixConsole in the Lower Zone on page 62 Opening Sampler Control on page 63 Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 63 Opening MIDI Remote in the Lower Zone on page 66 Project Window Toolbar on page 38 Setting up the Lower Zone The lower zone shows the Chord Pads, the Editor, the Sampler Control, the MixConsole, and MIDI Remote.
Project Window Lower Zone RESULT The Chord Pads are opened. RELATED LINKS Chord Pads on page 906 Setting up the Lower Zone on page 61 Project Window Toolbar on page 38 Opening the MixConsole in the Lower Zone The MixConsole in the lower zone allows you to perform all basic mixing procedures from within the lower zone of the Project window, and at the same time to see the context of your tracks and events. PROCEDURE 1. Click Show/Hide Lower Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the lower zone.
Project Window Lower Zone RELATED LINKS MixConsole in Lower Zone on page 335 Project Window Toolbar on page 38 Opening Sampler Control Sampler Control allows you to display and edit the waveform of an audio sample on a sampler track. PROCEDURE 1. Click Show/Hide Lower Zone on the Project window toolbar to activate the lower zone. 2. At the bottom of the lower zone, click the Sampler Control tab. RESULT Sampler Control is opened.
Project Window Lower Zone ● Select an audio part. RESULT Depending on your event or part selection, the lower zone shows either the Audio Part Editor, the Sample Editor, or one of the MIDI editors. NOTE To change the default MIDI editor, select MIDI > Set up Editor Preferences, and select an option from the Default MIDI Editor pop-up menu. NOTE If you open the editor and no event or part is selected, the editor in the lower zone is empty.
Project Window Lower Zone RESULT The MIDI part is displayed in the selected editor. NOTE This selection is temporary. Next time you open the MIDI part, the default MIDI editor is used. Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors You can link cursors and zoom factors of the project zone and the Key Editor, Drum Editor, and the Audio Part Editor in the lower zone. NOTE Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors is not available in the Sample Editor.
Project Window Lower Zone If you activate Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors , the cursors and zoom factors are linked in the event displays of the project zone and the lower zone. This is useful if you edit in both zones and you want to keep the same position in view. NOTE In the Key Commands dialog in the Edit category, you can assign a key command for this.
Project Window Right Zone RESULT The MIDI Remote tab is opened in the lower zone. NOTE The MIDI Remote tab is not a clickable user interface. All operations are meant to be performed on the connected MIDI controller. RELATED LINKS MIDI Remote on page 668 Right Zone The right zone of the Project window allows you to display the VSTi rack and the Media rack. To show/hide the right zone, click Show/Hide Right Zone on the Project window toolbar.
Project Window Right Zone NOTE You can show/hide specific tabs in the right zone by right-clicking a tab and activating/ deactivating the options in the context menu. RELATED LINKS VSTi Rack in the Right Zone on page 69 Media Rack in the Right Zone on page 71 Project Window Toolbar on page 38 Opening the VSTi Rack in the Right Zone You can show the VSTi rack in the right zone of the Project window.
Project Window Right Zone RESULT The VSTi rack is opened in the right zone of the Project window. RELATED LINKS VSTi Rack in the Right Zone on page 69 VST Instruments on page 640 Project Window Toolbar on page 38 VSTi Rack in the Right Zone The VSTi rack in the right zone of the Project window allows you to add and edit VST instruments in the context of the Project window. The following sections are available: ● Track Shows the associated VST instrument for an instrument track.
Project Window Right Zone Settings Opens the Settings pop-up menu where you can activate/deactivate the following modes: ● Show VST Quick Controls for One Slot Only shows the VST Quick Controls exclusively for the selected instrument. ● MIDI Channel follows track selection ensures that the Channel selector follows the MIDI track selection in the Project window. Use this mode if you work with multitimbral instruments.
Project Window Right Zone RELATED LINKS Media Rack in the Right Zone on page 71 MediaBay and Media Rack on page 587 Project Window Toolbar on page 38 Media Rack in the Right Zone The Media rack in the right zone of the Project window allows you to drag audio events, MIDI parts, or instrument presets into the event display. It lists Steinberg factory content and any installed Steinberg content sets. The Media rack Home tab shows the following tiles: VST Instruments Shows all included VST instruments.
Project Window Keyboard Focus in the Project Window File Browser Shows your file system and the pre-defined folders Favorites, This Computer, VST Sound, Factory Content, and User Content where you can search for media files and access them immediately. RELATED LINKS Media Rack in Right Zone on page 587 MediaBay and Media Rack on page 587 Keyboard Focus in the Project Window The different zones in the Project window can be controlled by using key commands.
Project Window Zooming in the Project Window Activating Keyboard Focus for a Zone You can activate the keyboard focus for a zone by clicking with the mouse and by using key commands. PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● To activate any zone, click in it. ● To activate the next zone, press Tab . This allows you to cycle forward through the zones. ● To activate the previous zone, press Shift - Tab .
Project Window Zooming in the Project Window Zooming Vertically ● Select the Zoom tool, click in the event display, and drag a selection rectangle to zoom in vertically and horizontally. NOTE For this to work, you must deactivate the Zoom Tool Standard Mode: Horizontal Zooming Only option in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Tools page). ● Use the vertical zoom sliders to zoom in and out. If you have made any individual track height adjustments, the relative height differences are maintained.
Project Window Zooming in the Project Window Zoom Full Zooms out so that the whole project is visible. The whole project means the timeline from the project start to the length set in the Project Setup dialog. Zoom to Selection Zooms in horizontally and vertically so that the current selection fills the screen. Zoom to Selection (Horiz.) Zooms in horizontally so that the current selection fills the screen. Zoom to Event Zooms in to show the currently selected event.
Project Window Zooming in the Project Window ● To save the current zoom setting as a preset, open the Zoom Presets pop-up menu and select Add. In the Type in Preset Name dialog that opens, type in a name for the preset and click OK. ● To select and apply a preset, select it from the Zoom Presets pop-up menu. ● To zoom out so that the whole project is visible, open the Zoom Presets pop-up menu and select Zoom Full.
Project Window Snap Function ● To undo zoom, select Edit > Zoom > Undo Zoom or double-click with the zoom tool. ● To redo zoom, select Edit > Zoom > Redo Zoom or press Alt/Opt and double-click with the zoom tool. Snap Function The Snap function helps you to find exact positions when editing in the Project window. It does this by restricting horizontal movement and positioning to certain positions. Operations affected by Snap include moving, copying, drawing, sizing, splitting, range selection, etc.
Project Window Snap Function If you select Bars+Beats as ruler format, musical grid options are available. Grid Relative If this option is activated, events and parts are not magnetic to the grid. Rather, the grid determines the step size for moving the events. This means that a moved event keeps its original position relative to the grid. For example, if an event starts at the position 3.04.
Project Window Snap Function Grid Type Menu Allows you to specify a grid type that determines the grid and snap resolution in the event display. NOTE This setting only has an effect if Snap Type is set to one of the grid options. ● To open the Grid Type pop-up menu, click Grid Type on the toolbar. If you select Bars+Beats as display format, the following grid types are available: Bar Sets the grid and snap resolution to bars. Beat Sets the grid and snap resolution to beats.
Project Window Snap Function 1/2 frame Sets the grid and snap resolution to ½ frame. 1 frame Sets the grid and snap resolution to 1 frame. 2 frames Sets the grid and snap resolution to 2 frames. 1 second Sets the grid and snap resolution to 1 second. NOTE If you activate this as a display format, and Show Timecode Subframes is activated in the Preferences dialog (Transport page), the frames will also display subframes. There are 80 subframes per frame.
Project Window Snap Grid RELATED LINKS Snap Types Menu on page 77 Zooming in the Project Window on page 73 Ruler Display Format Menu on page 49 Snap Grid In the Project window, and in some of the editors, you can have events, parts, and ranges snap to the grid. The grid is based on the following settings: ● Primary time format You can set the primary time format on the Transport panel. ● Snap Type You can select the Snap Type on the Project window toolbar.
Project Window Cross-Hair Cursor RELATED LINKS Snap Function on page 77 Project Setup Dialog on page 98 Ruler on page 48 Snap Types Menu on page 77 Ruler Modes on page 50 Selecting the Primary Time Format on page 236 Grid Type Menu on page 79 Cross-Hair Cursor The cross-hair cursor is displayed when working in the Project window and in the editors, facilitating navigation and editing, especially when arranging large projects.
Project Window Edit History Dialog Action Shows the name of the action. Time Shows the time when this action was performed. State Shows the state of the action. Details Shows further details, and allows you to enter new text. Separator Move the separator upwards to undo your actions. To redo an action again, move the separator down. NOTE ● You can also undo applied audio processes. However, we recommend to modify or delete these using the Direct Offline Processing window.
Project Window Color Handling Color Handling You can colorize events and tracks in Cubase. This allows for an easier overview in the Project window.
Project Window Color Handling Colorizing Single Tracks You can colorize single tracks via the Inspector or the track list. This is useful if you want to ensure that no other tracks, events, or parts are colorized accidentally. PROCEDURE 1. Do one of the following: ● Select the track that you want to colorize, and in the Inspector, click Colorize Selected Track. ● Ctrl/Cmd -click the left area of the track list. The Colorize pane opens.
Project Window Color Handling Colorizing Selected Events or Parts You can colorize selected events or parts with Select Color for Selected Tracks or Events. By default, events or parts follow the color of the corresponding track. However, you can overwrite this setting and, for example, select the same color for events or parts that reside on different tracks. PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select all events or parts that you want to colorize. 2.
Project Window Color Handling NOTE You can also Ctrl/Cmd -click an event or part with the Color tool to open the Colorize pane or to select colors by names. RELATED LINKS Colorizing Selected Events or Parts on page 86 Options Tab on page 90 Event Colors Menu on page 747 Setting Event Colors to Track Colors You can set the color of events or parts to the track color. This is useful if you colorized events or parts with the Color tool and you want them to follow the track color again. PROCEDURE 1.
Project Window Color Handling RELATED LINKS Color Picker on page 90 Color Set Tab on page 88 Presets Tab on page 89 Options Tab on page 90 Color Set Tab The Color Set tab allows you to change the color set that is used in the project.
Project Window Color Handling Color fields Click a field to open the Color Picker that allows you to specify a new color. Name Shows the name of the color. Double-click to change it. Set up Allows you to add or remove color fields. ● Insert Color Adds a new color field. ● Duplicate Color Duplicates the selected color field. ● Remove Color Removes the selected color field. ● Reset Color Resets the selected color field to the factory settings. Apply Applies your changes and closes the dialog.
Project Window Color Handling Sort Colors by Allows you to sort the colors of the color set by their basic color or by their color tint. The New Color Set section displays the current colors of the new color set. The Missing Current Project Colors section shows which missing colors will be replaced. Move the mouse pointer over the color field of a color that is missing to highlight the color that is used to replace it in the New Color Set section. Apply Applies your changes and closes the dialog.
Project Window Color Handling Color selectors Allow you to select a color shade and the nuance of the shade. Context menu Allows you to copy, paste, or reset colors. Current Color/New Color Shows the current color and the new color. Hue/Saturation/Value Allow you to edit the colors numerically. Red/Green/Blue Allow you to edit the colors numerically. OK Confirms the color changes. NOTE You must restart the application for some changes to take effect.
Project Handling In Cubase, projects are the central documents. You must create and set up a project to work with the program. Creating New Projects You can create empty projects or projects that are based on a template. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > New Project. Depending on your settings, either the Hub or the Project Assistant dialog opens. 2. 3. In the location options section, select where to store the new project. ● To use the default location, select Use default location.
Project Handling Project Assistant Dialog NOTE Make sure that you have an active Internet connection to access this material. Projects Section The Projects section lets you create new projects, which can either be empty or based on a template. It lets you specify where to save the projects. It also allows you to access recently opened projects or projects that are stored in other locations. This section offers the same functionality as the Project Assistant dialog.
Project Handling Project Files Category bar In this section, the available factory templates are sorted into the predefined categories Recording, Production, Scoring, and Mastering. The Recent category contains a list of the recently opened projects. The More category contains the default project template and all templates that are not assigned to any of the other categories.
Project Handling Template Files The project folder contains the project file and the following folders that Cubase automatically creates when necessary: ● Audio ● Edits ● Images ● Track Pictures Template Files Templates can be a good starting point for new projects. Templates are projects where you can save all settings that you regularly use, such as bus configurations, sample rates, record formats, basic track layouts, VSTi setups, drum map setups, etc.
Project Handling Template Files The following options are available in the Current Presets section: New Folder Allows you to add and name a folder to the template list. Template list Lists the templates and the folders. The following options are available in the Attribute Inspector section: Value Click this field to enter a description for the Content Summary attribute, or to select a template category for Template Category attribute.
Project Handling Template Files Saving a Project Template File You can save the current project as a template. When you create a new project, you can select this template as a starting point for your new project. PREREQUISITE You have removed all clips from the Pool. This ensures that references to media data from the original project folder are deleted. PROCEDURE 1. Set up a project. 2. Select File > Save as Template. 3.
Project Handling Project Setup Dialog Project Setup Dialog The Project Setup dialog allows you to make general settings for your project. ● To open the Project Setup dialog, select Project > Project Setup. ● To open the Project Setup dialog automatically when you create a new project, activate the Run Setup on Create New Project option in the Preferences dialog (General page).
Project Handling Project Setup Dialog Project Time Displays In the Project Time Displays section, the following options are available: Display Format Allows you to specify the global display format that is used for all rulers and position displays in the program, except the ruler tracks. However, you can make independent display format selections for the individual rulers and displays.
Project Handling Project Setup Dialog Record File Type Allows you to specify the file type of the audio files that you record in Cubase. NOTE ● For wave file recordings larger than 4 GB, the EBU RIFF standard is used. If a FAT 32 disk is used (not recommended), audio files are split automatically. In the Preferences dialog, you can specify what happens if your recorded Wave file is larger than 4 GB. ● You can set up embedded strings in the Preferences dialog.
Project Handling Opening Project Files Project Location information Displays the project location. Show in Explorer/Reveal in Finder Opens a file dialog that shows the location of the project file. RELATED LINKS Audio System Page on page 18 Record - Audio on page 1083 Opening Project Files You can open one or several saved project files at the same time.
Project Handling Saving Project Files Activating Projects If you have several projects opened at the same time in Cubase, only one project can be active. The active project is indicated by the lit Activate Project button in the upper left corner of the Project window. If you want to work on another project, you have to activate the other project. PROCEDURE ● To activate a project, click Activate Project .
Project Handling Reverting to the Last Saved Version Auto Save Cubase can automatically save backup copies of all open project files with unsaved changes. NOTE Only the project files are backed up. If you want to include the files from the Pool and save your project in a different location, you must use the Back up Project function. Cubase can automatically save backup copies of all open projects with unsaved changes. To set this up, activate the Auto Save option in the Preferences dialog (General page).
Project Handling Self-Contained Projects PROCEDURE 1. 2. Do one of the following: ● Select Use default location to create a project in the default project location, and in the Project folder field, specify a name for the project folder. If you do not specify a project folder here, the project is saved in a folder named Untitled. ● Click in the path field to change the default project location, and specify the new default location in the file dialog that opens.
Project Handling Self-Contained Projects RESULT Your project is ready to be archived. You can move or copy the project folder to another location. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You must copy audio files that reside within the project folder to the Audio folder or save them separately. You must also move your video clips manually, as videos are only referenced and not saved in the project folder. Backing up Projects You can create a backup copy of your project. Backups only contain the necessary work data.
Project Handling Self-Contained Projects Minimize Audio Files Allows you to include only the audio file portions that are actually used in the project. This can significantly reduce the size of the project folder if you are using small sections of large files. It also means that you cannot use other parts of the audio files if you continue working with the project in its new folder.
Tracks Tracks are the building blocks of your project. They allow you to import, add, record, and edit parts and events. Tracks are listed from top to bottom in the track list and extend horizontally across the Project window. Each track is assigned to a particular channel strip in the MixConsole. If you select a track in the Project window, the controls, settings, and parameters displayed in the Inspector and the track list allow you to control the track.
Tracks Track Inspector Settings Dialog Hidden Items Displays sections that are hidden in the Inspector. Visible Items Displays sections that are visible in the Inspector. Pin Activate Pin by clicking the column for a section to exclude this section from being closed automatically. Add Allows you to move an item selected in the hidden sections list to the list of visible sections. Remove Allows you to move an item selected in the visible sections list to the list of hidden sections.
Tracks Track Inspector Settings Dialog Inserts Allows you to add audio insert effects to the track. Equalizers Allows you to adjust the EQs for the track. You can have up to four bands of EQs for each track. Sends Allows you to route the track to one or several FX channels. Strip Allows you to set up the channel strip modules. Fader Shows a duplicate of the corresponding MixConsole channel. Notepad Allows you to enter notes about the track.
Tracks Track Controls Settings Dialog Track Controls Settings Dialog The Track Controls Settings dialog allows you to configure which track controls are shown in the track list. You can also specify the order of controls and group controls so that they are always shown adjacent to each other. NOTE The Track Controls Settings dialog is available for the main track types. The track types that are shown in the More Tracks section of the Add Track dialog, however, have a fixed set of track-specific controls.
Tracks Track Controls Settings Dialog Add Allows you to move an item selected in the hidden controls list to the list of visible controls. Remove Allows you to move an item selected in the visible controls list to the list of hidden controls. All controls can be removed except Mute and Solo. Move Up/Move Down Allows you to change the order of an item in the list of visible controls. Group Allows you to group two or more controls selected in the visible controls list that are adjacent to each other.
Tracks Track Controls Settings Dialog Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. The track name control is available for all track types: Name Shows the name of the track. Double-click to rename the track. Audio-Related Tracks The following track controls are specific to audio-related tracks, that is, audio tracks, instrument tracks, sampler tracks, group channel tracks, FX channel tracks: Bypass Inserts Bypasses the inserts for the track. Bypass EQs Bypasses the equalizers for the track.
Tracks Track Controls Settings Dialog Audio- and MIDI-Related Tracks The following track controls are specific to audio- and MIDI-related tracks: Record Enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor For audio-related tracks, this routes incoming signals to the selected output. For MIDI and instrument-related tracks, this allows you to route incoming MIDI signals to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, activate MIDI Thru Active in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page).
Tracks Track Controls Settings Dialog Channel Allows you to specify the MIDI channel. Output Allows you to specify the output for the track. Bypass Inserts Bypasses the inserts for the track. Bypass Sends Bypasses the sends for the track. Group/FX/VCA Tracks The following track controls are specific to group/FX/VCA tracks: Mute Automation Deactivates the automation read function for the selected parameter. Lock Automation Disables all editing of all events on the track.
Tracks Add Track Dialog Zoom Allows you to zoom in a cycle marker. Add Track Dialog The Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add tracks.
Tracks Audio Tracks Audio Tracks You can use audio tracks for recording and playing back audio events and audio parts. Each audio track has a corresponding audio channel in the MixConsole. An audio track can have any number of automation tracks for automating channel parameters, effect settings, etc. You can add audio tracks via the Add Track dialog. RELATED LINKS Add Track Dialog – Audio on page 116 Add Track Dialog – Audio The Audio page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add audio tracks.
Tracks Audio Tracks The following settings are available: Audio Inputs Opens a window where you can select an input of your connected audio hardware. If you have added an input bus in the Audio Connections window, you can connect to that input bus. The Open Audio Connections button opens the Audio Connections window. Configuration Allows you to set the channel configuration. Audio-related tracks can be configured as mono or stereo tracks. Audio Outputs Allows you to set the output routing.
Tracks Audio Tracks Audio Track Inspector The Inspector for audio tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit your audio track. The top section of the audio track Inspector contains the following basic track settings: Track name Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the track. Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track. Edit Channel Settings Opens the Channel Settings window for the track. Mute Mutes the track.
Tracks Audio Tracks Monitor Routes incoming signals to the selected output. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Show Lanes Divides the tracks in lanes. Freeze Audio Channel Allows you to freeze the audio channel. Volume Allows you to adjust the level of the track. Pan Allows you to adjust the panning of the track. Delay Allows you to adjust the playback timing of the track.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Instrument Tracks You can use instrument tracks for dedicated VST instruments. Each instrument track has a corresponding instrument channel in the MixConsole. An instrument track can have any number of automation tracks. You can add instrument tracks via the Add Track dialog. RELATED LINKS Add Track Dialog – Instrument on page 120 Add Track Dialog – Instrument The Instrument page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add instrument tracks.
Tracks Instrument Tracks The following settings are available: Instrument Allows you to select an instrument. Audio Outputs Allows you to set the output routing. Name Allows you to specify a track name. Count Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add. NOTE You can add an unlimited number of tracks. However, you can only add 100 tracks at a time. Keep Dialog Open Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track.
Tracks Instrument Tracks Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track. Edit Channel Settings Opens the Channel Settings window for the track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Record Enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor Routes incoming MIDI to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, activate MIDI Thru Active in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page).
Tracks Sampler Tracks Show Lanes Divides the tracks in lanes. Load/Save/Reload Track Preset Loads or saves a track preset or reverts the default presets. Input Routing Allows you to specify the input bus for the track. Activate Outputs This control is only available if the instrument provides more than one output. It allows you to activate one or more outputs for the instrument. Edit Instrument Allows you to open the instrument panel. Programs Allows you to select a program.
Tracks Sampler Tracks Add Track Dialog – Sampler The Sampler page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add sampler tracks. To open the Sampler page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following: ● Click Add Track in the global track controls area of the track list, and click Sampler. This opens the global Add Track dialog on the Sampler page. ● Select Project > Add Track > Sampler or right-click in an empty area of the track list, and select Add Sampler Track.
Tracks Sampler Tracks Add Track Adds one or more tracks, according to the track type and settings of the active page, and closes the dialog. Sampler Track Inspector The Inspector for sampler tracks contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit your sampler track. The top section of the sampler track Inspector contains the following basic track settings: Track name Click once to show/hide the basic track settings section. Double-click to rename the track.
Tracks Sampler Tracks Routes incoming MIDI to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, activate MIDI Thru Active in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page). Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Show Lanes Divides the tracks in lanes. Freeze Sampler Channel Allows you to freeze the sampler track. Volume Allows you to adjust the level of the track.
Tracks MIDI Tracks MIDI Tracks You can use MIDI tracks for recording and playing back MIDI parts. Each MIDI track has a corresponding MIDI channel in the MixConsole. A MIDI track can have any number of automation tracks. You can add MIDI tracks via the Add Track dialog. RELATED LINKS Add Track Dialog – MIDI on page 127 Add Track Dialog – MIDI The MIDI page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add MIDI tracks.
Tracks MIDI Tracks Name Allows you to specify a track name. Count Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add. NOTE You can add an unlimited number of tracks. However, you can only add 100 tracks at a time. Keep Dialog Open Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks. NOTE This is only available if you open the Add Track dialog from the global track controls.
Tracks MIDI Tracks Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Record Enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor Routes incoming MIDI to the selected MIDI output. For this to work, activate MIDI Thru Active in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page). Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks Output Routing Allows you to specify the output bus for the track. Channel Allows you to specify the MIDI channel. Edit Instrument Allows you to open the instrument panel. Bank Selector Allows you to set a bank select message that is sent to your MIDI device. Programs Allows you to select a program. Program Selector Allows you to set a program change message that is sent to your MIDI device. Drum Maps Allows you to select a drum map for the track.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks Add Track Dialog – Group Channel The Group page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add group channel tracks. To open the Group page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following: ● Click Add Track in the global track controls area of the track list, and click Group. This opens the global Add Track dialog on the Group page. ● Select Project > Add Track > Group. This opens only the Group page of the Add Track dialog.
Tracks Group Channel Tracks Name Allows you to specify a track name. Count Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add. Keep Dialog Open Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks. NOTE This is only available if you open the Add Track dialog from the global track controls.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks Allows you to write track automation. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Volume Allows you to adjust the level of the track. Pan Allows you to adjust the panning of the track. Output Routing Allows you to specify the output bus for the track.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks Add Track Dialog – Effect The Effect page of the Add Track dialog allows you to set up and add FX channel tracks. To open the Effect page of the Add Track dialog, do one of the following: ● Click Add Track in the global track controls area of the track list, and click Effect. This opens the global Add Track dialog on the Effect page. ● Select Project > Add Track > Effect. This opens only the Effect page of the Add Track dialog.
Tracks FX Channel Tracks Folder Setup Allows you to select whether you want to create the effect inside or outside a dedicated folder. Name Allows you to specify a track name. Count Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add. Keep Dialog Open Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks. NOTE This is only available if you open the Add Track dialog from the global track controls.
Tracks Ruler Track Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Read Automation Allows you to read track automation. Write Automation Allows you to write track automation. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Volume Allows you to adjust the level of the track. Pan Allows you to adjust the panning of the track. Output Routing Allows you to specify the output bus for the track.
Tracks Ruler Track ● Select Project > Add Track > Ruler. This opens only the Ruler page of the Add Track dialog. The following settings are available: Count Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add. Keep Dialog Open Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks. NOTE This is only available if you open the Add Track dialog from the global track controls.
Tracks Folder Tracks The following display formats are available: Bars+Beats Activates a display format of bars, beats, sixteenth notes, and ticks. By default there are 120 ticks per sixteenth note. To adjust this, change the MIDI Display Resolution in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page). Seconds Activates a display format of hours, minutes, seconds, and milliseconds. Timecode Activates a display format of hours, minutes, seconds, and frames.
Tracks Folder Tracks ● Select Project > Add Track > Folder. This opens only the Folder page of the Add Track dialog. The following settings are available: Name Allows you to specify a track name. Count Allows you to enter the number of tracks that you want to add. Keep Dialog Open Activate this to keep the dialog open after clicking Add Track. This allows you to click the page of another track type to set up and add more tracks.
Tracks Folder Tracks Folder Track Inspector The Inspector for folder tracks shows the folder and its underlying track, much like a folder structure in the File Explorer/macOS Finder. When you select one of the tracks shown under the folder, the Inspector shows the settings for that track. Track name Double-click to rename the track. Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Record Enable Activates the track for recording.
Tracks Tempo Track Expand/Collapse Folder Shows/Hides the tracks in the folder. Hidden tracks are played back as usual. Track name Double-click to rename the track. Mute Mutes the track. Solo Solos the track. Record Enable Activates the track for recording. Monitor For audio-related tracks, this routes incoming signals to the selected output. For MIDI and instrument-related tracks, this allows you to route incoming MIDI signals to the selected MIDI output.
Tracks Signature Track Tempo event list Shows a list of all tempo events that allows you to edit tempo events and their positions. Tempo Track Controls The track list for the tempo track contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the tempo track. Activate Tempo Track Allows you to activate the tempo track. In this mode, the tempo cannot be changed on the Transport panel. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track.
Tracks Signature Track Signature Track Inspector The signature track Inspector displays a list of all time signature events. Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track. Bar Shows the number of the bar where the signature event is positioned. Double-click the field and enter a new value to change the position of the signature event. NOTE The first signature event is always positioned at bar 1. You cannot change this. Sign. Shows the value of the signature event.
Tracks Arranger Track NOTE For this you do not have to select the signature events first. ● Reset Click Pattern to Default Sets the click pattern of the selected signature event to default. If no signature event is selected, the click patterns of all signature events are set to default. ● Show Click Patterns Allows you to show/hide the click patterns for the signature events.
Tracks Arranger Track Arranger Track Inspector The arranger track Inspector displays the lists of available arranger chains and arranger events. The arranger track Inspector contains the following settings: Track name Double-click to rename the track. Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track. Open Arranger Editor Opens the Arranger Editor.
Tracks Transpose Track Arranger Events Lists all arranger events in your project. Click the arrow of an arranger event to play it back and start the live mode. Stop Allows you to stop the live mode. Jump Mode Allows you to define how long the active arranger event is played before jumping to the next one. Arranger Track Controls The track list for the arranger track contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the arranger track.
Tracks Chord Track Transpose Track Inspector The transpose track Inspector contains parameters to control the transpose track. Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track. Keep Transpose in Octave Range Allows you to keep the transposition in the octave range and ensures that nothing is transposed by more than seven semitones. Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track.
Tracks Chord Track Chord Track Inspector The chord track Inspector contains settings for the chord events. The top section of the chord track Inspector contains the following settings: Track name Click to show/hide the basic track settings section. Colorize Selected Track Allows you to colorize the selected track. Mute Chord Track Mutes the track. Record Enable Activates the track for recording. Acoustic Feedback Allows you to audition the events on the chord track.
Tracks Chord Track Adaptive Voicings If this option is activated, the voicings are set automatically. Automatic Scales If this option is activated, the program creates scale events automatically. Shift Chords Allows you to specify an offset value to make sure that chord events also affect the MIDI notes that have been triggered too early (enter a negative value) or too late (enter a positive value).
Tracks Video Tracks Toggle Time Base Switches between musical (tempo-related) and linear (time-related) time base for the track. Video Tracks You can use the video track to play back video events. Video files are displayed as events/clips on the video track, with thumbnails representing the frames in the film. You can add this track type only once to a project. ● To add a video track, select Project > Add Track > Video.
Tracks Marker Track Mute Video Track Mutes the track. Name Shows the name of the track. Double-click to rename the track. Lock Disables all editing of all events on the track. Show Thumbnails Allows you to activate/deactivate the thumbnails of a video track. Show Frame Numbers Allows you to show each thumbnail with the corresponding video frame number. Marker Track You can use the marker track to add and edit markers that help you to locate certain positions quickly.
Tracks Marker Track RELATED LINKS Inspector Sections on page 108 Marker Track Controls The track list for the marker track contains controls and parameters that allow you to edit the marker track. Track name Double-click to rename the track. Locate Allows you to move the project cursor to the selected marker position. Cycle Allows you to select a cycle marker. Zoom Allows you to zoom in a cycle marker. Add Marker Allows you to add a position marker at the project cursor position.
Track Handling Tracks are the building blocks of your project. In Cubase, events and parts are placed on tracks. Adding Tracks via the Add Track Dialog You can add tracks via the Add Track dialog. PROCEDURE 1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track 2. Do one of the following: 3. . ● Click the track type and set up the options according to your needs. ● To add other track types, open the More Tracks section and click the track type. Click Add Track.
Track Handling Adding Tracks by Dragging Files from the MediaBay 4. Click OK. RESULT The new tracks are added to the project below the selected track. RELATED LINKS Track Presets on page 176 Adding Tracks by Dragging Files from the MediaBay You can add tracks by dragging files from the MediaBay. PREREQUISITE One of the following prerequisites must apply: ● The MediaBay is open. To open the MediaBay, press F5 . ● The Media rack in the right zone of the Project window is open.
Track Handling Exporting MIDI Tracks as Standard MIDI Files RESULT The MIDI file is exported. It includes the tempo and time signature events of the Tempo Track Editor or, if the tempo track is deactivated on the Transport panel, the current tempo and time signature. NOTE If you want to include other Inspector settings than those specified in the Export Options, use Merge MIDI in Loop to convert these settings to real MIDI events.
Track Handling Removing Selected Tracks Export as Type 0 Exports a type 0 MIDI file with all data on a single track, but on different MIDI channels. If you deactivate this option, a type 1 MIDI file with data on separate tracks is exported. Export Resolution Allows you to set a MIDI resolution between 24 and 960 for the MIDI file. The resolution is the number of pulses, or ticks, per quarter note (PPQ) and determines the precision with which you will be able to view and edit the MIDI data.
Track Handling Moving Tracks in the Track List Moving Tracks in the Track List You can move tracks up or down in the track list. PROCEDURE ● Select a track and drag it up or down in the track list. Renaming Tracks You can rename tracks. PROCEDURE 1. Double-click the track name and type in a new name for the track. 2. Press Return . If you want all events on the track to get the same name, hold down any modifier key and press Return .
Track Handling Showing Track Pictures PROCEDURE 1. Right-click any track in the track list. 2. From the track list context menu, select Show Track Pictures. If you move the mouse to the left on a track, a highlighted rectangle appears. 3. Double-click the rectangle. 4. In the Track Pictures Browser, select a picture. 5. Click OK. RESULT The picture is shown in the track list and in the MixConsole pictures section.
Track Handling Setting the Track Height Import Opens a file dialog that allows you to select pictures in bmp, jpeg, or png format and add them to the user library. Remove Selected Pictures from User Library Removes the selected pictures from the user library. Reset Current Picture Removes the picture from the selected track/channel. Show Preview/Hide Preview Opens/Closes a section with further color and zoom settings. Track Picture Preview Shows the current track picture.
Track Handling Selecting Tracks Track Zoom Menu The track zoom pop-up menu allows you to set the number of tracks and the track height in the Project window. ● To open the track zoom pop-up menu in the lower right of the Project window, click the arrow button above the vertical zoom control. The following options are available: Zoom Tracks x Rows Zooms all track heights to show the specified number of rows. Zoom Tracks Full Zooms all tracks to fit in the active Project window.
Track Handling Deselecting Tracks RELATED LINKS Track Selection Follows Event Selection on page 1068 Scroll to Selected Track on page 1071 Select Channel/Track on Solo on page 1071 Select Channel/Track on Edit Settings on page 1071 Selecting Tracks with Arrow Keys You can select tracks and events with the Up Arrow key or the Down Arrow key on the computer keyboard. However, you can make the Up Arrow key and the Down Arrow key exclusively available for selecting tracks.
Track Handling Disabling Tracks Disabling Tracks You can disable audio, instrument, MIDI, and sampler tracks that you do not want to play back or process at the moment. Disabling a track zeroes its output volume and shuts down all disk activity and processing for the track. PROCEDURE 1. Select the tracks that you want to disable. 2. Right-click in the track list and select Disable Selected Tracks from the context menu.
Track Handling Handling Overlapping Audio RELATED LINKS Folder Tracks on page 138 Handling Overlapping Audio The basic rule for audio tracks is that each track can only play back a single audio event at a time. If two or more events overlap, only the one that is in front is played back. You can, however, select the event/region that you want to play back.
Track Handling Events Display on Folder Tracks NOTE The behavior of this function depends on the Deep Track Folding setting in the Preferences dialog. Flip Fold States Flips the fold states of the tracks in the Project window. This means that all tracks that were folded in will be unfolded and all unfolded tracks will be folded in. Move Selected Tracks to New Folder Moves all selected tracks to the folder track. This menu option is available if at least one folder track is available.
Track Handling Lanes, Takes, and Overlapping Events RELATED LINKS Event Display - Folders on page 1076 Lanes, Takes, and Overlapping Events In the following, we focus on cycle recordings with takes. However, you can also apply lane operations and comping methods on overlapping events or parts that you assemble on one track.
Track Handling Lanes, Takes, and Overlapping Events For audio, proceed as follows: ● Apply auto fades and crossfades to the comped takes. ● To put all takes on a single lane, and remove all takes in the background, select all takes and select Audio > Advanced > Delete Overlaps. ● To create a new and continuous event of all selected takes, select Audio > Bounce Selection. For MIDI, proceed as follows: ● Open your takes in a MIDI editor to perform fine adjustments like removing or editing notes.
Track Handling Lanes, Takes, and Overlapping Events Operation Comp tool Object Selection/Range Selection tool Bring to front Click on a take. Click twice to toggle. Position the mouse pointer over the middle of the lower border of a take until it changes to a Comp symbol, and click. Click twice to toggle. For MIDI this mutes/unmutes a take. Comping (create a new range and bring it to front, Project window only) Click and drag on a lane. All takes are split at the range start and end.
Track Handling Defining the Track Time Base Operation Comp tool Object Selection/Range Selection tool Adjust splits Position the mouse pointer See left. over a split and drag to the left or to the right. Gluing splits Bring a new range to front. Select a range spanning all the splits that you want to glue, and double-click.
Track Handling Track Versions ● Starting new recordings from scratch. ● Comparing different takes and comps. ● Managing takes that were recorded in a multi-track recording. NOTE Track versions are not available for automation tracks. Track versions are included in track archives and project backups. The track version key commands can be found in the Track Versions category of the Key Commands dialog.
Track Handling Track Versions Track Version Indicator Indicates that more than one track version exists. Name Shows the version name. Double-click to change it. The name will be changed for all selected tracks. ID Shows the track version ID. Track Version list Lists all track versions and allows you to activate one of them for all selected tracks. New Version Creates a new, empty track version for all selected tracks. Duplicate Version Creates a copy of the active track version for all selected tracks.
Track Handling Track Versions Track Version IDs All track versions are automatically assigned an ID. Track versions that are created together get the same track version ID and can be selected together. In the Track Versions section in the Inspector, the track version ID is shown in the ID column of the track version list. In the track list, you can open the Track Versions pop-up menu to see the track version ID.
Track Handling Track Versions 2. Select the track version that you want to activate. 3. Optional: Activate Show Version Name in Track List. This shows the version name next to the track name in the track list. RESULT The selected version is activated and its events are shown in the event display. NOTE If you work with audio tracks, MIDI tracks, instrument tracks, the sampler track or the chord track, you can also use the Track Versions section of the Inspector to activate a track version.
Track Handling Track Versions Duplicating Track Versions You can duplicate a track version by creating a new track version that contains a copy of the active track version. PROCEDURE 1. In the track list, select the tracks and activate the track version that you want to duplicate. 2. Select Project > Track Versions > Duplicate Version. In the event display, a duplicate track version is displayed. In the track list, a default version name for the duplicate is shown.
Track Handling Track Versions NOTE If you want to perform more complicated comping tasks, we recommend that you select Project > Track Versions > Create Lanes from Versions and proceed with the Comp tool. Copying and Pasting Selected Events between Track Versions You can copy and paste selected events between different track versions, even across multiple tracks. PREREQUISITE You have at least 2 track versions, and you have split the corresponding events with the Split tool, for example. PROCEDURE 1.
Track Handling Track Versions The name is changed. If the available space in the track list is too small, the name is abbreviated automatically. Renaming Track Versions on Multiple Tracks You can rename track versions on multiple tracks. PROCEDURE 1. Activate all track versions that you want to rename, and select the corresponding tracks. 2. Select Project > Track Versions > Rename Version. 3. Enter a new track version name and click OK. RESULT In the track list, the new track version name is shown.
Track Handling Track Presets Creating Track Versions from Lanes If your project contains lanes and you want to continue working with the track version functions, you can create track versions from lanes. PROCEDURE 1. Select the tracks for which you want to create track versions. If you only want to convert specific lanes, select these lanes. 2. Select Project > Track Versions > Create Versions from Lanes. RESULT New track versions are added, one for each separate lane. The original lanes are kept.
Track Handling Track Presets NOTE To access the track presets functions for input and output channels, activate the Write buttons for input and output channels in the MixConsole. This creates input and output channel tracks in the track list. MIDI Track Presets You can use MIDI track presets for multitimbral VST instruments. When creating MIDI track presets, you can either include the channel or the patch. The following data is saved in MIDI track presets: ● MIDI modifiers (Transpose, etc.
Track Handling Track Presets 2. Select From Track Preset. 3. In the Results browser, double-click a track preset to apply it. RELATED LINKS Track Presets on page 176 Loading Presets for VST Instruments When working with VST instruments, you can choose from a variety of presets via the Results browser. PROCEDURE 1. In the track list, right-click the instrument track and select Load Track Preset. 2. In the Results browser, double-click a preset to apply it.
Track Handling Track Presets NOTE Modifiers, inserts, and EQ settings are not saved. VST effect plug-ins are available in VST 3 and VST 2 format. NOTE In this manual, VST presets stands for VST 3 instrument presets, unless stated otherwise. Extracting the Sound from an Instrument Track or VST Preset For instrument tracks, you can extract the sound of an instrument track preset or VST preset. PROCEDURE 1. Select the instrument track to which you want to apply a sound. 2.
Track Handling Track Presets 4. Double-click the preset to load it. RESULT The preset is applied. Sampler Track Presets You can use sampler track presets to reuse created sounds in later projects or newly created sampler tracks.
Track Handling Track Presets Track Presets on page 176 Loading Track or VST Presets You can apply track or VST presets to selected tracks. PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select a track. 2. Do one of the following: ● In the Inspector, click Load Track Preset. ● In the track list, right-click the track and select Load Track Preset. ● In the Sampler Control toolbar, click the Preset Management button next to the Preset Name field and select Load Track Preset. 3.
Track Handling Track Presets Track Quick Control Presets For audio, instrument, MIDI, FX, and group tracks, you can save and load your own Quick Control assignments as presets or use the factory presets. Saving/Loading Track Quick Control Assignments as Presets You can save track quick control assignment, as presets and load them later or in other projects. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector for your track, open the Quick Controls section.
Parts and Events Parts and events are the basic building blocks in Cubase. Events In Cubase, most event types can be viewed and edited on their specific tracks in the Project window. Events can be added by importing or recording. RELATED LINKS Audio Regions on page 185 MIDI Events on page 186 Audio Events Audio events are created automatically when you record or import audio in the Project window. You can view and edit audio events in the Project window and in the Sample Editor.
Parts and Events Events RELATED LINKS Basic Recording Methods on page 254 Audio File Import on page 275 Importing Audio CD Tracks on page 278 Importing Audio from Video Files on page 281 MediaBay and Media Rack on page 587 Audio Part Editor on page 527 Sample Editor on page 449 Creating New Files From Events An audio event plays a section of an audio clip, which in turn refers to one or more audio files on the hard disk.
Parts and Events Events correct positions. You will hear this as a single recording, with processing applied to one section only. This allows you to undo processing at a later stage, and to apply different processing to different audio clips that refer to the same original file. You can view and edit audio clips in the Pool. RELATED LINKS Pool on page 567 Audio Regions on page 185 Replacing Clips in Events on page 185 Replacing Clips in Events You can replace the clips in audio events.
Parts and Events Events Creating Regions You can create regions from several selected audio events or from selection ranges. PROCEDURE 1. Select several audio events or selection ranges. 2. Select Audio > Advanced > Event or Range as Region. 3. In the Create Regions dialog, enter a name for the regions, and click OK.
Parts and Events Parts ● Select File > Import > MIDI File to import a MIDI file from your hard disk. ● Drag a MIDI file from the File Explorer/macOS Finder, from one of the MIDI editors, or from the MediaBay, and drop it in the event display. ● Copy an event from a different Cubase project and paste it in the event display.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Folder Parts A folder part is a graphic representation of events and parts on the tracks in the folder. Folder parts indicate the time position as well as the vertical track position. If part colors are used, these are also shown in the folder part. Any editing that you perform to a folder part affects all the events and parts it contains. Tracks inside a folder can be edited as one entity.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events 3. Optional: Select Media > MediaBay, and in the Previewer section, adjust the Preview Level. RESULT The track on which you click is played back, starting at the click position. Playback is stopped when you release the mouse button. NOTE When auditioning, the Main Mix bus is always used for monitoring.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events NOTE You can also use the Up Arrow , Down Arrow , Left Arrow or Right Arrow keys on the computer keyboard to select the event on the upper or lower track or the previous or next event on the same track. RELATED LINKS Project Window Toolbar on page 38 Event Display on page 1073 Combine Selection Tools Mode The Combine Selection Tools mode allows you to combine the Object Selection tool and the Range Selection tool.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events All Selects all events in the Project window. None Deselects all events in the Project window. Invert Inverts the selection. All selected events are deselected and all events that were not selected are selected instead. In Loop Selects all events that are partly or wholly between the left and right locator. From Start to Cursor Selects all events that end to the left of the project cursor.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events RELATED LINKS Project Window Toolbar on page 38 Event Movement Options Cubase provides several methods to move events in the Project window. You can move events using any of the following methods: ● Use the Object Selection tool. ● Use the Nudge buttons. ● Select Edit > Move and select one of the options. ● Select the event and edit the start position on the info line.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events PROCEDURE 1. Click the points to the right of the Nudge section. The Nudge buttons become available. 2. In the event display, select the events that you want to move, and do one of the following: ● Click Move Left or use the corresponding key command Ctrl/Cmd - Left Arrow to move the events to the left. ● Click Move Right or use the corresponding key command Ctrl/Cmd - Right Arrow to move the events to the right.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events The settings Link to Grid and Link to Primary Time Format are deactivated. 3. Optional: Select Project > Add Track > Ruler to add a ruler track, and in the track list for the ruler track, select the same display format as for your nudge operations. This is not necessary, but it helps you to get visual control over your nudge operations. 4. On the Project window toolbar, click the points to the right of the Nudge Settings section.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Resizing Events Using the Nudge Settings on page 199 Move Submenu If the Object Selection tool is selected, the Move submenu features options for moving events to specific positions in the Project window. ● To open the Move submenu, select Edit > Move. The following options are available: Event Starts to Cursor Moves the starts of the selected events to the project cursor position.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events PROCEDURE 1. Select all events that you want to rearrange. 2. Select Edit > Functions > Set Spacer between Selected Events. 3. Set the Spacer in Seconds value. 4. Click OK. RESULT All selected events on the track are at the specified distance from each other. NOTE ● Grouped events are handled like single events. ● This function does not work for automation and signature tracks.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Normal Sizing You can move the start or end point of the event. PROCEDURE 1. Select Object Selection. 2. Click the Object Selection tool again, and select Normal Sizing from the pop-up menu. 3. Click and drag the lower left or right corner of the event. NOTE If your event contains fades and you want to adapt their length while sizing the event, hold down Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt .
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Resizing Events with the Object Selection Tool - Sizing Applies Time Stretch You can move the start or end point of the event and time stretch the content to fit the new event length. PROCEDURE 1. Select Object Selection. 2. Click the Object Selection tool again, and select Sizing Applies Time Stretch from the pop-up menu. 3. Click and drag the lower left or right corner of the event.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events ● Click Nudge End Right or use the corresponding key command Alt/Opt - Right Arrow to move the event end to the right. RESULT The start or end position of the selected events is moved by the amount set on the Grid Type pop-up menu.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events RELATED LINKS Setting up a Snap Grid for Nudge Operations on page 193 Selecting the Primary Time Format on page 236 Snap Grid on page 81 Resizing Events with the Nudge Buttons on page 198 Resizing Events with the Scrub Tool You can scrub the event when moving the start or end point of the event. PROCEDURE 1. Click Play. 2. Click Play again to open a pop-up menu. 3. Select Scrub. 4. Click and drag the lower left or right corner of the event.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events are split and new notes are created at the beginning of the second part. If it is deactivated, the notes remain in the first part, but stick out after the end of the part. RELATED LINKS Project Window Toolbar on page 38 Splitting Events Repeatedly You can split events repeatedly into multiple events of equal size. PROCEDURE ● Select Split split.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events RELATED LINKS Project Window Toolbar on page 38 Pasting Events You can paste events from the clipboard. PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● Select the events and select Edit > Functions > Paste at Origin to paste the event at the same position from which you cut or copied it.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events RESULT A copy of the selected event is created and placed after the original. If several events are selected, all of these are copied as one unit, maintaining the relative distance between the events. NOTE If you duplicate audio events, the copies always refer to the same audio clip.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Count Allows you to specify how many times you want the event to be repeated. Shared Copies Activate this to create a shared copy. RELATED LINKS Shared Copies on page 204 Shared Copies Shared copies are useful if you want to create copies that are automatically edited in the same way as the original event. You can create shared copies by using the Repeat Events dialog.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events RELATED LINKS Setting up Tool Modifier Keys on page 1051 Grouping Events You can treat several events on the same or different tracks as one unit by grouping them. PROCEDURE ● Select the events and select Edit > Group. RESULT The events are grouped. This is indicated by an icon. Grouped Events If you edit one of the grouped events in the Project window, all other events in the same group are affected too.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events To unlock an event, select the event and select Edit > Unlock. Lock Event Attributes Dialog The Lock Event Attributes dialog allows you to lock specific event attributes. ● To open the Lock Event Attributes dialog, select a locked event and select Edit > Lock. Position Locked Activate this to prevent the event from being moved. Size Locked Activate this to prevent the event from being resized.
Parts and Events Editing Techniques for Parts and Events Muting Events You can mute events in the Project window. Muted events can be edited as usual with the exception of adjusting fades, but are not played back. PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● Select the Mute tool and click the events or drag a selection rectangle around them. ● Select the events and select Edit > Mute. RESULT The events are muted and grayed out. You can unmute events by selecting them and selecting Edit > Unmute.
Range Editing Editing in the Project window is not restricted to handling whole events and parts. You can also work with selection ranges, which are independent from the event/part and track boundaries. Creating a Selection Range PROCEDURE 1. On the Project window toolbar, select Range Selection. 2. Do one of the following: ● Draw a selection rectangle around the range that you want to select. ● Select Edit > Select, and select one of the menu functions.
Range Editing Creating a Selection Range From Cursor to End Makes a selection on all tracks, from the project cursor to the end of the project. Equal Pitch - all Octaves This function requires that a single note is selected. It selects all notes of this part that have the same pitch in any octave as the selected note. Equal Pitch - same Octave This function requires that a single note is selected. It selects all notes of this part that have the same pitch and the same octave as the selected note.
Range Editing Editing Selection Ranges 2. Press Ctrl/Cmd Alt/Opt and click in the selection range on the tracks that you want to exclude from the selection. Editing Selection Ranges You can edit selection ranges, that is, adjust their size, move or duplicate them, split them, etc. Adjusting the Size of Selection Ranges You can adjust the size of a selection range. PREREQUISITE You have created a selection range and you want to adjust its size.
Range Editing Editing Selection Ranges Moving Selection Ranges You can move selection ranges and their contents to a new position. PREREQUISITE You have created a selection range. PROCEDURE ● Click the selection range and drag it to a new position. RESULT The contents of the selection range are moved to the new position. If the range intersected events or parts, these are split before moving, so that only the sections within the selection range are affected.
Range Editing Editing Selection Ranges Duplicating Selection Ranges PREREQUISITE You have created a selection range. PROCEDURE ● Click the selection range, hold down Alt/Opt , and drag. RELATED LINKS Creating a Selection Range on page 208 Cut, Copy, and Paste of Selection Ranges You can cut or copy and paste selection ranges, using the functions on the Edit menu. You can also use the Cut Time and Paste Time options. Cut Cuts the data in the selection range and moves it to the clipboard.
Range Editing Editing Selection Ranges Deleting Data in Selection Ranges ● To replace data within the deleted selection range with empty track space, select Edit > Delete or press Backspace . Events to the right of the range keep their position. ● To remove the selection range and make the events to the right move to the left to fill the gap, select Edit > Range > Delete Time.
Range Editing Editing Selection Ranges Events to the right of the selection range start are moved to the right to make room. Events that are intersected by the selection range start are split, and the right section is moved to the right.
Playback and Transport Cubase offers multiple methods and functions to control playback and transport. Transport Panel The Transport panel contains the main transport functions as well as many other options related to playback and recording. ● To show the Transport panel, select Transport > Transport Panel or press F2 . Transport Panel Sections The Transport panel has different sections that you can show or hide by activating the corresponding options on the Transport panel context menu.
Playback and Transport Transport Panel MIDI Auto Quantize Automatic MIDI Record Quantize Activates automatic quantizing during a MIDI recording. Locators Go to Left Locator Position Allows you to go to the left locator position. Left Locator Position Shows the left locator position. Go to Right Locator Position Allows you to go to the right locator position. Right Locator Position Shows the right locator position.
Playback and Transport Transport Panel Allows you to set up the punch out position. For this to work, Lock Punch Points to Locators must be deactivated. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider. Transport Controls Go to Previous Marker/Zero Moves the project cursor to the previous marker/zero position on the timeline. Go to Next Marker/Project End Moves the project cursor to the next marker/project end. Rewind Moves backward. Forward Moves forward. Cycle Activates/Deactivates cycle mode.
Playback and Transport Transport Panel Markers Jump to Marker Allows you to set and locate marker positions. Open Markers Window Opens the Markers window. Pre-roll & Post-roll Activate Pre-roll Activates pre-roll. Pre-roll Amount Allows you to set the pre-roll position. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider. Activate Post-roll Activates post-roll. Post-roll Amount Allows you to set the post-roll position. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider.
Playback and Transport Transport Panel Click & Count-In & Click Pattern Activate Metronome Click Activates the metronome click. Activate Count-in Activates the metronome click in count-in. Click Pattern Allows you to set up a click pattern. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider. Open Metronome Setup Opens the Metronome Setup dialog. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider. Input/Output Activity MIDI In Activity Displays the MIDI input signals.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Transport Menu The Transport menu contains several transport functions as well as many other options related to playback and recording. Transport Panel Opens the Transport panel. Transport Commands Start Starts playback. Stop Stops playback. Start/Stop Starts/Stops playback. Cycle Activates/Deactivates cycle mode. Record Activates/Deactivates record mode. Rewind Moves backward. Forward Moves forward. Fast Rewind Moves backward at a faster speed.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Exchange Time Formats Switches the primary and the secondary time display. Locators Go to Left Locator Position Moves the project cursor position to the left locator. Go to Right Locator Position Moves the project cursor position to the right locator. Set Left Locator to Project Cursor Position Sets the left locator to the project cursor position. Set Right Locator to Project Cursor Position Sets the right locator to the project cursor position.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Enter Punch In Position Allows you to enter the punch in position manually. Enter Punch Out Position Allows you to enter the punch out position manually. Set Punch Points to Selection Range Sets the punch in and the punch out position to the selected event range. Set Project Cursor Position Locate Selection Start Moves the project cursor to the beginning of the selection. Locate Selection End Moves the project cursor to the end of the selection.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu Pre-roll & Post-roll Use Pre-roll Activates/Deactivates the pre-roll. Use Post-roll Activates/Deactivates the post-roll. Post-roll from Selection Start Starts playback from the beginning of the selected range and stops after the time set in the post-roll field on the Transport panel. Post-roll from Selection End Starts playback from the end of the selected range and stops after the time set in the post-roll field on the Transport panel.
Playback and Transport Transport Menu New Parts Keeps existing parts and saves the new recording as a new part. Merge Keeps existing events in parts and adds the newly recorded events. Replace Replaces existing events in parts by the new recording. Auto Quantize in Record Activates automatic quantizing during recording. MIDI Cycle Record Mode Mix Adds everything you record to what was previously recorded.
Playback and Transport Transport Bar Activate Metronome Activates/Deactivates the metronome click. Project Synchronization Setup Opens the Project Synchronization Setup dialog. Activate External Sync Sets Cubase to be synchronized externally.
Playback and Transport Transport Bar Constrain Delay Compensation Constrain Delay Compensation Minimizes the latency effects of the delay compensation. Common Record Modes Common Record Modes Allow you to determine what happens if you click Record during an audio or MIDI recording, and where the recording should start. Audio Record Modes Audio Record Modes Allow you to select what happens when you record over existing audio events.
Playback and Transport Transport Bar Left Locator Position Shows the left locator position. Go to Right Locator Position Allows you to go to the right locator position. Right Locator Position Shows the right locator position. Locator Range Duration Locators to Selection Allows you to set the locators to the selection. Locator Range Duration Shows the duration of the locator range. Punch Points Punch In Activates Punch In. Punch Out Activates Punch Out.
Playback and Transport Transport Bar Moves the project cursor to the next marker/project end. Rewind Moves backward. Forward Moves forward. Cycle Activates/Deactivates cycle mode. Stop Stops playback. Start Starts playback. Transport Record Activates/Deactivates record mode. Retrospective Record Insert Retrospective Recording from All MIDI Inputs on Selected Track Allows you to recover MIDI notes that you played in stop mode or during playback.
Playback and Transport Transport Bar Allows you to set and locate marker positions. Open Markers Window Opens the Markers window. Pre-roll & Post-roll Activate Pre-roll Activates pre-roll. Pre-roll Amount Allows you to set the pre-roll position. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider. Activate Post-roll Activates post-roll. Post-roll Amount Allows you to set the post-roll position. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider.
Playback and Transport Transport Bar Click & Count-in Activate Metronome Click Activates the metronome click. Activate Count-in Activates the metronome click in count-in. Click Pattern Allows you to set up a click pattern. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider. Open Metronome Setup Opens the Metronome Setup dialog. To show/hide this, click the points on the divider. Input/Output Activity MIDI In Activity Displays the MIDI input signals. MIDI Out Activity Displays the MIDI output signals.
Playback and Transport Transport Pop-Up Window Transport Pop-Up Window The Transport pop-up window allows you to access specific transport commands if the Transport panel, the Transport Bar, and the Transport Controls in the Project window toolbar are closed or hidden.
Playback and Transport Left and Right Locators Right-click the window to access the following options: Bars+Beats Displays the time in bars and beats. Seconds Displays the time in seconds. fps Displays the time in frames per second. Samples Displays the time in samples. Show Beat Count Only Shows the beat counts only. This is useful if you want to use the Time Display window as a visual metronome. Increase Window Size Increases the size of the window and the displayed values.
Playback and Transport Left and Right Locators ● Positioning the project cursor. ● Defining start and stop positions for recording. ● Defining start positions for importing or exporting events. ● Setting up a cycle range. ● Selecting, copying, creating or splitting events. Locators are indicated by the flags in the ruler. The area between the left and the right locator is the locator range. The locator range is highlighted in the ruler and the event display.
Playback and Transport Left and Right Locators Setting the Left Locator Setting the left locator can be useful if you want to add a reference position in the Project window and in the editors. PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● Press Ctrl/Cmd and click in the upper part of the ruler to set the left locator to that position. ● Adjust the Left Locator Position value.
Playback and Transport Setting the Project Cursor RESULT The locator range is set up and highlighted in the ruler and the event display. Snap is taken into account. Moving Locator Ranges In the ruler, you can move the locator range. PREREQUISITE You have set up a locator range. PROCEDURE 1. Move the mouse pointer to the upper part of the ruler inside a locator range. A hand symbol is shown. 2. Click and drag to the left or to the right to move the locator range.
Playback and Transport Auto-Scroll Settings Menu Auto-Scroll Settings Menu Auto-Scroll allows you to keep the project cursor visible in the window during playback. If you activate Auto-Scroll on the toolbar of the Project window or one of the editors, the following modes are available in the Select Auto-Scroll Settings pop-up menu: Page Scroll The project cursor moves from the left side to the right side of the window.
Playback and Transport Pre-Roll and Post-Roll RESULT The time format on the Transport panel and all rulers and position displays are updated. NOTE You can also select Project > Project Setup, and in the Project Time Displays section open the Display Format pop-up menu to select the primary time format. RELATED LINKS Project Setup Dialog on page 98 Independent Time Displays You can show time displays that are independent from the global display format.
Playback and Transport Punch In and Punch Out NOTE This only works if Punch Out is activated on the Transport panel, and if Stop after Automatic Punch Out is activated in the Preferences dialog (Record page). Using Pre-Roll and Post-Roll You can set up a pre-roll and a post-roll value for recording. PREREQUISITE On the Transport panel, Lock Punch Points to Locators is activated. PROCEDURE 1. Set the locators to where you want to start and end recording. 2.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click RELATED LINKS Activating Recording Automatically on page 255 Stopping Recording Automatically with Punch Out on page 256 Metronome Click You can use the metronome click as a timing reference for playing along and recording. The two parameters that govern the timing of the metronome are project tempo and the time signature that you can set up on the Transport panel. ● To activate the metronome click, activate Activate Metronome Click on the Transport panel.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click By setting up click patterns for the metronome at the current time signature, you can create a custom metronome click. You can determine the number of clicks and the level of the clicks to your liking. If you have different project parts with different time signatures or tempos, and you want to set up different click patterns to match the rhythm and feel of these parts, you can set up a metronome click pattern for each signature event in your project.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click Pattern Allows you to select a factory pattern or to save your own user patterns. Which patterns are available in this menu depends on the current time signature, and on the settings in the Metronome Setup dialog on the Click Patterns tab. NOTE To view, edit and rename the pattern presets, open the Click Patterns tab in the Metronome Setup dialog. Event display Shows the defined number of beats for the selected pattern.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click patterns to the rhythm and feel of these parts. You can also add the same time signature for different sections and set up different patterns for them. PROCEDURE 1. Double-click the plus sign to open the Click Pattern Editor. 2. Do one of the following: ● Select one of the patterns that are available for the current time signature in the Pattern pop-up menu. ● Set up a new user pattern by changing the number of clicks in the Clicks value field.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click RESULT Your user pattern is saved. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Rename the untitled user pattern in the Metronome Setup dialog (Click Patterns tab). RELATED LINKS Click Patterns Tab on page 248 Renaming Click Patterns on page 243 Renaming Click Patterns By default, newly created user patterns are called Untitled, but you can rename them in the Metronome Setup dialog. PROCEDURE 1. Select Transport > Metronome Setup. 2.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click RELATED LINKS General Tab on page 245 Click Sounds Tab on page 246 Click Patterns Tab on page 248 Transport Bar Sections on page 225 244 Cubase Artist 12
Playback and Transport Metronome Click General Tab The General tab allows you to make basic metronome settings. In the topmost section, the following options are available: Activate Metronome Click Activates/Deactivates the metronome click. In the Click Destinations section, the following options are available: Use MIDI Click Activates a MIDI click for the metronome. Use Audio Click Activates an audio click for the metronome that is output via the audio hardware.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click In the Count-In section, the following options are available: ● Number of Bars in Count-In Allows you to set the number of bars that the metronome counts in before recording starts. ● Time Signature at Record Start Position Activate this to let the count-in automatically use the time signature and tempo set at the position where recording starts. ● Time Signature at Project Position Activate this to let the count-in use the time signature at the project position.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click MIDI Output Port Allows you to select a MIDI output port for the MIDI click. You can also select a VST instrument previously set up in the VST Instruments window. MIDI Output Channel Allows you to select a MIDI output channel for the MIDI click. Note Allows you to set the MIDI note number, that is, the pitch from C-2 to G8. Set the note number for the first beat in a bar in the top row, and the note numbers for the other beats in the rows below.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click Setting up a Custom Audio Click Sound If you do not want to use the default click sound, you can set up your own custom sound. PREREQUISITE In the Metronome Setup dialog on the General tab, Activate Metronome Click is activated. In the Click Destinations section, Use Audio Click is activated. PROCEDURE 1. Open the Click Sounds tab, and in the Audio Click Settings section, activate Use Custom Sounds. 2. In the Sound column, click the top row. 3.
Playback and Transport Metronome Click The following options are available: 1 Add New Signature Click and enter a time signature value to add a new time signature. 2 Available Time Signatures Shows the available time signatures. 3 Available Patterns Shows the available click patterns. 4 Add New Pattern Double-click to add a new click pattern for the time signature. 5 Clicks Allows you to change the number of clicks used in the click pattern. 6 Click Pattern Shows the click pattern.
Playback and Transport Chase NOTE You can set another click pattern as default pattern for a time signature by clicking to the left of the number field of a this pattern. An asterisk is shown to indicate that this pattern is the new default pattern. NOTE If you scroll all the way down, you can reset all click patterns to the factory settings by clicking Reset to Factory Patterns. You can double-click the name of a pattern to rename it.
Playback and Transport Chase The Chase function takes care of that. If program change events are set to be chased, Cubase tracks the music back to the beginning, finds the first program change, and transmits it to your synth, setting it to the correct sound. The same can apply to other event types as well. In the Preferences dialog (MIDI page), the Chase Events settings determine which event types are chased when you locate to a new position and start playback.
On-Screen Keyboard The On-Screen Keyboard allows you to play and record MIDI notes by using your computer keyboard or mouse. This is useful if you have no external MIDI instrument at hand and you do not want to draw in notes with the Draw tool. When the On-Screen Keyboard is displayed, the usual key commands are blocked because they are reserved for the On-Screen Keyboard.
On-Screen Keyboard On-Screen Keyboard Options On-Screen Keyboard Options The On-Screen Keyboard offers different display modes as well as other options. ● To open the On-Screen Keyboard, select Studio > On-Screen Keyboard. 1 Note Velocity Level This slider allows you to adjust the volume of the On-Screen Keyboard. You can also use Up Arrow or Down Arrow for this. 2 Change On-Screen Keyboard Type This button allows you to switch between computer keyboard and piano keyboard display mode.
Recording In Cubase, you can record audio and MIDI. Make the following initial preparations: ● Set up, connect, and calibrate your audio hardware. ● Open a project and set up the parameters in the Project Setup dialog according to your specifications. The parameters in the Project Setup dialog determine the record file format, sample rate, project duration, etc. that affect the audio recordings that you make during the course of the project.
Recording Basic Recording Methods RELATED LINKS Editing - Project & MixConsole on page 1071 VST on page 1087 Record Enabling Tracks on Selection You can set up a preference so that tracks are record-enabled when you select them. PROCEDURE 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2. Open the Editing—Project & MixConsole page and activate Enable Record on Selected Audio Track or Enable Record on Selected MIDI Track. RESULT The tracks are record-enabled when you select them.
Recording Basic Recording Methods RESULT If you have unlocked the punch positions from the locator positions, recording is automatically activated when the project cursor reaches the punch in position. If cycle mode is activated, and the punch in point corresponds to the left locator position, and the punch out point is positioned before the right locator, recording is stopped at the punch out position and resumed at the punch in position.
Recording Basic Recording Methods RELATED LINKS Punch In and Punch Out on page 238 Stopping Recording and Playback You can stop recording and playback manually. PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● Click Stop on the Transport panel. ● Press Num 0 . RESULT Recording and playback stops. Cycle Recording You can record in a cycle, that is, you can record a selected section repeatedly and seamlessly. PREREQUISITE A cycle is set up with the left and right locators. PROCEDURE 1.
Recording Basic Recording Methods 5. Click Record. RESULT The project cursor rolls back and starts playback at the time that has been set as pre-roll amount. When the cursor reaches the left locator, recording is automatically activated. When the cursor reaches the right locator, recording is deactivated, and playback continues for the time that has been set as post-roll amount. Common Record Modes Menu The Common Record Modes determine what happens if you click Record during an audio or MIDI recording.
Recording Monitoring Monitoring In Cubase, monitoring means listening to the input signal while preparing to record or while recording. The following ways of monitoring are available. ● Via Cubase. ● Externally by listening to the signal before it reaches Cubase. ● By using ASIO Direct Monitoring. This is a combination of both other methods. Monitoring via Cubase If you use monitoring via Cubase, the input signal is mixed with the audio playback.
Recording Monitoring 4. On your mixing desk or mixer application for your audio hardware, activate the Thru or Direct Thru mode to send the input audio back out again. ASIO Direct Monitoring If your audio hardware is ASIO 2.0 compatible, it may support ASIO Direct Monitoring. This feature may also be available for audio hardware with macOS drivers. In ASIO Direct Monitoring mode, the monitoring is done in the audio hardware, and monitoring is controlled from Cubase.
Recording Audio Recording Specifics 2. Make sure MIDI Thru Active is activated. 3. In the track list, activate Monitor. RESULT Incoming MIDI is echoed back out again. RELATED LINKS MIDI on page 1078 Audio Recording Specifics Specific preparations and settings are required for audio recording. Audio Recording Preparations Before you can record audio, you must make some preparations.
Recording Audio Recording Specifics If you want to have separate folders for different types of material (speech, ambient sounds, music, etc.), you can create subfolders within the project Audio folder and assign different tracks to different subfolders. This way, all audio files still reside within the project folder, which makes managing the project easier. Getting the Track Ready for Recording Before you can record audio, you must add a track and set it up.
Recording Audio Recording Specifics RELATED LINKS Setting up Input and Output Ports on page 23 Audio Bus Setup on page 24 Audio Track Inspector on page 118 Audio Recording You can record audio using any of the basic recording methods. When you finish recording, an audio file is created in the Audio folder within the project folder. In the Pool, an audio clip is created for the audio file, and an audio event that plays the whole clip appears on the recording track.
Recording Audio Recording Specifics Recording and Effects Cubase allows you to add effects and/or EQ directly while recording. This is done by adding insert effects and/or making EQ settings for the input channel in the MixConsole. IMPORTANT If you record with effects, the effects become part of the audio file itself. You cannot change the effect settings after recording. When you are recording with effects, consider using 32-bit float or 64-bit float format.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics 3. Make sure that an audio track is record-enabled and receives audio from the signal source. 4. When you have played some audio material that you want to capture (either in stop mode or during playback), click Record. 5. Stop the recording after a few seconds. This creates an audio event that starts where the cursor position was when you activated recording.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics MIDI Recording Preparations The preparations described in the following sections mainly focus on external MIDI devices. MIDI Instruments and Channels Most MIDI synthesizers can play several sounds at the same time, each on a different MIDI channel. This allows you to play back several sounds (bass, piano, etc.) from the same instrument. Some devices, such as General MIDI compatible sound modules, always receive on all 16 MIDI channels.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics Setting the MIDI Channel and Output The MIDI channel and output settings determine where the recorded MIDI is routed during playback. They are also relevant for monitoring MIDI in Cubase. You can select the channel and output in the track list or in the Inspector. PROCEDURE 1. In the track list, select the track to which you want to assign a MIDI channel and output. 2. In the topmost Inspector section, open the Output Routing pop-up menu and select an output.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics 2. In the MIDI editor toolbar, activate Record in Editor. 3. Do one of the following to activate recording: ● Click Record on the Transport panel. ● Click Record on the toolbar. RESULT The MIDI data is recorded into the MIDI part that is opened in the MIDI editor. If you record outside the part borders, the part is automatically enlarged. RELATED LINKS Key Editor Toolbar on page 780 MIDI Recording You can record MIDI using any of the basic recording methods.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics Note Messages Cubase records note-on, note-off, and MIDI channel messages. If you press and release a key on your synthesizer or on another MIDI keyboard, the following messages are recorded: ● Note-on (key down) ● Note-off (key up) ● MIDI channel NOTE Normally, the MIDI channel information is overridden by the MIDI channel setting for the track. However, if you set the track to the Any MIDI channel, the notes will be played back on their original channels.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics ● If you want Cubase to perform a MIDI reset on stop, activate Reset on Stop in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page). ● If you want Cubase to insert a reset event at the end of a recorded part, activate Insert Reset Events after Record in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page). This resets controller data such as sustain, aftertouch, pitchbend, modulation, and breath control.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics Keep Last Each completed lap replaces the previously recorded lap. If you deactivate recording or press Stop before the cursor reaches the right locator, the previous take will be kept. If you do not play or input any MIDI during a lap, nothing happens, and the previous take will be kept. Stacked Each recorded cycle lap is turned into a separate MIDI part, and the track is divided into lanes, one for each cycle lap.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics ● When you play MIDI notes in Stop mode and you do not play for more than 30 seconds, before playing more MIDI events in Stop mode. NOTE You can also empty the buffer manually.
Recording MIDI Recording Specifics 2. In the top section of the MIDI track Inspector, click Retrospective Recording. 3. From the pop-up menu, select one of the following: ● To insert the MIDI data as one, continuous MIDI part, select Insert as Linear Recording. ● To insert the MIDI data as stacked MIDI parts, select Insert as Cycle Recording. NOTE This is only available if your MIDI data was captured during playback, and cycle mode was active.
Recording Remaining Record Time ● If the data was captured during playback, it is inserted into the MIDI part along the timeline. ● If the data was captured in Stop mode, it is inserted at the project cursor position. Emptying the Retrospective Record Buffer You can empty the retrospective record buffer manually. PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● In the top section of the MIDI track Inspector, open the Retrospective Recording pop-up menu, and select Empty Retrospective Record Buffer.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files You can add audio and MIDI files to your project by importing them. Audio File Import You can import compressed and uncompressed audio files in a variety of different formats. You can also import audio from audio CDs or extract the audio of video files.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Audio File Import Import Options dialog for single file import Import Options dialog for multipe file import Copy File to Project Folder/Copy All Files to Project Folder Copies the audio file to the Audio folder of the project, and has the clip refer to the copy. Deactivate this option to have the clip refer to the original file in the original location. In this case, it is marked as “external” in the Pool.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Audio File Import RELATED LINKS Setting up Audio File Import Options on page 275 On Import Audio Files Settings You can set up standard settings that are performed automatically each time you import audio files. ● When you import audio files and Use Settings is activated in the On Import Audio Files section of the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page), the settings are used for importing audio.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Audio File Import RESULT In the Project window, an event referencing the audio file is inserted on the selected track at the project cursor position. If no track was selected, a new track is created. A new audio clip is created and added to the Pool. If you chose a compressed audio file other than FLAC, Cubase copies the original compressed file and converts it to wave format (Windows) or AIFF format (macOS).
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Audio File Import RESULT The copied audio files are imported into the Project window and inserted on new tracks at the project cursor position. By default, imported audio CD tracks are saved as wave files (Windows) or AIFF files (macOS) in the Audio folder of the current project. New audio clips are created and added to the Pool. NOTE You can also import audio files to the Pool only without importing them into the Project window.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Audio File Import Columns The columns in the dialog have the following functions: Copy Activate this option for the tracks that you want to copy/import. # Shows the track number. CD Track The name of the CD track. On import, this is used as file name. It is provided automatically from CDDB, if available. To rename a track, click the track name and enter a new name. Length The length of the audio CD track in minutes and seconds. Size The file size of the audio CD track in MB.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files Audio File Import Copy Copies the files. Copied Files Lists the files that you copied for import. Importing Audio from Video Files You can import the audio from a video file without importing the video itself. PROCEDURE 1. Select File > Import > Audio from Video File. 2. In the file dialog that opens, locate and select the video file, and click Open. RESULT The audio of the selected video file is extracted and converted to a wave file that is saved in the Audio folder.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files MIDI File Import AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Open the part in the Audio Part Editor to edit each slice separately by muting, moving, and resizing events, adding effects and processing, for example. You can also adjust the tempo and have the REX file automatically follow, provided that its track is set to a musical time base. NOTE You can achieve similar results by using Cubase’s own loop slicing features.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files MIDI File Import Ignore Master Track Events on Merge Ignores tempo track data if you import a MIDI file into the current project. The imported MIDI file will play according to the current tempo track in the project. Auto Dissolve Format 0 Automatically dissolves imported MIDI files of type 0. Each embedded MIDI channel in the file is placed on a separate track in the Project window. Destination Allows you to specify what happens when you drag a MIDI file into the project.
Importing Audio and MIDI Files MIDI File Import IMPORTANT Do not change the order of events within the XF data or the event data itself, unless you have a lot of experience with XF data. Cubase can also export XF data as part of a MIDI file of type 0. If you do not want to export the XF data together with the MIDI data, mute or delete the tracks containing the XF data. MIDI Loops In Cubase, you can import MIDI loops. To import MIDI loops, use the MediaBay. MIDI loops have the file extension .midiloop.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing means moving recorded audio or MIDI and positioning it on the nearest grid position that is musically relevant. Quantizing is designed to correct errors, but you can also use it in a creative way. You can quantize audio and MIDI to a grid or to a groove. Audio and MIDI can be quantized at the same time. However, what exactly happens during quantizing differs for audio and MIDI: ● Audio quantizing affects the audio event starts or the content of your audio.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing MIDI Event Starts Moves the ends of MIDI events to the nearest grid positions. ● Freeze MIDI Quantize Makes the start and end positions of MIDI events permanent. This function is useful in situations where you want to quantize a second time, based on the current quantized positions rather than the original positions. ● Create Groove Quantize Preset Creates a groove quantize preset based on hitpoints that you have created in the Sample Editor.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing MIDI Event Lengths Quantizing MIDI Event Lengths You can quantize the MIDI event lengths. PREREQUISITE You have set up a length quantize value on the Length Quantize pop-up menu on the Key Editor toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. 2. Perform one of the following actions: ● In the Key Editor, select the MIDI events that you want to quantize. ● In the Project window, select a MIDI part. Select Edit > Advanced Quantize > Quantize MIDI Event Lengths.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantizing Audio Event Lengths (AudioWarp Quantizing) PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select an audio event, a sliced loop, or an audio part. 2. Select Edit > Quantize. RESULT The event snap point, or, if not available, the start of the audio event, is quantized. Event starts that do not match exact note positions are moved to the closest grid positions. NOTE If you use the Quantize function on an audio part, the starts of the events inside the part are quantized.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Quantize Panel The Quantize Panel allows you to define how to quantize audio or MIDI to the grid or to a groove. Depending on what method you choose, different parameters are shown. To open the Quantize Panel, perform one of the following actions: ● Click Open Quantize Panel on the toolbar. ● Select Edit > Quantize Panel.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Quantize Presets To the top of the Quantize Panel the quantize presets are shown. Here, you can load and save presets that include all settings for quantizing. Select Preset Allows you to select a preset. Save Preset Allows you to save the current settings as a preset, so that they become available on all Quantize Presets pop-up menus. Remove Preset Allows you to remove the selected preset. Rename Preset Opens a dialog where you can rename the selected preset.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Creating Groove Quantize Presets You can create a groove quantize preset based on hitpoints that you have created in the Sample Editor. PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, double-click the audio event from which you want to extract the timing. The Sample Editor opens. 2. Open the Hitpoints section. The hitpoints for the audio event are detected and displayed automatically. 3. Open the Create section, and click Groove. The groove is extracted.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel The following options are available: Grid Allows you to select the basic value for the quantize grid. Swing Offsets every second position in the grid, creating a swing or shuffle feel. NOTE Swing is only available if Grid is set to a straight value and Tuplet is deactivated. Catch Range Allows you to set a value that determines that quantizing affects only audio or MIDI within the set distance from the grid lines. This is reflected in the grid display.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Rough Allows you to set a distance in ticks, so that your audio or MIDI is quantized to random positions within the specified distance from the quantize grid. This allows for slight variations and, at the same time, prevents your audio or MIDI from ending up too far away from the grid. Soft Quantize Mode Applies a loose quantization so that your audio or MIDI moves only part of the way to the closest quantize grid position.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel The following options become available: Position Determines how much the timing of the groove affects the music. Velocity (MIDI Only) Determines how much the velocity values within the groove affect the music. NOTE Not all grooves contain velocity information. Length (MIDI Only) Allows you to specify how much the lengths of the notes are affected by the groove. NOTE For drums, the Length setting is ignored.
Quantizing MIDI and Audio Quantize Panel Max. Move Allows you to select a note value to specify a maximum distance that the audio or MIDI can be moved. Orig. Position Sets the original starting position of the quantized material as starting point of the quantizing. This allows you to synchronize material that does not start from bar 1 of the project.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Fades allow you to gradually increase or decrease the volume at the start or end of audio events or audio clips, and to create smooth transitions. You can create the following fades: ● Fade ins/fade outs Fade ins and fade outs allow you to gradually increase or decrease the volume of audio events or audio clips. Fade ins and fade outs can be either event-based or clip-based. Event-based fades are calculated in real time when you play back audio events.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event-Based Fades ● By using range selections You can edit event-based fades in the Fade dialogs. RELATED LINKS Creating and Editing Fades with the Handles on page 297 Creating and Editing Fades with the Range Selection Tool on page 298 Fade Dialog for Event-Based Fades on page 299 Creating and Editing Fades with the Handles You can create and edit event-based fade ins and fade outs using the event handles.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event-Based Fades In the upper left and right corners, you find triangular fade handles that allow you to change the fade-in or fade-out length. In the top middle, you find a square handle that allows you to change the volume. ● To change the fade-in length, drag the fade handle in the upper left to the right or to the left. ● To change the fade-out length, drag the fade handle in the upper right to the left or to the right.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event-Based Fades ● To create a fade in and a fade out, select a range in the middle of the event, and select Audio > Fades > Adjust Fades to Range. Applying Default Fades You can use default fades to create event-based fade ins and fade outs. PROCEDURE 1. Select one or more audio events in the Project window. 2. Perform one of the following actions: ● To create a fade in, select Audio > Fades > Apply Standard Fade In.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event-Based Fades The following options are available: 1 Presets pop-up menu Allows you to set up presets for fade-in or fade-out curves. 2 ● To apply a saved preset, select it from the pop-up menu. ● To remove a saved preset, select it from the pop-up menu and click Remove. Curve Type buttons Apply a spline interpolation, a damped spline interpolation, or a linear interpolation to the curve.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Creating Clip-Based Fades Creating Clip-Based Fades You can create and edit clip-based fade ins and fade outs using Direct Offline Processing. These fades are applied to the audio clip. Events that refer to the same clip get the same fades. PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select one or more audio events or a range for which you want to create a fade. The length of your selection determines the length of the fade area. 2.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Crossfades ● If the audio events overlap, a crossfade of the default shape (linear, symmetric) is applied in the overlapping area. NOTE You can edit the default crossfade length and shape in the Crossfade editor. ● If the respective audio clips overlap, the two events are resized so that they overlap, and a crossfade of the default length and shape is applied in the overlapping area. ● If neither the audio events nor the clips overlap, a crossfade cannot be created.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Crossfades Crossfade Editor The Crossfade editor allows you to edit crossfades. It contains fade-in and fade-out curve settings, and common settings. ● To open the Crossfade editor, select one or both crossfaded events, and select Audio > Fades > Crossfade, or double-click the crossfade zone. Curve Type buttons Determine whether the corresponding fade curve uses Spline Interpolation Damped Spline Interpolation , or Linear Interpolation .
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Crossfades must be possible to resize the corresponding event. For example, if the fade-out event already plays its audio clip to the end, its end point cannot be moved any further to the right. Equal Gain Adjusts the fade curves so that the summed fade-in and fade-out amplitudes are the same all along the crossfade region. This is often suitable for short crossfades.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Auto Fades and Crossfades Auto Fades and Crossfades Cubase features an Auto Fade function that can be set both globally and separately for each audio track. Auto fades allow you to create smoother transitions between events by applying fade ins and fade outs with a length between 1 and 500 ms. IMPORTANT As event-based fades are calculated in real time during playback, applying auto fades to a higher number of audio events results in a higher demand on the processor.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Auto Fades and Crossfades Activates auto fade ins. 2 Auto Fade Out Activates auto fade outs. 3 Auto Crossfades Activates auto crossfades. 4 Use Project Settings This is only available if you opened the Auto Fades dialog for individual tracks. Deactivate this to set up and apply the settings to individual tracks only. If you want a track with individual auto fade settings to use the global settings again, activate Use Project Settings.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event Envelopes ● Right-click the track in the track list, and from the context menu, select Auto Fades Settings. ● Select the track, and in the Inspector, click Auto Fades Settings. The Auto Fades dialog for the track opens. 2. Deactivate Use Project Settings. Any settings you now make are applied to the track only. 3. Set up the auto fades. 4. Click OK. Event Envelopes Event envelopes are volume curves for audio events.
Fades, Crossfades, and Envelopes Event Envelopes Removing Event Envelopes You can remove the entire event envelope or single curve points. PROCEDURE ● Perform one of the following actions: ● To remove a curve point from the envelope, click on it and drag it outside the event. ● To remove an event envelope curve from a selected event, select Audio > Remove Volume Curve. Creating Clip-Based Volume Changes You can create volume changes for the audio clip. The audio event changes accordingly. PROCEDURE 1.
Arranger Track The arranger functions in Cubase allow you to work in a non-linear fashion. Using an arranger track allows you to specify how and when specific sections are played back, even in live performances. This way, you do not need to move, copy, and paste events in the Project window. NOTE There can be only one arranger track in a project. To use the arranger functions, you must add an arranger track and define arranger events. Arranger events can be of any length.
Arranger Track Arranger Editor RELATED LINKS Arranger Track on page 144 Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events on page 313 Snap Function on page 77 Snap Types Menu on page 77 Renaming Arranger Events When you add arranger events, they are automatically named in alphabetical order. You can change the names so that they reflect the structure of your project, such as Intro, Chorus, Bridge, for example. PROCEDURE 1. Select the arranger event that you want to rename. 2.
Arranger Track Arranger Editor Arranger Editor Toolbar The Arranger Editor contains tools and shortcuts for setting the flatten options. ● To open the Arranger Editor, select an arranger track, and click Open Arranger Editor the track list. Activate Arranger Mode Activates playback in arranger mode. Previous Chain Step Navigates to the previous entry in the current arranger chain list. Next Chain Step Navigates to the next entry in the current arranger chain list.
Arranger Track Arranger Editor Arranger Chain Repeat Modes The Arranger Editor features a function that allows you to repeat and loop your arranger events. This way, you can create a sketch of a song structure. ● To open the Arranger Editor, select an arranger track, and click Open Arranger Editor in the track list. To select one of the repeat modes, click the Mode column in the Current Arranger Chain list. 1 Normal Plays back the arranger chain exactly the way you set it up.
Arranger Track Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events Current Project This is only available if Source is set to Current Chain. Activate this option if you want to save the flattened chain in the current project. New Project Allows you to flatten one or more chains in a new project with the following naming options: ● Append Chain Name Appends the chain names to the project name. ● Use Chain Name Names the new projects after the current arranger chains.
Arranger Track Setting up an Arranger Chain and Adding Events ● 4. Drag an arranger event from the Project window and drop it in the Current Arranger Chain list. Click Play. RESULT The arranger events are played back in the order that you specified in the arranger chain. RELATED LINKS Arranger Chain Repeat Modes on page 312 Adding a New Arranger Chain You can create several arranger chains in order to set up alternative versions for playback. PREREQUISITE Arranger Mode is activated. PROCEDURE 1.
Arranger Track Jump Mode Flattening the Arranger Chain When you have set up an arranger chain that you like, and you are sure that you do not want to edit it any more, you can convert it to a linear project. PREREQUISITE You have saved a copy of the project before flattening the arranger chain. NOTE Flattening the arranger chain may remove events and parts from the project. Only use Flatten when you know you do not want to edit the arranger track/chain any more.
Arranger Track Jump Mode 3. In the Arranger Events list of the Inspector, click the arrow to the left of the arranger event that you want to trigger. RESULT The arranger event is looped according to your settings, until you click another arranger event. NOTE You can assign key commands to trigger arranger events in the Arranger category of the Key Commands dialog. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● To stop Jump Mode, click Stop.
Arranger Track Arranging Music to Video 1 Bar Jumps to the next section at the next barline. 1 Beat Jumps to the next section at the next beat. End Plays the current section to the end, then jumps to the next section. Arranging Music to Video When you compose music for video, you can use arranger events to fill a specific video section with music. The following is an example on how you could do that. PREREQUISITE You have connected and set up an external sync master device to your computer.
Transpose Functions The transpose functions for audio and MIDI in Cubase allow you to change the pitches of audio and MIDI for playback without changing the actual MIDI notes or the audio. You can transpose the following: ● An entire project by changing the Project Root Key on the Project window toolbar. ● Specific sections of your project by creating a transpose track and adding transpose events. ● Individual parts or events by changing their transpose value on the Project window info line.
Transpose Functions Project Root Key Transposing with the Project Root Key The loops included in Cubase already contain root key information. If you change the project root key, these loops will follow automatically. PREREQUISITE You have opened a project that contains audio loops with different root keys. PROCEDURE 1. Optional: Select the drum and percussion loops in your project and set the Global Transpose setting on the info line to Independent. This setting excludes the loops from being transposed.
Transpose Functions Project Root Key 2. Optional: Select the drum and percussion loops in your project and set the Global Transpose setting on the info line to Independent. This setting excludes the loops from being transposed. 3. Select Project > Add Track > Transpose. The transpose track is added to the track list. You can only have one transpose track in a project. 4. In the track list, right-click the transpose track, and from the context menu select Set root key for unassigned events.
Transpose Functions Transpose Track Changing the Root Key of Individual Audio Events You can change or set the root key information for individual audio events or parts in the Pool. PROCEDURE 1. Select Media > Open Pool Window. 2. Open the View/Attributes pop-up menu, and activate the Root Key option. The Key column is displayed in the Pool window. 3. Click the Key column for the audio event or part that you want to assign a different root key to, and select a key from the pop-up menu.
Transpose Functions Transpose Track ● If you want to brighten up your loops in C major, you can transpose them by adding a transpose track and creating a transpose event with the value 5. This transposes them by 5 semitones, so that the subdominant on F major is played back. ● If you want to turn your song more interesting, you can transpose the last chorus of your project by adding a transpose track and creating a transpose event with the value 1.
Transpose Functions Keep Transpose in Octave Range Transpose Lock The lock function on the transpose track allows you to prevent your transpose events from being moved or changed by mistake. To lock the transpose track, activate Lock in the track list. Keep Transpose in Octave Range Keep Transpose in Octave Range on the transpose track keeps the transposition in the octave range.
Transpose Functions Transpose on the Info Line If Indicate Transpositions is deactivated, the original pitches of the notes in the MIDI part are shown. Transpose Track and Recording The transpose track affects the result of the recorded parts or events. If your project contains a transpose track with transpose events, and you record audio or MIDI, the following happens: ● Global Transpose is automatically set to Independent for the recorded parts or events.
Transpose Functions Excluding Individual Parts or Events from Global Transpose NOTE If the project already contains global transpose changes, it might be useful to activate Keep Transpose in Octave Range. RESULT The event is transposed accordingly. The transpose value is added to any global transpose change that you have created by using the root key or the transpose track.
Markers Markers are used to locate certain positions quickly. There are two types of markers: position markers and cycle markers. If you often find yourself jumping to a specific position within a project, you should insert a marker at this position. You can also use markers to make range selections or for zooming. Markers are located on the marker track. You can add 1 marker track.
Markers Markers Window Setting the Locators Using Cycle Markers Cycle markers represent ranges in your project. You can use them for moving the left and right locators. PROCEDURE ● To set the left locator to the cycle marker start and the right locator to the cycle marker end, perform one of the following actions: ● Double-click on a cycle marker. ● From the Cycle pop-up menu in the track list, select a cycle marker. RESULT The left and right locators are moved to encompass the cycle marker.
Markers Markers Window Settings section Show Marker IDs on Marker Track If this option is activated, the marker IDs are shown on marker track events. Cycle Follows When Locating to Markers This sets the left and right locators automatically to a position or cycle marker, when locating to this marker. This is useful if you need to set the locators on the fly during recording for Punch In/Punch Out, for example.
Markers Markers Window Auto-Scroll with Project Cursor Allows you to keep track of the locate arrow, even if your project contains a large number of markers. If this option is activated, the Markers window is automatically scrolled to keep the locate arrow visible. List of markers Lists the markers of the selected track. Editing in the Markers Window In the Markers window, you can select, edit, add, move, and remove markers. ● To select or edit a marker, click on it.
Markers Markers Window Marker Attributes Marker attributes are shown in the marker list of the Markers window. ● To open the Markers window, select Project > Markers. The following attribute columns are available: Locate An arrow indicates which marker is at the project cursor position (or closest to the project cursor). If you click in this column, the project cursor is moved to the corresponding marker position. This column cannot be hidden. ID Shows the marker ID numbers.
Markers Marker Track NOTE No matter by which attribute you sort, the second sort criterion will always be the position attribute. ● To reorder the marker attributes, drag and drop the corresponding column headers. ● To adjust the width of a column, place the mouse pointer between two column headers and drag left or right. Marker IDs Each position or cycle marker on a marker track has its own marker ID.
Markers Marker Track 3 Locate pop-up menu If you select a position or a cycle marker in this pop-up menu, the corresponding marker in the event display or in the Markers window is selected. 4 Cycle pop-up menu If you select a cycle marker in this pop-up menu, the left and right locators are set to the corresponding cycle marker. 5 Zoom pop-up menu If you select a cycle marker in this pop-up menu, the view zooms to the corresponding cycle marker. 6 Toggle Time Base Sets the track time base.
Markers Importing and Exporting Markers RELATED LINKS Marker Track on page 331 Using Markers to Select Ranges Markers can be used in conjunction with the Range Selection tool to make range selections in the Project window. This is useful if you quickly want to make a selection that spans all tracks in the project. PROCEDURE 1. Set markers at the start and end of the section that you want to move or copy. 2. Select the Range Selection tool and double-click on the marker track between the markers.
Markers Importing and Exporting Markers NOTE To be able to export markers via MIDI export, your project must contain a marker track.
MixConsole The MixConsole provides a common environment for producing mixes in stereo or surround. It allows you to control level, pan, solo/mute status, etc. for audio and MIDI channels. Furthermore, you can set up the input and output routing for multiple tracks or channels at the same time. You can undo/redo MixConsole parameter changes for an open project at any time. You can open the MixConsole in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window.
MixConsole MixConsole in Lower Zone Allows you to select what page is displayed in the fader section: the channel faders, the insert effects for a channel, or the send effects. The top button allows you to show/hide the toolbar. 2 Toolbar The toolbar shows tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MixConsole. 3 Fader section The fader section is always visible and shows all channels in the same order as in the track list.
MixConsole MixConsole in Lower Zone RESULT The track in the track list and the corresponding MixConsole channel are shown/hidden in the lower zone of the Project window. RELATED LINKS Opening the Visibility on page 58 Visibility on page 57 Determining the MixConsole Channel Order in the Lower Zone You can determine and lock the position of MixConsole channels in the lower zone of the Project window. PROCEDURE 1. At the top of the left zone, click the Visibility tab. 2.
MixConsole MixConsole Window MixConsole Window You can open the MixConsole in a separate window. To open the MixConsole, do one of the following: ● Press F3 . ● Select Studio > MixConsole. ● On the Project window toolbar, click Open MixConsole. NOTE This is only visible on the toolbar if the Media & MixConsole Windows section is activated. The MixConsole is divided into the following sections: 1 Toolbar The toolbar shows tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MixConsole.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 3 Fader section The fader section is always visible and shows all channels in the same order as in the track list. Apart from the main sections, you can also access the following sections from within the MixConsole window: 1 Channel overview Displays all channels as boxes. If you have more channels than can be displayed in the window, you can use the channel overview to navigate to other channels and select them.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Allows you to show additional channel controls as needed. 5 Pictures Allows you to add a track picture to the selected channel. Pictures can help you identify your MixConsole channels quickly. 6 Notepad Allows you to enter notes and comments about a channel. Each channel has its own notepad. 7 Channel Latency Allows you to show the latencies caused by insert effects or channel strip modules.
MixConsole MixConsole Window History Lists all MixConsole parameter changes, and allows you to undo/redo specific changes. The following tabs are available at the bottom of the left zone: Channel Lists all channels contained in your project. Zones Allows you to lock the position of specific channels.
MixConsole MixConsole Window NOTE Channels that are locked on the Zones tab are not synchronized. RELATED LINKS MixConsole Visibility on page 341 Synchronizing Track and Channel Visibility on page 59 MixConsole Zones The Zones tab lists all channels contained in your project, and allows you to lock the position of specific channels. ● To lock channels on the left/right of the fader section, click the left or right dots next to the channel names. Locked channels are excluded from scrolling.
MixConsole MixConsole Window ● To redo MixConsole parameter actions, click the orange line in the history list and drag it down. NOTE You can also undo/redo MixConsole parameter actions by using the corresponding buttons in the MixConsole toolbar. RELATED LINKS Undoing/Redoing MixConsole Parameter Changes on page 348 MixConsole Toolbar The toolbar contains tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MixConsole.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Rack Settings Opens a pop-up menu with settings for the racks. Locators Go to Left Locator Position Allows you to go to the left locator position. Left Locator Position Shows the left locator position. Go to Right Locator Position Allows you to go to the right locator position. Right Locator Position Shows the right locator position. Locator Range Duration Locators to Selection Allows you to set the locators to the selection.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Stop Stops playback. Start Starts playback. Transport Record Activates/Deactivates record mode. Time Displays Primary Time Display Shows the position of the project cursor in the selected time format. Select Primary Time Format Allows you to select a time format for the primary time display. Secondary Time Display Shows the position of the project cursor in the selected time format. Select Secondary Time Format Allows you to select a time format for the secondary time display.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Activate/Deactivate Write for All Tracks Activates/Deactivates write automation for all tracks. Suspend All Read/Write Automation Suspends all read/write automation. Bypass Inserts Bypasses all inserts. Bypass EQs Bypasses all EQs. Bypass Channel Strip Bypasses all channel strip modules. Bypass Sends Bypasses all sends. Link Group Temporary Link Mode Synchronizes all touched parameters of selected channels.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Audio Performance Meter Audio Performance Meter The upper bar displays either the current realtime peak or the ASIO-Guard load, depending on which of the two has the higher value. The lower bar shows the hard disk transfer load of the disk engine. For a more detailed display of realtime and ASIO-Guard load, click to open the Audio Performance window. Right Divider Right Divider Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown.
MixConsole MixConsole Window NOTE If the channel was outside the view or hidden, it is now shown. Channels that are hidden using Set Channel Type Filter are not shown. Undoing/Redoing MixConsole Parameter Changes You can undo/redo MixConsole parameter changes and experiment with different MixConsole settings. NOTE MixConsole parameters that change due to read automation actions are not part of the MixConsole history.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 2. Click to the left of a channel type to uncheck it and hide all channels of that type. RESULT Channels of the filtered type are removed from the fader section and the color of the Set Channel Type Filter button changes to indicate that a channel type is hidden.
MixConsole MixConsole Window PROCEDURE 1. Set up the configuration that you want to save. 2. On the toolbar, click Channel Visibility Configurations. 3. From the pop-up menu, select Add Configuration. 4. In the Add Configuration dialog, enter a name for the configuration. 5. Click OK. RESULT The configuration is saved and you can return to it at any time.
MixConsole MixConsole Window NOTE You can assign key commands for the channel visibility agents in the Channel & Track Visibility category of the Key Commands dialog. Undoing/Redoing Visibility Changes You can undo/redo up to 10 visibility changes. PROCEDURE 1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Channel Visibility Agents. 2. Select Undo Visibility Change or Redo Visibility Change.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Rack Settings Menu The Rack Settings pop-up menu allows you to make settings for the racks. ● To open the Rack Settings pop-up menu, click Rack Settings on the MixConsole toolbar. Exclusive Expanded Rack Shows the selected rack exclusively and collapses the other racks. Fixed Number of Slots Shows all available slots for the Inserts, Sends, Cues, and Quick Controls racks.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Using Quick Link You can activate the Temporary Link Mode to synchronize all touched parameters of selected channels. PROCEDURE 1. Select the channels that you want to link. 2. On the MixConsole toolbar, activate Q-Link. NOTE You can also press Shift - Alt/Opt to temporarily link channels. In that case, the link is only active as long as you press the keys. 3. Change the parameters for one of the selected channels.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Reset MixConsole Channels Allows you to reset EQ, insert, and send effect settings for all or selected channels. Solo and mute buttons are deactivated, the volume fader is set to 0 dB, and pan is set to the center position. RELATED LINKS MixConsole Toolbar on page 343 Saving MixConsole Settings You can save MixConsole settings for selected audio-related channels and load them into any project. PROCEDURE 1. Select the channels with the settings that you want to save. 2.
MixConsole MixConsole Window NOTE If a channel is deactivated on the Visibility tab or if its channel type is deactivated, it is not shown in the fader section. The MixConsole in the lower zone of the Project window does not follow any visibility changes you perform in the MixConsole window and vice versa. It is linked to the track visibility of the Project window.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Pan Control For each audio-related channel with at least a stereo output configuration, you can find a pan control at the top of the fader section. For MIDI channels, the pan control sends out MIDI pan messages. The result depends on how your MIDI instrument is set to respond to pan. The pan control allows you to position a channel in the stereo spectrum. ● To make fine adjustments, hold down Shift when you move the pan control.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Volume Each channel in the fader section of the MixConsole has a volume fader. The fader levels are displayed below the fader, in dB for audio-related channels and as MIDI volume (0 to 127) for MIDI channels. ● To change the volume, move the fader up or down. ● To make fine volume adjustments, press Shift while moving the faders. ● To reset the volume to its default value, press Ctrl/Cmd and click a fader.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 2. 3. Do one of the following to set the level position for a color change: ● Double-click a level position to the right of the meter scale and enter the level (dB) value. To enter dB values smaller than zero, add a minus sign before the entered number. ● Click a level position and drag it to a specific level, and press Shift for more accurate positioning.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Input Levels When recording digital sound, it is important to set the input levels high enough to ensure low noise and high audio quality. At the same time, you must avoid clipping (digital distortion). Setting Input Levels In the MixConsole, you can set the input level. Make sure that the signal is loud enough but does not exceed 0 dB. PROCEDURE 1. Select Functions Menu > Global Meter Settings > Meter Position and activate Input.
MixConsole MixConsole Window signal while it is being recorded. This may raise the level of the signal, which causes clipping in the recorded audio file. Channel Racks The Channel Racks section contains specific MixConsole functions, such as routing, insert, or send handling. These are organized in racks. NOTE The MixConsole in the lower zone of the Project window features the Inserts and the Sends rack only.
MixConsole MixConsole Window You can copy rack and channel settings between different types of channels, provided that the target channels have corresponding settings. ● For example, copying from input/output channels leaves the sends settings in the target channel unaffected. Routing The Routing rack allows you to configure input and output routing, that is, setting up input and output busses. NOTE This channel rack is only available in the MixConsole window.
MixConsole MixConsole Window ● Mono output busses, mono group output busses, or mono FX channel output busses. These should not lead to feedback. RELATED LINKS Routing on page 361 Input Routing Configurations for Stereo Channels For stereo channels, the following input routing configurations are available: ● Mono or stereo input busses. ● Mono or stereo output busses, mono or stereo group output busses, and mono or stereo FX channel output busses. These should not lead to feedback.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 2. Click to the left of the high-cut filter to activate the high-cut filter. You have the following options: ● Drag the slider to adjust the cutoff frequency. The available range spans from 20 kHz to 50 Hz. ● Click Select Filter Slope on the right of the high-cut filter to select a filter slope. You can choose between 6, 12, 24, 36, and 48 dB. The default value is 12 dB. 3. Click to the left of the low-cut filter to activate the low-cut filter.
MixConsole MixConsole Window RELATED LINKS Audio Effects on page 393 Adding Insert Effects You can add insert effects to MixConsole channels. PROCEDURE 1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Racks and activate Inserts to show the Inserts rack above the fader section. 2. Click one of the insert slots to open the insert selector. 3. Click an insert effect to select it. RESULT The selected insert effect is loaded and automatically activated. Its plug-in panel opens.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Activating Side-Chaining for Inserts Some of the inserts feature side-chain functionality. PROCEDURE 1. Right-click an insert effect. 2. From the context menu, select Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining. Saving/Loading FX Chain Presets You can save and load all insert rack settings using FX chain presets. FX chain presets have the file name extension .fxchainpreset.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Equalizer Settings You can make equalizer settings for the 4 bands. These have different default frequency values and different Q names. However, they all have the same frequency range (20 Hz to 20 kHz). You can specify different filter types for each individual module. 1 Bypass EQ Click to bypass all EQ bands. 2 Curve display Click on the display in a channel to show a larger version.
MixConsole MixConsole Window ● Double-click the curve point to deactivate it. ● Drag the curve point up or down to adjust the gain. ● Press Ctrl/Cmd to edit only the gain. ● Drag left or right to adjust the frequency. ● Press Alt/Opt to edit only the frequency. ● Press Shift while dragging to set the Q-factor. ● To invert the EQ curve, open the context menu and select Invert EQ Settings.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Opens a pop-up menu where you can select an EQ type for the band. Bands 1 and 4 can act as parametric, shelving, or high/low-cut filters. EQ bands 2 and 3 are always parametric filters. RELATED LINKS Making Filter Settings on page 362 Saving/Loading EQ Presets You can save and load EQ presets.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Noise Gate Noise gating silences audio signals below a set threshold. As soon as the signal level exceeds the threshold, the gate opens to let the signal through. Threshold Determines the level at which Gate is activated. Signal levels above the set threshold trigger the gate to open, and signal levels below the set threshold close the gate. Range Adjusts the attenuation of the gate when it is shut.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Ratio Sets the amount of gain reduction that is applied to signals above the set threshold. A ratio of 3:1 means that for every 3 dB the input level increases, the output level increases by 1 dB. Attack Determines how fast the compressor responds to signals above the set threshold. If the attack time is long, more of the early part of the signal passes through unprocessed.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Mix Sets the level balance between the dry signal and the wet signal. RELATED LINKS Tube Compressor – Details View on page 385 VintageCompressor The VintageCompressor is modeled after vintage type compressors. Input Gain In combination with the Output Gain setting, this parameter determines the compression amount. The higher the input gain setting and the lower the output gain setting, the more compression is applied. Output Gain Sets the output gain.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 3 Gain Sets the amount of cut or boost. The range is ±24 dB. 4 Q-Factor Determines the width of the affected frequency range. Higher values give narrower frequency ranges. 5 Frequency Sets the center frequency of the frequency range to be cut or boosted. Tools DeEsser This channel strip module reduces excessive sibilance, primarily for vocal and speech recordings.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Release Changes the gain of the release phase of the signal. Attack Length Determines the length of the attack phase. Output Gain Sets the output level. Sat Allows you to add warmth to the sound. Open the pop-up menu to select between Magneto II, Tape Saturation, and Tube Saturation. Magneto II This channel strip module simulates the saturation and compression of recording on analog tape machines. Saturation Determines the amount of saturation and the generation of overtones.
MixConsole MixConsole Window High-Frequency This is a high-cut filter. Use the frequency fader to reduce harshness of the output signal. Dual Simulates the use of two tape machines. Auto Gain Adjusts the gain automatically. Output Sets the output gain. Drive Amount LED Indicates the amount of drive of the signal. Tube Saturation This channel strip module simulates the saturation and compression of recording of analogue tube compressors. Drive Controls the amount of tube saturation.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Maximizer This channel strip module raises the loudness of audio material without the risk of clipping. Optimize Determines the loudness of the signal. Mix Amount Sets the level balance between the dry signal and the wet signal. Output Determines the maximum output level. Set this to 0 dB to avoid clipping. Gain Reduction LED Displays the amount of gain reduction.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Sends The Sends rack for audio-related channels features send effect slots that allow you to load send effects and value sliders that for determining the send level for a channel. For MIDI channels, the Sends rack features send effect slots that allow you to load send effects. You can use sends to route audio, instrument, group, and FX channels to output, group, FX channels, or use them as effect side-chain sources.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Adding Track Quick Controls in the MixConsole You can add Track Quick Controls in the MixConsole. PROCEDURE 1. On the MixConsole toolbar, click Racks and activate Track Quick Controls to show the rack above the fader section. 2. Click one of the slots to open a selector. 3. Select a parameter from the list. RESULT The selected parameter is loaded and automatically activated as Track Quick Control.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 3. To close the Notepad, press Esc , or click in another section of the MixConsole. Applying Channel Colors to Channel Controls You can apply channel colors to the channel controls as well. This is useful if you have many channels in the MixConsole and you want to discern them by their color. PREREQUISITE You have manually or automatically assigned track/channel colors. PROCEDURE 1. Select Edit > Preferences. 2.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Name The name of the plug-in that causes the latency. Type Indicates if the latency is caused by an insert effect, a channel strip module, or a panner. Latency (ms) Shows the latency in milliseconds. NOTE ● If the latency value is marked with (*), the corresponding plug-in features a Live button or a low latency mode. If you activate Constrain Delay Compensation, this mode is automatically activated.
MixConsole MixConsole Window NOTE To separate the channel selection in the Channel Settings window from the channel selection in the MixConsole, open the Functions Menu on the toolbar of the Channel Settings window, and deactivate Follow ‘e’ buttons or selection changes. To separate the channel selection in the Channel Settings window from the track selection in the Project window, deactivate Sync Selection in Project Window and MixConsole in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Project & MixConsole page).
MixConsole MixConsole Window The fader section shows the current channel. The sections are arranged in zones at the left and right of the Channel Settings window.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Shows the input channel in the Channel Settings window. Channel Name Channel Name Shows the name of the channel that is shown in the Channel Settings window. Channel Destinations Go to Output/Select an Output Opens the output channel in the Channel Settings window. Output Shows the name of the output channel. Edit Instrument Edit VST Instrument Allows you to open the VST instrument control panel. This is only available for MIDI and instrument channels.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Set up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible. Channel Settings – Channel Inserts The Channel Inserts section is shown in the Channel Settings window. Bypass Inserts Bypasses the insert effects for the channel. Inserts Allows you to add insert effects for the channel. Preset Management Allows you to load or save FX Chain presets.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Channel Settings – Channel Strip The Channel Strip/Equalizer section is shown in the Channel Settings window. Bypass Channel Strip Bypasses the channel strip modules for the channel. NOTE You can reset the channel strip modules for the channel by Alt/Opt -clicking this button. Channel Strip Allows you to activate and set up channel strip modules for the channel. Preset Management Allows you to load or save strip presets.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Tools on page 372 Sat on page 373 Limit on page 374 Channel Settings on page 379 Standard Compressor – Details View The Standard Compressor features a details view with more controls and value readouts for the meters. ● To open the details view, click Edit Module .
MixConsole MixConsole Window In the details view, the following additional parameters are available: ● Character ● Low/High switch for Ratio ● Side-chain section with Frequency, Filter Type, Q-Factor, and Monitor ● Input Gain meter ● Output Gain meter You can close the details view by clicking Close Module . RELATED LINKS Tube Compressor on page 370 VintageCompressor - Details View The VintageCompressor features a details view with more controls and value readouts for the meters.
MixConsole MixConsole Window In the details view, the following additional parameters are available: ● Mix ● Ratio buttons ● Input Gain meter ● Output Gain meter ● Gain Reduction meter You can close the details view by clicking Close Module . RELATED LINKS VintageCompressor on page 371 Maximizer – Details View The Maximizer features a details view with more controls and value readouts for the meters. ● To open the details view, click Edit Module 387 Cubase Artist 12 .
MixConsole MixConsole Window In the details view, the following additional parameters are available: ● Classic This mode is suited for all styles of music. ● Modern This mode is particularly suited for contemporary styles of music. Release allows you to set the overall release time, Recover allows for a faster signal recovering at the beginning of the release phase.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Channel Settings – Equalizer The Channel Strip/Equalizer section is shown in the Channel Settings window. Bypass Equalizers Bypasses the equalizer settings for the channel. NOTE You can reset the equalizers by Alt/Opt -clicking this button. Preset Management Allows you to load or save equalizer presets. Equalizer Settings Opens the Equalizer Settings panel. Equalizer display Allows you to make equalizer settings for the 4 bands in a large EQ curve display with several modes.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Show Equalizer Controls Shows/Hides the equalizer controls. Show Controls as Sliders Shows the equalizer controls as sliders. Show Controls as Knobs Shows the equalizer controls as knobs. Show FFT Pre EQ Curve Shows/Hides the FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) input curve for the reference channel. Hold FFT Post EQ Peak Curve Holds the peak values of the FFT (Fast Fourier Transform) output curve for the reference channel.
MixConsole MixConsole Window Sends—Destinations Allows you to set up a destination for the send effects for the channel. Sends—Panning Allows you to set up panning for the send effects. RELATED LINKS Channel Settings on page 379 Channel Settings – Channel Faders The Channel Faders section is shown in the Channel Settings window. The controls are the same as in the MixConsole fader section.
MixConsole MixConsole Window 3. Press Shift - Tab to activate the previous section. Navigating in a Section Once you have activated the focus for a section, you can control it with the computer keyboard. In the channel racks section and in the fader section, controls that are selected for keyboard control are indicated by a red border. CHOICES ● To navigate through the controls, use the Up Arrow , Down Arrow , Left Arrow , or Right Arrow keys. ● To activate or deactivate a switch, press Return .
Audio Effects Cubase comes with a number of included effect plug-ins that you can use to process audio, group, and instrument channels. The effects and their parameters are described in the separate document Plug-in Reference. Insert Effects and Send Effects You can apply effects to audio channels by using insert effects or send effects. Insert Effects Insert effects are inserted in the signal chain of an audio channel. This way, the whole channel signal passes through the effect.
Audio Effects Insert Effects and Send Effects To edit send effects, you can use the following sends sections: ● The Sends rack in the MixConsole. ● ● The Sends section in the Inspector. RELATED LINKS Direct Offline Processing on page 421 VST Standard Audio effects can be integrated in Cubase thanks to the VST standard. At the moment, the VST 3 and VST 2 standards are supported. The VST 3 plug-in standard offers improvements like smart plug-in processing and side-chain inputs.
Audio Effects Insert Effects Plug-In Delay Compensation Some audio effects, especially dynamics processors that feature a look-ahead functionality, may take a brief time to process the audio fed into them. As a result, the output audio is slightly delayed. To compensate for this, Cubase provides plug-in delay compensation. Plug-in delay compensation is featured throughout the entire audio path maintaining the sync and timing of all audio channels.
Audio Effects Insert Effects NOTE If you want to use an effect with identical settings on several channels, set up a group channel and apply your effect as a single insert for this group. RELATED LINKS Dither Effects on page 410 Changing the Number of Pre-Fader/Post-Fader Slots on page 364 Adding Insert Effects to Group Channels on page 397 Rack Settings Menu on page 352 Adding Insert Effects If you add insert effects to audio channels, the audio is routed through the insert effects. PROCEDURE 1.
Audio Effects Insert Effects RESULT The selected insert effect is added to the bus and activated. The effect control panel is opened. Adding Insert Effects to Group Channels If you add insert effects to group channels, you can process several audio tracks through the same effect. PROCEDURE 1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track . 2. Click Group. 3. Open the Audio Outputs pop-up menu, and select the desired output bus. 4. Click Add Track.
Audio Effects Insert Effects Copying Insert Effects You can add insert effects to audio channels by copying them from other audio channels or from other slots of the same audio channel. PREREQUISITE You have added at least one insert effect to an audio channel. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > MixConsole. 2. In the Inserts rack, locate the insert effect that you want to copy. 3. Hold down Alt/Opt , and drag the insert effect on an insert slot. RESULT The insert effect is copied.
Audio Effects Insert Effects RESULT The effect is deactivated and all processing is terminated, but the effect is still loaded. Bypassing Insert Effects If you want to listen to the track without having it processed by a particular effect, but do not want to remove this effect completely from the insert slot, you can bypass it. A bypassed effect is still processing in the background. This allows for crackle-free comparison of the original and the processed signal.
Audio Effects VST Effect Selector Freezing Insert Effects Freezing an audio track and its insert effects allows you to reduce processor power. However, frozen tracks are locked for editing. You cannot edit, remove, or add insert effects for the frozen track. PREREQUISITE You have made all settings for the track and you are sure that you do not need to edit it anymore. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector for the audio track that you want to freeze, click Freeze Audio Channel. 2.
Audio Effects Send Effects 1 Expand Tree/Collapse Tree Expands/Collapses the tree. 2 Search VST Effect Allows you to search for VST effects by typing in the name or parts of the name, or the category. 3 Plug-in Collections and Options Allows you to select a collection. If you select the Default collection, the options Sort By Category and Sort by Vendor become available. These allow you to sort the default collection. Send Effects Send effects are outside the signal path of an audio channel.
Audio Effects Send Effects ● You can rename FX channel tracks as any other tracks. ● You can add automation tracks to FX channel tracks. This allows for automating various effect parameters. ● You can route the effect return to any output bus. ● You can adjust the FX channel in the MixConsole. This includes adjusting the effect return level, the balance, and the EQ. When you add an FX channel track, you can select if FX channel tracks are created inside or outside a dedicated folder.
Audio Effects Send Effects 2. In the Inspector, open the Sends section. 3. Right-click the send slot to which you want to add the FX channel, and select Add FX Channel to Send. 4. Open the Effect pop-up menu, and select an effect for the FX channel track. 5. Open the Configuration pop-up menu, and select a channel configuration for the FX channel track. 6. Open the Folder Setup pop-up menu, and select if you want to create FX channel tracks inside or outside a dedicated folder. 7.
Audio Effects Send Effects The Channel Settings window for the FX channel track opens. 2. In the Inserts section, click an insert slot on the Inserts tab, and select an effect from the selector. RESULT The selected effect is added as an insert effect to the FX channel track. Routing Audio Channels to FX Channels If you route an audio channel send to an FX channel, the audio is routed through the insert effects that you have set up for the FX channel. PROCEDURE 1. Select the audio track. 2.
Audio Effects Send Effects Pre/Post Fader Sends You can send the signal from the audio channel to the FX channel before or after the audio channel volume fader. ● Pre-fader sends The audio channel signal is sent to the FX channel before the audio channel volume fader. ● Post-fader sends The audio channel signal is sent to the FX channel after the audio channel volume fader.
Audio Effects Side-Chaining This determines how much of the signal from the audio channel is routed to the FX channel. RESULT The effect level is adjusted according to your settings. NOTE To determine how much of the signal from the FX channel is sent to the output bus, open the Channel Settings window for the FX channel track and adjust the effect return level. Side-Chaining Many VST 3 effects support side-chaining.
Audio Effects Side-Chaining Triggering a Delay Effect with Side-Chain Signals You can use side-chain signals to create a ducking delay effect. This is useful if you want to apply a delay effect that is audible only when no signal is present on a track. PROCEDURE 1. Select the audio track that contains the audio you want to delay. 2. Select Project > Duplicate Tracks. The events on the duplicated track are only used to reduce the volume of the effect that is added to the original track. 3.
Audio Effects Side-Chaining Triggering a Compressor with Side-Chain Signals Compression, expansion, or gating can be triggered by side-chain signals exceeding a specified threshold. This allows you to lower the volume of one audio signal every time another audio signal sets in. PREREQUISITE You have set up a project with a bass guitar and a bass drum track, for example, and you want to lower the bass guitar volume each time the bass drum hits. PROCEDURE 1. Select the bass guitar track. 2.
Audio Effects Side-Chaining Select the Plug-in Side-Chain Input This pop-up menu is only available if your plug-in supports several side-chain inputs. From the pop-up menu, select the input for which you want to add a side-chain source. Side-chain plug-in inputs that are routed to side-chain sources are indicated by a rhombus next to the input name. The number of available side-chain inputs depends on the plug-in. Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining Activates/Deactivates the side-chain functionality.
Audio Effects Dither Effects The selected insert effect is loaded and activated, and the audio is routed through it. The effect control panel opens. 4. On the effect control panel, click Set up Side-Chain Routing. 5. In the Side-Chain Routing panel, click Select the Plug-in Side-Chain Input, and from the pop-up menu, select the plug-in input for which you want to add a side-chain source. The number of available side-chain inputs depends on the plug-in. 6.
Audio Effects Effect Control Panel The following controls are available for all effects: 1 Activate Effect Activates/Deactivates the effect. 2 Bypass Effect Allows you to bypass the effect. 3 Read Automation/Write Automation Allows you to read/write automation for the effect parameter settings. 4 Switch between A/B Settings Switches to setting B when setting A is active, and to setting A when setting B is active.
Audio Effects Effect Control Panel 14 Focus Quick Controls Lock State: Locked/Unlocked Allows you to lock the focus of the quick control to the plug-in window. 15 Focus Quick Controls Indicator If this indicator is lit, the plug-in window has the quick control focus. NOTE For detailed information about the included effects and their parameters, see the separate document Plug-in Reference.
Audio Effects Effect Control Panel Allow Window to be Resized Allows the dynamic resizing of third-party plug-in windows in Cubase. This is useful if you activated Enable HiDPI (Windows only) in the Preferences dialog (General page), and your plug-in does not support dpi settings. NOTE Allow Window to be Resized is a plug-in-specific setting. You must activate/deactivate it for every plug-in that requires it.
Audio Effects Effect Presets RESULT The control panels are hidden and sent to the back of the application. To show them again, select Show Plug-in Windows. RELATED LINKS Effect Control Panel on page 410 Closing All Control Panels When you add an audio effect, the respective plug-in control panel opens automatically. You can close all control panels at once. PROCEDURE ● Select Window > Close All Plug-in Windows. NOTE This also closes VST instrument control panels. RESULT The control panels are closed.
Audio Effects Effect Presets The Results section of the presets browser lists the available presets for the selected effect. Loading Presets for Effects Most VST effect plug-ins come with a number of useful presets that you can instantly select. PREREQUISITE You have loaded an effect, either as a channel insert or into an FX channel, and the effect control panel is open. PROCEDURE 1. Click the preset browser field at the top of the control panel. 2.
Audio Effects Effect Presets AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK You can return to the preset that was selected when you opened the preset browser by clicking Revert to Last Setting. Saving Effect Presets You can save your effect settings as presets for further use. PROCEDURE 1. Open the Preset Management pop-up menu. 2. Select Save Preset. The Save Preset dialog opens. 3. In the New Preset section, enter a name for the new preset. 4.
Audio Effects Effect Presets 2. Select Save as Default Preset. You are asked if you want to save the current settings as default preset. 3. Click Yes. RESULT The effect settings are saved as default preset. Every time you load the effect, the default preset is loaded automatically. Copying and Pasting Presets Between Effects You can copy and paste effect presets between different instances of the same plug-in. PROCEDURE 1. Open the control panel for the effect that you want to copy. 2.
Audio Effects Effect Presets 3. On the Inserts tab, click Preset Management and select Save FX Chain Preset. 4. In the Save FX Chain Preset pane, enter a name for the new preset in the New Preset section. 5. Click OK. RESULT The insert effects and their effect parameters are saved as insert preset. Loading Insert Presets You can load insert presets to audio, group, instrument, and FX channels. PREREQUISITE You have saved a combination of insert effects as insert presets. PROCEDURE 1.
Audio Effects System Component Information Window Loading Insert Effect Settings from Track Presets You can extract the effects that are used in a track preset and load them into your inserts rack. PROCEDURE 1. Select the track to which you want to apply the new preset. 2. In the Inspector, open the Inserts section. 3. On the Inserts tab, click Preset Management and select From Track Preset. 4. In the track preset pane, select the preset that contains the insert effects you want to load. 5.
Audio Effects System Component Information Window Name The name of the plug-in. Vendor The manufacturer of the plug-in. File The name of the plug-in, including its file name extension. Path The path in which the plug-in file is located. Category The category of each plug-in. Version The version of the plug-in. SDK The version of the VST protocol with which the plug-in is compatible.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing allows you to instantly add audio processes to the selected audio events, clips, or ranges, without destructing the original audio. Applying offline effects is common practice in dialogue editing and sound design. Offline processing has several advantages over applying real-time mixer effects: ● The workflow is clip-based. This allows you to apply different effects to events on the same track.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Workflow Direct Offline Processing Workflow You can perform offline processing operations in the Direct Offline Processing window. The window always shows the processing of the selected audio. When you add or modify offline processing, the following applies: ● If you add a process, its last used parameter settings are loaded. You can reset it to its default settings by clicking Reset to Default Values. ● All changes are instantly applied to the audio.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window In the Direct Offline Processing window, the following options and settings are available: Toolbar Allows you to add audio processing, to audition the audio with the current edits, and to make global settings for offline processing. Process list Lists all built-in audio processes that you add to the selected event, clip, or range. You can bypass items in this list. An icon at the right of each process shows the status.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window Allows you to add a built-in audio process to the selected event or clip. Left Divider Left Divider Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. Audition Audition Allows you to audition the selected audio with all processing from the top of the process list up to the selected process in the list. All processes below are ignored during playback. Audition Loop Loops the playback until you deactivate the Audition button.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window You get a visual feedback while a process is running. However, even if the processing is not finished, you can activate Audition at any time. RESULT The audio process is rendered into the audio. In the Project window, the Pool or the Audio Part Editor, the processed events show a waveform symbol. Applying Processing to Multiple Events Direct Offline Processing allows you to add the built-in audio processes to multiple events at once.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window NOTE In the Project window or in the Audio Part Editor, processed events are indicated by a waveform symbol in the upper right corner. ● Select the processed clip in the Pool. NOTE In the Pool, processed clips are indicated by a waveform symbol in the Status column. ● Select the processed range in the Sample Editor. 2. Select Audio > Direct Offline Processing. 3. In the process list, select the process that you want to edit by clicking on it.
Direct Offline Processing Direct Offline Processing Window ● The bypass status is saved with the project. Copying and Pasting Processes You can copy and paste audio processes together with their parameter settings between events, clips, and ranges. PROCEDURE 1. Select a processed audio event, clip, or range. NOTE Processing on selections of multiple events cannot be copied. 2. In the Direct Offline Processing window, select one or multiple items in the process list. 3.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes ● The event or clip is no longer marked as offline-processed by a waveform symbol. Built-In Audio Processes Cubase provides several built-in audio processes that can be used for Direct Offline Processing. Envelope Envelope allows you to apply a volume envelope to the selected audio. Curve Type buttons Determine whether the corresponding envelope uses Spline Interpolation, Damped Spline Interpolation, or Linear Interpolation.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Curve Type buttons Determine whether the corresponding envelope uses Spline Interpolation, Damped Spline Interpolation, or Linear Interpolation. Fade display Shows the shape of the fade curve. The resulting waveform shape is shown in a dark tone, with the current waveform shape in a light tone. ● To add points, click the curve. ● To change the curve shape, click and drag existing points. ● To remove a point from the curve, drag it outside the display.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Invert Phase Invert Phase allows you to invert the phase of the selected audio. For stereo audio files, a pop-up menu is available. It allows you to specify which channels are phase-inverted: the left channel, the right channel, or both. Normalize Normalize allows you to raise or lower the level of audio that was recorded at an inappropriate input level. Maximum Peak Level Allows you to normalize your audio based on the maximum peak level.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes NOTE The indicated root note has nothing to do with the key or pitch of the original audio, it just provides a way to display transpose intervals. ● To change the root note, use the settings in the Pitch Shift Base section, or hold Alt , and click the keyboard display. ● To specify a transpose interval, click one of the keys. ● To specify a chord, activate Multi Shift and click several keys. To remove a transpose interval, click a blue key.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes RELATED LINKS Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms on page 438 Envelope-Based Pitch Shift On the Envelope tab, you can specify an envelope curve as a base for the pitch shift. Curve Type buttons Determine whether the corresponding envelope uses Spline Interpolation, Damped Spline Interpolation, or Linear Interpolation. Envelope display Shows the shape of the envelope curve over the waveform image of the audio selected for processing.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Preset Allows you to select an algorithm. RELATED LINKS MPEX on page 438 Remove DC Offset Option Remove DC Offset allows you to remove any DC offset in the audio selection. If your audio signal contains too large a component of direct current, you may notice that it is not centered around the zero level axis. This is called DC offset. ● To verify if your audio contains DC offsets, select the audio and select Audio > Statistics.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Reverse Reverse allows you to reverse the audio selection so that it sounds as if you play back a tape backwards. There are no adjustable parameters for this audio process. Silence Silence allows you to replace the selection with silence. There are no adjustable parameters for this audio process. Stereo Flip Stereo Flip allows you to manipulate the left and right channels of stereo audio selections.
Direct Offline Processing Built-In Audio Processes Beats Allows you to set the length of the selected audio in beats. Signature Allows you to set the time signature. Original Length This section contains information and settings regarding the audio that is selected for processing. Length in Samples Shows the length of the selected audio in samples. Length in Seconds Shows the length of the selected audio in seconds. Tempo in BPM Allows you to enter the actual tempo of the audio in beats per minute.
Direct Offline Processing Key Commands for Direct Offline Processing Time Stretch Ratio Allows you to set the amount of time stretch as a percentage of the original length. If you use the settings in the Resulting Length section to specify the amount of time stretch, this value changes automatically. RELATED LINKS Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms on page 438 Key Commands for Direct Offline Processing You can apply offline processing by using key commands.
Direct Offline Processing Key Commands for Direct Offline Processing RELATED LINKS Direct Offline Processing Window on page 422 Transport on page 1084 Key Commands on page 1033 437 Cubase Artist 12
Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms In Cubase, time-stretching and pitch-shifting algorithms are used for offline processes, in the Sample Editor, or for the Flattening Realtime Processing function. Depending on the feature, élastique, MPEX, or Standard algorithm presets are available.
Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms Standard MPEX – Preview Quality For preview purposes. MPEX – Mix Fast A very fast mode for preview. This mode works best with composite music signals (mono or stereo material). MPEX – Solo Fast For single instruments (monophonic material) and voice. MPEX – Solo Musical Higher quality for single instruments (monophonic material) and voice. MPEX – Poly Fast For monophonic and polyphonic material. This is the fastest setting that still gives very good results.
Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms Limitations Standard – Solo For monophonic material like solo woodwind/brass instruments or solo vocals, monophonic synths or string instruments that do not play harmonies. This mode preserves the timbre of the audio.
Audio Functions Cubase offers particular functions for analyzing the audio in your project. RELATED LINKS Detect Silence Dialog on page 441 Spectrum Analyzer Window on page 445 Statistics Window on page 447 Detect Silence Dialog The Detect Silence dialog allows you to search for silent sections in events. You can split events and remove the silent parts from the project, or create regions corresponding to the non-silent sections.
Audio Functions Detect Silence Dialog The following options are available: Waveform display Shows the waveform of the selected audio and allows you to preview the analyzed audio before it is processed. When you move the mouse over the waveform the mouse pointer changes to a speaker icon. Click the waveform and hold to play back the audio from this position. The Preview slider allows you to set the preview level. Mute Gaps mutes sections that are detected as silence when previewing.
Audio Functions Detect Silence Dialog NOTE This setting is only available if Peak Level Mode is activated. Close Threshold When the audio level drops below this value, the function closes and detects sounds below this level as silence. This value cannot be higher than the Open Threshold value. NOTE This setting is only available if Peak Level Mode is activated. Linked Activate this option to set the same values for Open Threshold and Close Threshold.
Audio Functions Detect Silence Dialog Apply Fades Applies fade ins and fade outs with the set length to the resulting events. Analyze Analyzes the audio event and redraws the waveform display to indicate which sections are considered silent. Auto Activate this option to analyze the audio event and update the display automatically every time you change the settings. NOTE If you are working with very long files, consider deactivating the Auto option as this may slow down the process.
Audio Functions Spectrum Analyzer Window AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● If you have selected more than one event and did not activate Process All Selected Events, the Detect Silence dialog opens again after processing, allowing you to make separate settings for the next event.
Audio Functions Spectrum Analyzer Window Analyzing the Audio Spectrum The Spectrum Analyzer allows you to analyze the audio of a selected event, clip, or selection range. PROCEDURE 1. Select an audio event, clip, or a selection range. 2. Select Audio > Spectrum Analyzer. RESULT The audio spectrum of the selected event, clip, or selection range is displayed as a twodimensional graph in the Spectrum Analyzer window.
Audio Functions Statistics Window RELATED LINKS Spectrum Analyzer Window on page 445 Statistics Window The Statistics function analyzes the selected audio events, clips, or selection ranges. ● To open the Statistics window for a selected audio event, clip, or selection range, select Audio > Statistics. The Statistics window shows the following information: Channel Shows the name of the analyzed channel. Min. Sample Value Shows the lowest sample value in dB. Max.
Audio Functions Statistics Window Average RMS (AES17) Shows the average loudness in accordance with the AES17 standard. Max. RMS Shows the highest RMS value. Max. RMS All Channels Shows the highest RMS value of all channels.
Sample Editor The Sample Editor provides an overview of the selected audio event. It allows you to view and edit audio by cutting and pasting, removing, or drawing audio data, and by processing audio. Editing is non-destructive so that you can undo modifications at any time. You can open the Sample Editor in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window. This is useful if you want to access the Sample Editor functions from within a fixed zone of the Project window.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Toolbar Contains tools for selecting, manipulating, and playing back audio. 2 Info Line Shows information about the audio. 3 Overview Shows an overview of the whole audio clip and indicates which part of the clip is shown in the waveform display. 4 Sample Editor Inspector Contains audio editing tools and functions. NOTE The Inspector for the lower zone editor is shown in the left zone of the Project window. 5 Ruler Shows the timeline and the display format of the project.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Toolbar Left Divider Left Divider Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. Auto-Scroll Auto-Scroll Keeps the project cursor visible during playback. Select Auto-Scroll Settings Allows you to activate Page Scroll or Stationary Cursor and to activate Suspend Auto-Scroll When Editing. Preview Audition Plays back the selected audio. Audition Loop Loops the playback until you deactivate Audition. Audition Volume Allows you to adjust the volume.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Toolbar Acoustic Feedback Acoustic Feedback Automatically plays back a VariAudio segment when you modify the pitch. Snap Snap to Zero Crossing Restricts editing to zero crossings, that is, positions where the amplitude is zero. Snap On/Off Restricts horizontal movement and positioning to the specific positions. Grid Options Show/Hide Grid Shows/Hides the grid in the waveform display. Grid Type Allows you to select a grid type.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Toolbar Musical Mode Musical Mode Locks audio clips to the project tempo by using realtime time stretching. Musical Information Number of Bars Defined in Audio File Displays the estimated bars of your audio file. Remaining Number of Beats Defined in Audio File Displays the remaining number of beats of your audio file. Defined Tempo of Audio File Displays the estimated tempo of your audio file.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Toolbar Sets the editing mode for clips. ● Edit All Clips allows you to edit all clips that are opened in the Sampler Editor. ● Edit Active Clip restricts editing operations to the clip that you activated in the Activate Clip for Editing pop-up menu. Clip Display Mode Sets the display mode for clips. ● Show All Clips shows the waveform images of all clips that are opened in the Sample Editor.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Toolbar Window Zone Controls Open in Separate Window This button is available in the lower zone editor. It opens the editor in a separate window. Open in Lower Zone This button is available in the editor window. It opens the editor in the lower zone of the Project window. Set up Window Layout Allows you to set up the window layout. Show/Hide Left Zone Allows you to activate/deactivate the left zone. Show/Hide Regions Allows you to activate/deactivate the regions.
Sample Editor Info Line Editing Audio Samples with the Draw Tool You can edit the audio clip at sample level with the Draw tool. This way, you can remove audio clicks manually, for example. PROCEDURE 1. On the audio waveform, locate the sample position that you want to edit and zoom in to the highest zoom level. 2. Select the Draw tool. 3. Click at the beginning of the section that you want to correct and draw in the new curve.
Sample Editor Overview Line NOTE Initially, length and position values are displayed in the format specified in the Project Setup dialog. Overview Line The overview line displays the whole clip, and indicates which part of the clip is shown in the waveform display. ● To show or hide the overview line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activate or deactivate the Overview option.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Inspector RELATED LINKS Opening the Editor Inspector on page 55 Definition Section The Definition section allows you to adjust the audio grid and define the musical context of your audio. You can use the available functions to match an audio file or audio loop to the project tempo. ● To open the Definition section, click its tab in the Sample Editor Inspector.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Inspector RELATED LINKS Tempo Matching Audio on page 484 VariAudio Section The VariAudio section allows you to edit single sounds of your audio file and change their pitch or timing. Furthermore, you can extract MIDI from your audio. ● To open the VariAudio section, click its tab in the Sample Editor Inspector.
Sample Editor Sample Editor Inspector Hitpoints Section The Hitpoints section allows you to edit hitpoints to slice your audio. Here you can create groove quantize presets, markers, regions, events, and warp markers based on hitpoints. ● To open the Hitpoints section, click its tab in the Sample Editor Inspector. RELATED LINKS Hitpoints on page 473 Range Section The Range section allows you to edit ranges and selections or create a sampler track from the selected range.
Sample Editor Ruler Zoom Opens a pop-up menu with the zoom functions for ranges. Create Sampler Track Allows you to create a sampler track from the range selection. Process Section The Process section regroups the most important audio editing commands from the Audio and Edit menus. ● To open the Process section, click its tab in the Sample Editor Inspector. Ruler The ruler shows the timeline and display format of the project, the project tempo grid. The ruler is located above the waveform display.
Sample Editor Waveform Display Waveform Display The waveform display shows the waveform image of the edited audio clip. 1 Level Scale menu Allow you to show the level as a percentage or in dB. Here, you can also activate the display of the half level axis. 2 Ruler Shows the project tempo grid. 3 Half Level Axis To show the half level axis, open the level scale menu and select Show Half Level Axis. 4 Audio waveform Shows the waveform image of the selected audio.
Sample Editor Waveform Display RESULT The vertical scale changes relative to the height of the Sample Editor. Zooming Horizontally You can zoom in the waveform horizontally. This allows you to zoom in or out on the time scale. PROCEDURE ● Drag the horizontal zoom slider to the right to zoom in or to the left to zoom out. RESULT The horizontal zoom setting is shown on the info line as samples per pixel. You can zoom in horizontally to a scale of less than one sample per pixel.
Sample Editor Range Editing Zoom to Event Zooms in so that the waveform display shows the section of the clip corresponding to the edited audio event. This is not available if you have opened the Sample Editor from the Pool. Zoom In Vertically Zooms in one step vertically. Zoom Out Vertically Zooms out one step vertically. Zoom In On Waveform Vertically Zooms in on the waveform vertically. Zoom Out Of Waveform Vertically Zooms out of the waveform vertically.
Sample Editor Range Editing RESULT The selected range is highlighted in the waveform display. NOTE You can also use the functions in the Select pop-up menu to select ranges. RELATED LINKS Select Menu on page 465 Select Menu Select Pop-Up Menu in the Range Section On the Select pop-up menu in the Range section in the Sample Editor Inspector, the following functions are available: Select All Selects the whole clip. Select None Deselects everything.
Sample Editor Range Editing From Cursor to End Selects the audio between the project cursor and the clip end. This option is available if the project cursor is positioned between the clip boundaries. Equal Pitch - all Octaves/same Octave Selects all notes that have the same pitch as the selected note, in any octave or in the current octave. This option is available if the VariAudio section is open and Edit VariAudio is activated. Events under Cursor Selects all events that are touched by the project cursor.
Sample Editor Range Editing Creating Sampler Tracks from Selection Ranges You can create a sampler track that contains only the selected range. PROCEDURE 1. Select a range. If you select no range, the event start/end is used. 2. Open the Range section in the Sample Editor Inspector. 3. Click Create Sampler Track. RESULT A new Sampler Track is created and added to the track list. Sampler Control shows the corresponding audio clip.
Sample Editor Regions List Make Direct Offline Processing Permanent Allows you to apply all offline processing permanently to the audio. RELATED LINKS Shared Copies on page 204 Applying Offline Processing Permanently on page 427 Direct Offline Processing for Ranges You can apply audio processes to selection ranges. ● To apply an audio process to a selection range, open the Process section in the Sample Editor Inspector, and select one of the options in the Add Process menu.
Sample Editor Regions List Shows the end of the region in the audio waveform. 3 Add Region Allows you to create a region of the current range selection. 4 Remove Region Allows you to remove the selected region. 5 Select Region If you select a region in the list and click this button above, the corresponding section of the audio clip is selected (as if you had selected it with the Range Selection tool) and zoomed. This is useful if you want to apply processing to the region only.
Sample Editor Regions List RESULT Regions are created between two hitpoint positions and shown in the Sample Editor. Adjusting Start and End Positions of Regions PREREQUISITE You have clicked Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activated Regions. You have created regions. PROCEDURE ● Perform one of the following actions: ● Drag the Region Start or Region End handle to a different position in the waveform display. ● Double-click the Start or End field in the regions list and enter a new value.
Sample Editor Snap Point Snap Point The snap point is a marker within an audio event that can be used as a reference position. ● To show the snap point, select Show Clips and Events or Show Event as Editor Display Mode on the toolbar. The event snap point is set as follows: ● If you record an audio event, the snap point is set to the next grid position. ● If you bounce a selection, the snap point is set to the start of the new event or to the first snap point that you set manually.
Sample Editor Snap Point IMPORTANT When you set the grid start in the Definition section, the snap point is moved to the grid start. RELATED LINKS Sample Editor Toolbar on page 450 Adjusting the Snap Point on page 472 Adjusting the Snap Point PREREQUISITE The audio event is opened in the Sample Editor. Show Clips and Events or Show Event is selected as Editor Display Mode on the toolbar. PROCEDURE 1. Optional: On the Sample Editor toolbar, select the Scrub tool.
Hitpoints Hitpoints mark musically relevant positions in audio files. Cubase can detect these positions and create hitpoints automatically by analyzing onsets and melodic changes of the audio. NOTE All hitpoint operations can be performed in the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone editor. When you add an audio file to your project by recording or by importing, Cubase automatically detects hitpoints if Enable Automatic Hitpoint Detection is activated in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page).
Hitpoints Calculating Hitpoints ● You can move a hitpoint by moving the mouse pointer on the vertical line that represents the hitpoint and drag to the left or to the right. RELATED LINKS Calculating Hitpoints on page 474 Editing Hitpoints Manually on page 476 Calculating Hitpoints When you add an audio file to your project by recording or by importing, Cubase can automatically detect hitpoints. PREREQUISITE Enable Automatic Hitpoint Detection is activated in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page).
Hitpoints Calculating Hitpoints Main Section Edit Hitpoints Allows you to edit hitpoints manually in the event display. Threshold Filters hitpoints by their peaks. Drag the slider to the right to discard hitpoints of quieter crosstalk signals, for example. Intensity Filters hitpoints by their intensity. Drag the slider to the right to discard less intense hitpoints. Minimum Length Filters hitpoints by their distance between two hitpoints. This option allows you to avoid creating slices that are too short.
Hitpoints Calculating Hitpoints Events Creates events at hitpoint positions. Warp Markers Creates warp markers at hitpoint positions. MIDI Notes Creates MIDI notes at hitpoint positions. RELATED LINKS Editing Hitpoints Manually on page 476 Editing Hitpoints Manually It is crucial for any further editing that the hitpoints are set at the correct positions. Therefore, if the automatic hitpoint detection does not meet your expectations, you can edit hitpoints manually.
Hitpoints Calculating Hitpoints 3. To disable a hitpoint that you do not need, press Shift and click on the line that represents the hitpoint. The mouse pointer changes to a cross icon and the tooltip Disable Hitpoints is shown. Disabled hitpoints are not taken into account for further operations. 4. Press Tab to navigate to the next slice. The slice is played back automatically. 5. To insert a hitpoint, press Alt/Opt and click at the position where you want to insert the hitpoint.
Hitpoints Locating to Hitpoints in the Project Window RELATED LINKS Hitpoint Filters in the Hitpoint Section on page 474 Locating to Hitpoints in the Project Window You can navigate through the hitpoints of an audio event in the Project window. PREREQUISITE Enable Automatic Hitpoint Detection is activated in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Audio page). PROCEDURE 1. Select the audio track that contains the audio event for which you want to locate hitpoints. 2.
Hitpoints Slices PROCEDURE ● Perform one of the following actions: ● In the Hitpoints section in the Sample Editor Inspector, open the Create section, and click Slices. ● Select Audio > Hitpoints > Create Audio Slices from Hitpoints. RESULT The areas between the hitpoints are sliced and become separate events. The original audio event is replaced by an audio part containing the slices. On playback, the audio plays back seamlessly at the project tempo.
Hitpoints Creating a Groove Quantize Preset AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK NOTE If you decide to change the tempo again, undo your actions and use the original, unstretched file. Deleting Overlaps If the project tempo is higher than the tempo of the original audio event, the slice events in the part may overlap. You can delete these overlaps. PROCEDURE 1. Right-click the track in the track list and from the context menu, select Auto Fades Settings. 2. In the Auto Fades dialog, activate Auto Crossfades. 3.
Hitpoints Creating Regions PROCEDURE ● In the Hitpoints section in the Sample Editor Inspector, open the Create section, and click Markers. RESULT If your project has no marker track, a marker track is added and activated automatically, and a marker is created at every hitpoint position. RELATED LINKS Markers on page 326 Creating Regions You can create regions at hitpoint positions. This allows you to isolate recorded sounds.
Hitpoints Creating Warp Markers Creating Warp Markers You can create warp markers at hitpoint positions. This allows you to quantize audio based on hitpoint positions. PREREQUISITE ● The audio event from which you want to create warp markers is opened in the Sample Editor, and the hitpoints are set at the correct positions. ● If you want to create warp markers for all audio events that are opened in the Sample Editor, set the Clip Editing Mode to Edit All Clips.
Hitpoints Creating MIDI Notes Convert Hitpoints to MIDI Notes Dialog The Convert Hitpoints to MIDI Notes dialog allows you to specify how hitpoints should be converted when you create MIDI notes from hitpoints. ● To open the Convert Hitpoints to MIDI Notes dialog, open the Create section in the Hitpoints section of the Sample Editor Inspector, and click MIDI Notes.
Tempo Matching Audio Cubase offers several functions that allow you to match the tempo of audio in your project. In the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone editor, you can perform the following tempo matching operations: ● Stretch to Project Tempo Stretches the selected event to match the project tempo. ● Musical Mode Applies realtime time stretching to audio clips, so that they match the project tempo. ● Auto Adjust Extracts a definition grid from your audio.
Tempo Matching Audio Stretching Audio Events to the Project Tempo The algorithm preset affects warp changes in Musical Mode, FreeWarp, and Swing. For the VariAudio warping and pitching features Standard – Solo is applied automatically. RELATED LINKS Algorithm Presets on page 484 Time Stretch and Pitch Shift Algorithms on page 438 Stretching Audio Events to the Project Tempo You can stretch audio loops to the project tempo. PROCEDURE 1.
Tempo Matching Audio Musical Mode 4. In the Definition section, verify that the length in bars corresponds to the length of the imported audio file. If necessary, listen to your audio and enter the correct length in bars and beats. 5. In the AudioWarp section, select a preset from the Warping Algorithm for Audio Clip pop-up menu. 6. Listen to the loop and if necessary correct the Bars and Beats values. 7. Activate Musical Mode. RESULT The loop is warped and stretched to the project tempo.
Tempo Matching Audio Auto Adjust 3. Move the Swing fader to the right. RESULT This offsets the grid positions and creates a swing or shuffle feel. If you selected 1/2, every second position in the grid is offset. Auto Adjust The Auto Adjust function is useful if you do not know the tempo of your audio file, or if the beat is not straight. It allows you to extract a definition grid from your audio. After that, you can tempo match the file to the project tempo with the Musical Mode.
Tempo Matching Audio Manual Adjust 4. Click Auto Adjust. RESULT The definition grid is calculated for the selected section. The snap point moves to the start of the selected range. The audio tempo definition ruler changes to reflect your edits, and bars and beats positions are marked with vertical lines. Manual Adjust The Manual Adjust function is useful if you need to manually modify the grid and tempo of your audio file.
Tempo Matching Audio Free Warp This sets the beginning of the next bar. All following bar positions in the grid are stretched or compressed so that all bars have the same length. 7. In the lower part of the waveform, move the mouse pointer over the grid lines. The tooltip Set Bar Position (Move Following Bars) and a green vertical line are shown. 8. For incorrect bar positions, click and drag the green vertical line to the position of the first downbeat of the following bar and release the mouse button.
Tempo Matching Audio Free Warp A stretch factor higher than 1.0 indicates that the audio preceding the warp marker is stretched, a stretch factor lower than 1.0 indicates that the audio is compressed. NOTE The Free Warp tool snaps to hitpoint positions and warp markers.
Tempo Matching Audio Free Warp Manual Adjust on page 488 Musical Mode on page 485 Creating Warp Markers for Multiple Audio Events PREREQUISITE You have opened multiple audio clips or events in the Sample Editor. PROCEDURE 1. On the Sample Editor toolbar, select Edit All Clips as a Clip Editing Mode. 2. In the AudioWarp section, activate Free Warp, move the mouse pointer to the position of the beat that you want to adjust, click, and hold. 3.
Tempo Matching Audio Flattening Realtime Processing Resetting Warp Edits PROCEDURE ● In the AudioWarp section, click Reset. RESULT The warp markers are removed from the waveform, and the warp edits of the waveform are reset. NOTE If Musical Mode is activated, only Free Warp edits are reset. Flattening Realtime Processing You can flatten warp modifications. This is useful if you want to reduce the CPU load, optimize the sound quality of the processing, or apply any offline processing. PROCEDURE 1.
Tempo Matching Audio Unstretching Audio Files Algorithm Preset Allows you to select an algorithm preset. Unstretching Audio Files You can remove realtime time stretching from audio events. PREREQUISITE You have stretched an audio event in the Sample Editor with the Free Warp tool, or in the Project window with the Object Selection tool in Sizing Applies Time Stretch mode. PROCEDURE 1. Select the audio event that you want to unstretch. 2. Select Audio > Realtime Processing > Unstretch Audio.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio The VariAudio features in Cubase allow you to edit pitch, and correct the timing and intonation of individual notes in monophonic vocal recordings. All VariAudio operations can be performed in the Sample Editor window and in the lower zone editor. Any modifications to the audio material can be undone. NOTE The VariAudio features are optimized for monophonic recordings of vocals. It may work well for other monophonic recordings, such as saxophone, as well.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio VariAudio Inspector Section Main Section Bypass VariAudio Changes Bypasses pitch, formant shift, and volume changes so that you can compare the changes to the original audio. Edit VariAudio Activates the audio analysis, splits the audio into segments that are shown in the waveform image, and enables VariAudio editing. Smart Controls Allows you to select how many smart controls are shown on the segments.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio VariAudio Inspector Section Straighten Curve Allows you to straighten the pitch curve of a segment. Shift Formant Allows you to shift the formants of a segment without affecting the pitch or timing. Volume Allows you to edit the volume of a segment. Scale Assistant Section Use Editor Scale Allows you to select a scale for the segments in the Sample Editor event display. ● Editor Scale Allows you to select a scale.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Segments and Gaps Functions Opens a pop-up menu with other functions.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Segments and Gaps 4 Gap The gaps in between segments represent the non-tonal portions of the analyzed audio. These can be caused by breath sounds or rests, for example. NOTE Gaps, caused by weak audio signals or audio sections with unclear pitch information, such as consonants or effect sounds, must be included in the segments manually. To do this, you must change the start and end points of a segment.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Segments and Gaps NOTE The analysis of long audio files may take some time. RELATED LINKS Segments and Gaps on page 497 VariAudio Segment Colors Menu You can select a color scheme for VariAudio segments. If you work with several audio events, this makes it easier to see which segments belong to which event. The following options are available: Auto Segments that belong to the same voice get the same color.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Sample Editor Piano Keyboard Display Chord and Scale Colors Setup on page 749 Pitch Colors Setup on page 749 VariAudio Segment Colors Menu on page 499 Sample Editor Piano Keyboard Display The piano keyboard display is shown to the left of the note display in the Sample Editor if you open the VariAudio Inspector section. The piano keyboard gives you a visual orientation over the pitch positions in the event display, helping you to find specific note pitches.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Navigating and Zooming through Segments NOTE You can use the VariAudio Segment Colors menu in the Sample Editor toolbar to select a color scheme. If you move the mouse pointer in the event display, the corresponding pitch position on the piano keyboard display is highlighted. ● Hold down Ctrl/Cmd and click a key on the piano keyboard display to select all note segments of that pitch.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Smart Controls Smart Controls Each segment has smart controls that allow you to change the start and end points of the segment and to perform pitch changes, volume editing, formant shifting, and timing modifications of the associated audio. ● To show the smart controls on a segment, zoom in on the segment, and move the mouse pointer over it.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Segment Editing 1 Tilt It allows you to tilt the pitch curve upwards or downwards. The smart control on the left allows you to tilt the start of the curve, the smart control on the right allows you to tilt the end of the curve. Press Alt/Opt to rotate the curve around the tilt/rotate anchor. 2 Set Tilt/Rotate Anchor By default, the pitch curve is tilted or rotated around the center of the segment.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Segment Editing Segment editing includes: ● Shortening segments by splitting them, or changing their start or end point ● Enlarging segments by gluing them to the next segment, or by changing their start or end point ● Deleting segments NOTE Changing the length of a segment may lead to a different average pitch and therefore to a pitch change.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Segment Editing Gluing Segments If a single sound is spread over multiple segments, you can glue these segments. PREREQUISITE You have opened the audio in the Sample Editor and activated Edit VariAudio in the VariAudio section. PROCEDURE 1. On the Sample Editor toolbar, activate Audition to audition the segments. 2. Compare the segments with the pitch curve for each note. 3.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Selecting a Musical Scale for VariAudio Segments Changing the Start and End Point of Segments If the start or end point of a segment does not match the associated audio, you can change it. PREREQUISITE You have opened the audio in the Sample Editor and activated Edit VariAudio in the VariAudio section. PROCEDURE 1. Select one or several segments. 2. On the Sample Editor toolbar, activate Audition to audition the segments. 3.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Using the Chord Track Data as Musical Scale 2. Do one of the following: ● To get scale suggestions for specific note segments only, select the note segments in the event display. ● To get scale suggestions for all note segments, make sure that no note segment is selected. 3. In the Scale Assistant section, activate Use Editor Scale. 4. Open the Scale Suggestions pop-up menu, and select one of the suggested scales.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Pitch Changes 3. Open the Chord Track Mode pop-up menu, and select whether you want to use chord events, scale events or both as a musical scale. RESULT The Chord Track Mode is set. NOTE The Scale Assistant is also available in the Key Editor, and the Editor Scale is linked. If you select a Chord Track Mode in the Sample Editor, the same mode is selected in the Key Editor, and vice versa.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Pitch Changes Pitch Snap Mode The Pitch Snap Mode defines how a segment snaps to a certain pitch. ● You can set the Pitch Snap Mode in the VariAudio section of the Sample Editor Inspector. The following modes are available: Absolute Segments snap to the next semitone. Relative Segments snap to the next semitone, but they keep their original deviation in cents, if available. Off Segments do not snap, and you can edit the pitch freely.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Pitch Changes RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically and the segment pitch is raised or lowered according to your settings. NOTE The more the pitch deviates from the original pitch, the less likely it is that your audio sounds natural. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK To compare your pitch changes to the original audio pitches, activate Bypass VariAudio Changes in the VariAudio section.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Pitch Changes ● Use the On-Screen Keyboard to change the pitch. NOTE The more the pitch deviates from the original pitch, the less likely it is that your audio sounds natural. You cannot choose pitches above C5 and below E0. RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically, and the segment pitch is raised or lowered according to the note you play.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Pitch Changes NOTE You can also correct the pitch by dragging the Correct Pitch smart control in the middle of the bottom edge of the segment upwards or downwards. RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically, and the segment pitches are corrected. NOTE In the Sample Editor category of the Key Commands dialog, you can set up a key command for Correct Pitch.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Pitch Changes RESULT The note segments are quantized to the nearest pitches of the scale. The Pitch Snap Mode is taken into account.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Pitch Changes Snapping Segment Pitches While Editing You can snap the pitches of note segments to a musical scale while editing. This is useful if you want to use a musical scale for your VariAudio pitch changes. PREREQUISITE ● The audio file is segmented. ● You have opened the audio in the Sample Editor and activated Edit VariAudio in the VariAudio section.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Pitch Changes Tilting a Pitch Curve on page 515 Rotating a Pitch Curve on page 516 Straightening Pitch Curves on page 516 Straightening Ranges of Pitch Curves on page 517 Setting Tilt/Rotate Anchors By default, the reference or anchor point for tilting and rotating pitch curves is set to the center of the segment. You can move that reference point to the left or to the right for a different result.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Pitch Changes RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically, and the pitch curve is tilted according to your settings. RELATED LINKS Smart Controls on page 502 Setting Tilt/Rotate Anchors on page 515 Rotating a Pitch Curve You can rotate the pitch curve to correct pitch deviations of individual segments. PREREQUISITE The audio file is segmented and the segments are correct.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Timing Modifications ● In the Sample Editor Inspector, move the Straighten Curve slider to the right. RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically, and the pitch curves are straightened. RELATED LINKS Smart Controls on page 502 Straightening Ranges of Pitch Curves on page 517 Straightening Ranges of Pitch Curves You can restrict the straightening of pitch curves to specific ranges of segments.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Showing MIDI Reference Tracks Warping Segments PREREQUISITE The audio file is segmented and the segments are correct. You have opened the audio in the Sample Editor and activated Edit VariAudio in the VariAudio section. PROCEDURE ● Do one of the following: ● Drag the smart control for Warp Start to the left or to the right. ● Drag the smart control for Warp End to the left or to the right. RESULT The Solo algorithm is selected automatically.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Showing MIDI Reference Tracks RESULT The events of the selected MIDI track are shown in the Sample Editor event display as lines. Their color adapts to the VariAudio Segment Colors setting. You can use the Pitch or the Scale/ Chords option, for example, to associate the pitches of audio and MIDI. The MIDI reference track selection applies to all Sample Editors in a project. It is saved with the project.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Formant Shifting Formant Shifting Formants are the harmonic frequencies that occur in the human voice. They define the timbre and alter the perception of how a vocal has been performed (more from the diaphragm than from the throat, for example). Formant shifting does not affect the pitch or timing of a segment. PREREQUISITE The audio file is segmented and the segments are correct.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Functions Menu Functions Menu Extract MIDI Opens the Extract MIDI dialog that allows you to specify which audio data is used to create a MIDI part. The entire audio event is taken into account. Flatten Realtime Processing Opens the Flatten Realtime Processing dialog that allows you to select an algorithm preset for the flattening of VariAudio and warp modifications. The entire audio event is taken into account.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Functions Menu Extracting MIDI from Audio You can create a MIDI part from specific data of your audio. This is useful if you want to copy the tune and sound of your audio with a MIDI instrument or VST instrument. PREREQUISITE The audio file is segmented and the segments are correct. All pitch and timing changes are completed. You have opened the audio in the Sample Editor and activated Edit VariAudio in the VariAudio section. PROCEDURE 1.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Functions Menu Notes and Static Pitchbend Data Extracts pitchbend events for each segment. In the Pitchbend Range field, you can specify a pitchbend value from 1 to 24. NOTE If you work with an external MIDI device, set it to the same Pitchbend Range value. Notes and Continuous Pitchbend Data Extracts pitchbend events that correspond to the pitch curve. In the Pitchbend Range field, you can specify a pitchbend value from 1 to 24.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Harmony Voices for Audio Destination Allows you to specify where the MIDI part is placed. The following options are available: First Selected Track Places the MIDI part on the first selected MIDI or instrument track. Any MIDI parts from previous extractions on this track are deleted. New MIDI Track Creates a new MIDI track for the MIDI part. Project Clipboard Copies the MIDI part into the clipboard.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Harmony Voices for Audio ● You can create a chord track with some chords first, and then create harmony voices for your audio based on that track. In both cases, a VariAudio analysis is performed for the selected audio event, and up to 4 copies of the corresponding track are created. These new tracks that are named Soprano, Alto, Tenor, and Bass contain independent copies of the selected audio event.
Pitch Editing and Time Correction with VariAudio Harmony Voices for Audio Generate Harmony Voices Dialog The Generate Harmony Voices dialog allows you to quickly create harmonies for monophonic audio material. ● To open the Generate Harmony Voices dialog, select an audio event in the Project window, and select Audio > Generate Harmony Voices. The following options are available: Number of Voices Allows you to select, how many voices are generated. You can generate up to 4 voices.
Audio Part Editor The Audio Part Editor provides an overview of the selected audio parts. It allows you to view, audition and edit parts by cutting and pasting, crossfading, drawing level curves, or by processing parts. Editing is non-destructive so that you can undo modifications at any time. You can open the Audio Part Editor in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window.
Audio Part Editor Audio Part Editor Toolbar Displays the timeline and the display format of the project. RELATED LINKS Opening the Editor in the Lower Zone on page 63 Opening the Editor Inspector on page 55 Ruler on page 48 Info Line on page 51 Audio Part Editor Toolbar on page 528 Audio Part Editor Toolbar The toolbar contains tools for selecting, editing, and playing back audio parts. ● To show or hide the toolbar elements, right-click the toolbar and activate or deactivate the elements.
Audio Part Editor Audio Part Editor Toolbar Plays back the selected audio. Audition Loop Loops the playback until you deactivate Audition. Audition Volume Allows you to adjust the volume. Tool Buttons Combine Selection Tools Combines the Object Selection tool and the Range Selection tool. Object Selection Selects audio parts. Range Selection Selects ranges. Zoom Zooms in. Hold Alt/Opt and click to zoom out. Erase Deletes audio parts. Split Splits audio parts. Mute Mutes audio parts. Comp Assembles takes.
Audio Part Editor Audio Part Editor Toolbar Allows you to locate positions. Multiple Part Controls Show Part Borders Shows/Hides part borders for the active audio part, within the left and right locators. Part Editing Mode Sets the editing mode for parts. ● Edit All Parts allows you to edit all parts that are opened in the Editor at the same time. ● Edit Active Parts restricts editing operations to the part that is selected in the Activate Part for Editing pop-up menu.
Audio Part Editor Audio Part Editor Toolbar Move Right Moves the selected event to the right. Nudge End Left Decreases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the left. Nudge End Right Increases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the right. Snap Snap to Zero Crossing Restricts editing to zero crossings, that is, positions where the amplitude is zero. Snap On/Off Restricts horizontal movement and positioning to the specific positions.
Audio Part Editor Audio Part Editor Toolbar Open Quantize Panel Opens the Quantize Panel. Event Colors Select Color for Selected Tracks or Events Allows you to define audio part colors. Independent Track Loop Independent Track Loop Activates/Deactivates the independent track loop. NOTE If you activate Independent Track Loop, the Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors function is automatically deactivated in the lower zone editor. Loop Start Time The independent track loop start time.
Audio Part Editor Info Line RELATED LINKS Link Project and Lower Zone Editor Cursors on page 65 Auto-Scroll Settings Menu on page 236 Suspend Auto-Scroll When Editing on page 236 Info Line The info line shows information about the audio part, such as the start, end, length, or the time stretch algorithm. ● To show or hide the info line, activate Show/Hide Info on the toolbar. The on/off status of the info line in the Audio Part Editor window and in the lower zone editor are independent of each other.
Audio Part Editor Operations RELATED LINKS Track Handling on page 153 Operations All operations can be performed in the Audio Part Editor window and in the lower zone editor. Zooming, selecting and editing in the Audio Part Editor is done just as in the Project window. NOTE If a part is a shared copy, any editing you perform affects all shared copies of this part.
Audio Part Editor Operations RELATED LINKS Audio Part Editor Toolbar on page 528 Auditioning Using Regular Playback PROCEDURE 1. Set the project cursor to the position from where you want to start playback. 2. Optional: On the toolbar of the Audio Part Editor, activate Solo Editor. This way, only the events in the edited part are played back. 3. On the Transport panel, activate Start.
Audio Part Editor Operations Scrub In the Audio Part Editor, the Scrub tool has a separate icon on the toolbar. Apart from that, scrubbing works exactly as in the Project window. RELATED LINKS Scrubbing on page 189 Handling Several Parts When you open the Audio Part Editor with several parts selected – all on the same track or on different tracks – they might not all fit in the editor window, which can make it hard to get an overview of the different parts when editing.
Extensions in Cubase Cubase supports extensions such as Audio Random Access (ARA). Extensions allow you to integrate compatible programs as plug-ins into your DAW. To be able to use a program as a plug-in via an extension in Cubase, you must first install and register that program. All extensions and plug-ins that are installed on your system are listed in the System Component Information window (Extensions page). Plug-ins that might cause stability problems or program crashes are deactivated.
Extensions in Cubase Removing Extensions from Audio Events For further information about the functions of a specific program that you use as an extension, refer to its documentation. RELATED LINKS Setup Context Menus on page 1055 Activating Extensions for More Audio Events on page 538 Activating Extensions for Audio Tracks on page 540 Removing Extensions from Audio Events on page 538 Activating Extensions for More Audio Events You can activate extensions for more than one audio event via the Editor.
Extensions in Cubase Permanently Applying Extension Edits to Audio Events ● On the Project window info line, click the Extension field, and select No Extension. ● In the Editor, activate Remove Event, and in the Project window, select the audio event from which you want to remove the extension. NOTE Deactivate Remove Event to avoid accidentally removing the extension for audio events that you select in the Project window. RESULT The extension is removed for the audio events.
Extensions in Cubase Activating Extensions for Audio Tracks Activating Extensions for Audio Tracks You can activate extensions, such as the ARA plug-ins Melodyne or SpectraLayers, for an audio track. All audio events on that audio track can be edited with that extension. Audio parts are ignored. PREREQUISITE You have installed and registered the program that you want to use as an extension. PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select the audio track. 2.
Extensions in Cubase Removing Extensions from Audio Tracks Removing Extensions from Audio Tracks You can remove extensions and all edits that you made from audio tracks. PROCEDURE ● In the audio track Inspector, click Select Extension, and from the pop-up menu, select No Extension. RESULT The extension is removed from the audio track and all its events. Permanently Applying Extension Edits to Audio Tracks You can permanently apply extension edits to audio tracks.
Extensions in Cubase Editor The Editor for Melodyne in the lower zone of the Project window 1 Project window event display Shows the edited audio event in its musical context. 2 Extension field Allows you to activate/remove an extension for the selected audio event. 3 Audio event If an extension is activated for an audio event, the event in the Project window is shown with a symbol in the upper right corner.
Extensions in Cubase Audio Event Editing Activating Extensions for Audio Tracks on page 540 Audio Event Editing You can edit audio events in the Editor in the lower zone of the Project window and in the Project window event display. If you activate an extension for audio events or audio tracks, you can instantly edit the audio events in the Editor in the lower zone of the Project window.
Sampler Tracks The sampler track feature allows you to chromatically play back any audio from your audio sample library via MIDI. You can create and edit new sounds based on specific samples, and integrate them into an existing project. The sampler track feature includes: ● The Sampler Control section in the lower zone of the Project window. Here you can load and edit audio samples, choose between different playback modes, or transfer samples to Steinberg VST instruments.
Sampler Tracks Loading MIDI Parts into Sampler Control Loading MIDI Parts into Sampler Control You can load MIDI parts from instrument tracks or MIDI tracks into Sampler Control by dragging. NOTE For this to work, the instrument track or the MIDI track must be routed to a VST instrument. ● To load a MIDI part, drag it from the MediaBay, the Project window event display, or the File Explorer/macOS Finder and drop it in Sampler Control. IMPORTANT If Sampler Control already contains MIDI, it is overwritten.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Sampler Control If the sampler track is selected, Sampler Control is available in the lower zone of the Project window. Sampler Control allows you to view, edit, and play back samples or specific sections of the samples. 1 Toolbar Contains tools that allow you to select and edit the audio sample, to organize track presets, and to transfer the sample with its settings to an instrument.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Switch between A/B Settings Allows you to switch between different parameter settings. Event Received Indicator This LED indicates incoming MIDI messages via the selected MIDI input. The LED lights up on receiving note-on and controller messages. This way, you can check if Cubase and your MIDI keyboard are connected to the same MIDI device input. Snap to Zero Crossing Restricts sample editing to zero crossings, that is, to positions where the amplitude is zero.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control If a sample is triggered by a MIDI note other than the one defined by the Root Key setting, the sample is pitched accordingly. If Fixed Pitch is activated, the relation between played note and root key is disregarded and all keys play the sample just as it was recorded. NOTE This setting is only available in Normal and AudioWarp playback mode. Loop Mode Allows you to select a loop mode for playback via MIDI. ● If this is set to No Loop, the sample is played once.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control One Shot The sample is played back once from beginning to end, regardless of any loop settings. Normalize Sample Normalizes the sample by detecting the highest peak level in the sample and adjusting the gain to reach the set Normalization Level value. Sample Gain allows you to modify the gain value manually afterwards. Trim Sample Trims the sample to a selected range. If no range is selected, the sample is trimmed to the range that is set with the sample start/end markers.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control This is useful, for example, if you want to stop playback of a long audio sample in One Shot mode. Transfer to New Instrument Allows you to transfer the audio sample with all its Sampler Control settings to an instrument that is loaded to a new instrument track. Open in Separate Window Opens Sampler Control in a separate window. Open in Lower Zone Opens Sampler Control in the lower zone.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Set Fade In Length Defines the fade-in length. Set Fade Out Length Defines the fade-out length. Set Sustain Loop Crossfade Length Loop crossfades allow for smoother loops. This marker defines the length for the loop crossfade. Ruler The ruler shows the timeline in the specified display format. ● To select the format, click the arrow button to the right of the ruler and select an option from the pop-up menu. You can display bars and beats, seconds, or samples.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control artifacts, particularly with higher frequencies. Better quality settings, however, also lead to higher processor load. For samples with little high-frequency content, we recommend to use Standard quality. ● Vintage allows for a deliberate reduction of playback quality by lowering the bit rate and the sample rate to emulate the artifacts of early samplers.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control NOTE If you set the AudioWarp mode to Music, the lower limit of the playback speed adjustment is 12.5 %. Values below this limit have no effect. Legato If this option is deactivated, each note that is played via MIDI starts playback from the Sampler Control position cursor. If this option is activated, the first note starts playback from the position cursor, and any following notes start from the current playback position for as long as the first note is held.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Threshold Determines the minimum level that a hitpoint needs to be detected as the start of a new slice. Minimal Length Sets the minimal length of a slice. Grid Catch In Transient + Grid slice detection mode, this parameter specifies how close to the grid a hitpoint must be. Fade In Sets the fade-in time for all slices of the loop. Fade Out Sets the fade-out time for all slices of the loop.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Filter Section In the Filter section, you can adjust the tone color of the sample sound. The filter envelope allows you to control the cutoff frequency to shape the harmonic content over time. Filter On/Off Activates/Deactivates the filtering effect. Show/Hide Filter Modulators Shows/Hides the filter envelope and the LFO editor in the waveform window. Type Sets the filter type. Shape Sets the filter shape. Cutoff Controls the cutoff frequency of the filter.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control Volume LFO Allows you to select the volume LFO and to set the volume LFO modulation depth. Pan Sets the position of the sample in the stereo panorama. Pan LFO Allows you to select the pan LFO and to set the pan LFO modulation depth. RELATED LINKS Envelope Editors on page 556 Envelope Editors You can adjust the Pitch, Filter, and Amp envelope curves. Each of these envelopes can contain up to 128 nodes.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control NOTE This parameter is only available for Pitch and Filter. Envelope display Shows the pitch, filter, or amp envelope curve. You can adjust it by adding, moving, and deleting nodes. The nodes for attack (A), sustain (S), and release (R) are always shown and cannot be deleted. Next to the release node, the release time of the envelope is shown. Mode Determines how the corresponding envelope is played back when it is triggered.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control The Time field at the top of the graphical envelope editor shows the parameters of the selected node. ● To add a node to a selection, Shift -click the node. ● To select multiple nodes, draw a rectangle around them with the mouse. If multiple nodes are selected, the Time field shows the parameters of the node that is indicated by a white border. ● To select all envelope nodes, press Ctrl/Cmd - A .
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control LFO Editor Sampler Control provides two monophonic LFOs. These LFOs are only calculated once and feed all voices at the same time. LFO Allows you to select LFO 1 or 2 for editing. Sync Defines how the speed of the corresponding LFO is set. ● Off allows you to set the LFO speed in Hz. ● Tempo + Retrig allows you to set the LFO speed in note values. The resulting rate depends on the tempo of your project. ● Tempo + Beat allows you to set the LFO speed in note values.
Sampler Tracks Sampler Control ● Log produces a logarithmic modulation. Shape continuously changes the logarithmic curvature from negative to positive. ● S & H 1 produces randomly stepped modulation, where each step is different. Shape puts ramps between the steps and changes the sample and hold signal into a smooth random signal when fully turned right. ● S & H 2 is similar to S & H 1. The steps alternate between random high and low values.
Sampler Tracks Sample Editing and Playback Functions Sample Editing and Playback Functions All sample editing in Sampler Control is non-destructive. Setting Sample Start and End By setting the sample start and end, you can define what range of the sample is played back when you press a key on your MIDI keyboard. PREREQUISITE You have loaded a sample into Sampler Control. PROCEDURE 1. In the waveform display, drag the Set Sample Start handle to the right to adjust the sample start point. 2.
Sampler Tracks Sample Editing and Playback Functions NOTE You cannot drag the loop start and end points outside the defined sample range. RESULT When you trigger the sample in a loop mode, the defined loop range is used. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK ● You can move both loop start and end markers simultaneously by dragging the area between the loop markers. RELATED LINKS Setting Sample Start and End on page 561 Setting the Root Key Manually The Root Key shows the original pitch of the sample.
Sampler Tracks Sample Editing and Playback Functions RESULT Only keys within the determined key range play a sound when triggered. RELATED LINKS Keyboard Section on page 560 Playing Back Samples After you have loaded an audio sample into Sampler Control, you can play back the sample using an external MIDI keyboard or the On-Screen Keyboard. PREREQUISITE You have loaded a sample into Sampler Control and made all sample editing and settings. You have installed and set up your MIDI keyboard. PROCEDURE 1.
Sampler Tracks Sample Editing and Playback Functions NOTE ● The Time field of an envelope node displays times in fractions of a whole note. The fraction is always reduced to the smallest possible value, for example, 2/16 is displayed as 1/8. ● You can also enter note values manually in the Time field. Envelope nodes that do not exactly match a note value display the closest note value. Normalizing Samples You can normalize samples to a target value.
Sampler Tracks Sample Editing and Playback Functions RELATED LINKS Playback Section on page 551 Setting the Root Key Manually on page 562 Setting the Key Range on page 562 Freezing Sampler Tracks You can freeze sampler tracks to reduce the real-time processing load. PROCEDURE 1. Select the sampler track and open the top Inspector section. 2. Click Freeze Sampler Channel. 3. In the Freeze Channel Options dialog, make your changes. 4. Click OK.
Sampler Tracks Transferring Samples from Sampler Control to VST Instruments Transferring Samples from Sampler Control to VST Instruments You can transfer audio samples with all settings that you have made in Sampler Control to specific Steinberg VST instruments. Transferring audio samples from Sampler Control to a VST instrument creates a new instrument track in the track list. This new track is added below the sampler track. The audio sample and all its settings are loaded in the VST instrument.
Pool Every time that you record on an audio track, a file is created on your hard disk. A reference to this file, a clip, is added to the Pool. The following rules apply to the Pool: ● All audio and video clips that belong to a project are listed in the Pool. ● Every project has a separate Pool. The way the Pool displays folders and their contents is similar to the way the File Explorer/macOS Finder displays folders and file lists.
Pool Pool Window The content of the Pool is divided into the following folders: Audio folder Contains all audio clips and regions that are in the project. If the project contains one or more sampler tracks, a dedicated Sampler Track subfolder is created in the Audio folder. This subfolder contains all clips of samples that you have loaded into Sampler Control. Video folder Contains all video clips that are in the project.
Pool Pool Window Pool Window Columns The Pool window columns display information about the clips and regions. The following columns are available: Media Contains the Audio, Video, and Trash folders. If the folders are opened, the clip or region names are shown and can be edited. Used Displays how many times a clip is used in the project. If there is no entry in this column, the corresponding clip is not used. Status Displays various icons that relate to the current Pool and clip status.
Pool Pool Window Tempo Displays the tempo of audio files if available. If no tempo has been specified, the column displays “???”. Sign. Displays the time signature, for example, “4/4”. Key Displays the root key if one has been specified for the file. Algorithm Displays the algorithm preset that is used if the audio file is processed. ● To change the default preset, click the preset name and select another preset from the pop-up menu.
Pool Pool Window Shows/Hides the info line. Audition Plays back the selected audio. Audition Loop Loops the playback until you deactivate Audition. Audition Volume Allows you to adjust the volume. View/Attributes Allows you to activate/deactivate the attributes that are displayed in the Pool window. +/- All Opens/Closes all folders. Import Allows you to import media files to the Pool. Search Allows you to search the Pool and connected disks for media files.
Pool Working with the Pool Search Section The search section allows you to search the Pool and connected disks for media files. ● To open the search section, activate Search on the Pool window toolbar. The following elements are available: Filter Allows you to set a filter.
Pool Working with the Pool Renaming Clips or Regions in the Pool IMPORTANT Renaming clips or regions in the Pool also renames the referenced files on disk. It is recommended to rename clips or regions in the Pool. Otherwise, the reference from the clip to the file may get lost. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select a clip or region, and click the existing name. 2. Enter a new name and press Return .
Pool Working with the Pool open the Sample Editor. Here, you can adjust the snap position and then perform the insert options. RESULT The clip is inserted on the selected track or on a new audio track. If several tracks are selected, the clip will be inserted on the first selected track. RELATED LINKS Adjusting the Snap Point on page 472 Inserting Clips into a Project via Drag and Drop You can drag a clip from the Pool into the Project window. Snap is taken into account if Snap is activated.
Pool Working with the Pool Deleting Files from the Hard Disk You can delete clips from the Pool by deleting the corresponding file from the hard disk. To delete a file permanently from the hard disk, you must first move the corresponding clips to the Trash folder in the Pool. IMPORTANT Make sure that the audio files that you want to delete are not used in other projects. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select the clips that you want to delete from the hard disk, and select Edit > Delete.
Pool Working with the Pool IMPORTANT You are not warned if the region is still in use. Locating Events and Clips You can quickly display to which clips the selected events belong and to which events the selected clips belong. Locating Events via Clips in the Pool You can find out which events in the project refer to a particular clip in the Pool. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select one or more clips. 2. Select Media > Select in Project.
Pool Working with the Pool NOTE Only audio files of the supported formats will be found. 3. Use the Location pop-up menu to specify where to search. The pop-up menu lists all your local drives and removable media. ● To limit the search to certain folders, select Select Search Path, and in the dialog that opens, select the folder in which you want to search. The search includes the selected folder and all subfolders.
Pool Working with the Pool Saved presets are added to the Presets submenu. 6. Optional: To remove a search filter settings preset, open the extended search pop-up menu, select the preset, and then select Remove Preset. RELATED LINKS Search Section on page 572 Missing Files When you open a project and one or more files are missing, the Resolve Missing Files dialog opens. If you click Close, the project opens without the missing files. In the Pool, you can check which files are considered missing.
Pool Working with the Pool 2. Check the Status column. If the status of the files is “Reconstructible”, the files can be reconstructed by Cubase. 3. Select the reconstructible clips and select Media > Reconstruct. RESULT The editing is performed and the edit files are recreated. Removing Missing Files from the Pool If the Pool contains audio files that cannot be found or reconstructed, you may want to remove these. PROCEDURE ● In the Pool window, select Media > Remove Missing Files.
Pool Working with the Pool Opening Clips in the Sample Editor The Sample Editor allows you to perform detailed editing on the clip. ● To open a clip in the Sample Editor, double-click a clip waveform icon in the Media column. ● To open a certain region of a clip in the Sample Editor, double-click a region icon in the Media column. You can use this to set a snap point for a clip, for example.
Pool Working with the Pool Video File Compatibility on page 1017 Importing Audio CDs into the Pool You can import tracks or sections of tracks from an audio CD directly into the Pool. This opens a dialog in which you can specify which tracks are copied from the CD, converted to audio files, and added to the Pool. ● To import an audio CD to the Pool, select Media > Import Audio CD.
Pool Working with the Pool Convert to Project Settings/Convert to Project Settings and Copy to Project Folder If Needed Converts the imported file if the sample rate or the bit depth differ from the settings in the Project Setup dialog. For single file import, you can choose which properties are converted. Split Channels Splits stereo or multi-channel audio files into a corresponding number of mono files, one for each channel, and copies the imported files to the Audio folder of the project.
Pool Working with the Pool NOTE The folders that you create in the Pool are only for organizing your files in the Pool. All files are recorded to the folder that you specified as the Pool Record folder. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool, select the Audio folder or any audio clip. NOTE You cannot designate the Video folder or any of its subfolders as the Pool Record folder. 2. Select Media > Create Folder. 3. Rename the new folder. 4.
Pool Working with the Pool RELATED LINKS Direct Offline Processing on page 421 Undoing Processing You can undo processing that has been applied to clips. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select the clip from which you want to remove the processing. 2. Select Audio > Direct Offline Processing. 3. Select the action that you want to remove, and click Delete. Minimizing Files You can minimize the audio files according to the size of the audio clips referenced in the project.
Pool Working with the Pool Converting Files In the Pool, you can convert files to another format. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select the files that you want to convert. 2. Select Media > Convert Files. 3. In the Convert Options dialog, make your changes and click OK. Convert Options Dialog In this dialog, you can convert audio files in the Pool. ● To open the Convert Options dialog, select a clip in the Pool window, and select Media > Convert Files.
Pool Working with the Pool Extracting Audio from Video File You can extract audio from video files. This automatically generates a new audio clip that appears in the Pool Record folder. NOTE This function is not available for MPEG-1 video files. PROCEDURE 1. In the Pool window, select Media > Extract Audio from Video File. 2. Select the video file from which you want to extract audio and click Open. RESULT The audio is extracted from the video file.
MediaBay and Media Rack You can manage media files on your computer as well as presets from multiple sources from within the MediaBay or the Media rack. The MediaBay window offers advanced functions for working with media files and managing database items. To show the media files on your computer in the MediaBay, you must scan the folders or volumes that contain the files so that these are added to the database.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone The following tiles are available: VST Instruments Shows VST instruments and instrument presets. VST Effects Shows VST effects and effect presets. Loops & Samples Shows audio loops, MIDI loops, or instrument sounds ordered by content set. Presets Shows track presets, strip presets, pattern banks, FX chain presets, and VST FX presets.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone Loading FX Chain Presets on page 625 Loading Strip Presets on page 625 Loading Pattern Banks on page 625 Adding Favorites Using the Favorites Page on page 596 Adding Favorites Using the File Browser Page on page 597 Favorites Page The Favorites page allows you to add your own favorite folders to the Media rack. 1 Add Favorite Opens a file dialog where you can navigate to the location of a folder and add it as a favorite folder.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone The following options are available: 1 Media Rack navigation controls Allow you to navigate to specific folders and filter the Results list. 2 Attribute filter Allows you to view and edit some of the standard file attributes found in your media files. 3 Results list Shows all media files that are found in the selected folder and allows you to select a media file. 4 Previewer Allows you to preview the selected media file.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone The following options are available: 1 Media Rack navigation controls Allow you to navigate to specific folders and filter the Results list. 2 Add Favorite Allows you to add the selected folder as a favorite folder. 3 Back/Forward/Up Up navigates to the parent folder. Back navigates to the previously used folder. Forward navigates to the most recent folder. 4 File browser Allows you to browse selected folders.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone VST Instruments Page The VST Instruments page shows all VST instruments of the selected collection. ● To open the VST Instruments page, go to the Home page of the Media rack, and click VST Instruments. The following options are available: 1 Media Rack navigation controls Allow you to navigate to specific folders and filter the Results list. 2 Expand All/Collapse All Expands/Collapses all results.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone RELATED LINKS VST Plug-in Manager Window on page 657 Adding Pictures of VST Instruments to the Media Rack on page 597 VST Effects Page The VST Effects page shows all VST effects of the selected collection. ● To open the VST Effects page, go to the Home page of the Media rack, and click VST Effects. The following options are available: 1 Media Rack navigation controls Allow you to navigate to specific folders and filter the Results list.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone ● 6 Plug-in Manager opens the Plug-in Manager that allows you to create new plug-in collections. These will be listed in the Plug-in Collections and Options menu below the Default collection. Plug-in list Shows the plug-ins of the selected collection.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone Allows you to specify which attribute columns are displayed on the Results page. 5 Show/Hide Attribute Filters Shows/Hides the Attribute Filters section. RELATED LINKS Home Page on page 587 Results Page on page 589 Media File Attributes on page 616 Working with the Media Rack The Media rack in the right zone of the Project window allows you to search for supported media files and included VST instruments, and add them to your project.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone 2. Do one of the following: ● Drag an effect on the track list to create an FX channel track. ● To add the effect to an audio-related track, drag the effect from the Media rack, and drop it in the Inserts or Sends section of the track Inspector.
MediaBay and Media Rack Media Rack in Right Zone RELATED LINKS Favorites Page on page 589 Adding Favorites Using the File Browser Page You can add favorite folders using the File Browser page. This allows you to directly access media files in specific folders. PROCEDURE 1. In the Media rack, click the File Browser tile. 2. In the File Browser, navigate to the folder that you want to add as a favorite and select it. 3. Do one of the following: ● At the top left of the page, click Add Favorite.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Adding Pictures of VST Effects to the Media Rack Pictures of VST effects from other vendors are not loaded by default. However, you can add them to the Media rack manually. PREREQUISITE You have added a VST effect from another vendor. PROCEDURE 1. Open the control panel of the VST effect. 2. On the control panel, click Add VST Plug-in Picture to Media Rack. RESULT The picture of the VST effect is shown in the Media rack.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Contains tools and shortcuts for settings and functions in the MediaBay, and allows you to switch between the previously defined favorite locations. Favorites in the MediaBay window are not automatically scanned. 3 Filters Allows you to filter the Results list using a logical or an attribute filter. 4 Results Displays all supported media files. You can filter the list and perform text searches.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Include Folders and Subfolders Activate this to show the content of folders and subfolders. Left Divider Left Divider Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. Text Search Search Allows you to search media files by name or by attribute. Media Types Filter Select Media Types Allows you to select the media types that are displayed on the Results page. Rating Filter Rating Filter Filters files according to their rating.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window MediaBay Settings MediaBay Settings Opens the MediaBay settings. Window Zone Controls Show/Hide Left Zone Shows/Hides the left zone of the window. Show/Hide Lower Zone Shows/Hides the lower zone of the window. Show/Hide Right Zone Shows/Hides the right zone of the window. Set up Window Layout Allows you to set up the window layout. Set up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window To show the supported media files in the Results section of the MediaBay, you must scan all folders that you want to include in the search. You can also add favorite folders. All media files contained in a Favorite are automatically scanned. RELATED LINKS Scanning Folders on page 602 Adding Favorites on page 602 Scanning Folders To include specific folders in the MediaBay search, you must scan them. PROCEDURE 1.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window 4. Click OK. RESULT ● In the File Browser section, a new folder with the specified name is added to the Favorites folder. ● In the Favorites section, the added favorite is available in the Select Defined Favorite pop-up menu. ● In the Media rack in the right zone of the Project window, a new tile with the specified name is added on the Favorites page. NOTE Favorites in the MediaBay window are not automatically scanned.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window NOTE You can set the maximum number of files that are displayed in the Results list in the MediaBay Settings. Setting up the Results List Columns For each media type, or for combinations of media types, you can specify the attribute columns that are displayed in the Results list. PROCEDURE 1. In the Results section, select the media types for which you want to make settings. 2.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window IMPORTANT If you delete a file using the File Explorer/macOS Finder, it is still displayed in the Results list, although it is no longer available to the program. To remedy this, rescan the corresponding folder. Shuffling the Results List You can display the Results list entries in a random order. ● To shuffle the Results list, click Shuffle Results in the MediaBay toolbar.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Show Media Types Selector You can activate the media types that you want to be displayed in the Results list. The following media types are available: Audio Files Shows all audio files. The supported formats are .wav, .w64, .aiff, .aifc, .rex, .rx2, .mp3, .mp2, .ogg, .wma (Windows only). MIDI Files Shows all MIDI files (file name extension .mid). MIDI Loops Shows all MIDI loops (file name extension .midiloop).
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Projects Shows all project files (from Cubase, Nuendo): .cpr, .npr. RELATED LINKS Pattern Banks Previewer on page 613 Track Presets on page 176 Saving/Loading Strip Presets on page 375 Saving/Loading EQ Presets on page 368 Saving/Loading FX Chain Presets on page 365 Video File Compatibility on page 1017 Filtering According to Rating With the Rating Filter, you can filter files according to their rating.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Boolean Text Search You can perform advanced searches, using boolean operators or wildcards. You can use the following elements: And [+] [a and b] When entering strings separated by “and” (or a plus sign), all files are found that contain both a and b. [And] is the default setting when no boolean operator is used, for example, you can also enter [a b].
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Previewer Section You can preview individual files in the Previewer section to find out which one to use in your project. The elements visible in this section and their functions depend on the media type. IMPORTANT The Previewer section is not available for video files, project files, and audio track presets.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Using Selection Ranges You can specify selection ranges to preview a particular section of an audio file and insert it into the project. NOTE Selection ranges cannot be used when the Align Beats to Project option is activated in the Previewer. ● To select a range, move the mouse over the upper part of the waveform, so that it turns into a pencil, click and drag. ● To adjust the borders of the selection range, drag the handles.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window MIDI Loops Previewer The Previewer for MIDI loops allows you to listen to MIDI loops before you use them in your project. NOTE MIDI loops are always played back in sync with the project. 1 Transport controls Start and stop the preview. 2 Preview Level fader Specifies the preview level. 3 Auto Play New Results Selection Automatically plays back the selected file.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Specifies the preview level. 5 Keyboard You can display the Keyboard in keyboard display mode or in piano display mode. 6 Computer Keyboard Input Allows you to use your computer keyboard to preview the presets. RELATED LINKS Previewing Presets Using the Memo Recorder Mode on page 612 On-Screen Keyboard on page 252 Previewing Presets Via MIDI Input MIDI input is always active.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window To use another sequence, start entering notes again. Previewing Presets Via the Computer Keyboard NOTE If you activate Computer Keyboard Input, the computer keyboard is used exclusively for the Previewer section. However, you can still use the following key commands: Ctrl/Cmd - S (Save), Num * (Start/Stop Record), Space (Start/Stop Playback), Num 1 (Jump to left locator), Delete or Backspace , Num / (Cycle on/off), and F2 (Show/Hide Transport panel). PROCEDURE 1.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Filters Section The MediaBay allows you to refine your file searches. You have two possibilities: Logical or Attribute filtering. Logical Filter The logical filter allows you to set up complex search conditions that must be met to find files. NOTE The Logical Filter is not available in the Media rack in the right zone. contains The search result must contain the text or number specified in the text field to the right.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Applying a Logical Filter To quickly find certain audio files, you can search for a specific file attribute value, for example. PREREQUISITE The folder in which you want to search for files is selected. PROCEDURE 1. In the Filters section, activate Logical. 2. Click Search in these Attributes to open the Select Filter Attributes dialog. 3. Select the attributes that you want to use.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window PROCEDURE 1. In the Filters section, activate Logical. 2. Select an attribute on the Search in these Attributes pop-up menu or keep the Any Attribute setting on. 3. Set the condition to matches. 4. Specify the text that you want to search for in the field to the right using boolean operators. RELATED LINKS Performing a Text Search on page 607 Media File Attributes Media file attributes are sets of metadata providing additional information on the file.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window RELATED LINKS Attribute Inspector on page 618 Applying an Attribute Filter With the Attribute filter, you can quickly find tagged media files with certain attributes. ● To apply an Attribute filter, select an attribute value. The Results list is filtered accordingly. Apply more attribute filters to narrow down the result even more. ● To find files that match either one or the other attribute, Ctrl/Cmd -click different attribute values in the same column.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window This also resets the Results list. Attribute Inspector When you have selected one or more files in the Results list, the Attribute Inspector shows a list of attributes and their values. NOTE The Attribute Inspector is not available in the Media rack in the right zone. In the Attribute Inspector, you can also edit and add new attribute values. The available attributes are divided into several groups (Media, Musical, Preset, etc.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Add User Attribute Opens the Add User Attribute dialog, where you can add custom user attributes. You can select the Attribute Type and the Display Name. Reset to Default Resets the attribute list to the default settings. Attribute Shows the attribute name. Select Shows whether an attribute is activated or deactivated. Type Shows whether the value for an attribute is a number, text, or a Yes/No switch.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window 3. ● For most of the attributes, a pop-up menu opens from which you can choose a value. Some of the pop-up menus also have a more entry to open a window with more attribute values. ● For the Rating attribute, you can click in the Value column and drag left or right to modify the setting. ● For the Character attribute (Musical group), the Edit Character dialog opens. To define values, click a radio button on the left or the right side and then click OK.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window IMPORTANT You can define attribute values of write-protected files in the MediaBay. These changes are only saved in the MediaBay database file, they are not saved to disk. This means that if you delete the preferences, these changes are lost. NOTE ● If the Write Protection and/or the Pending Tags columns are not visible, activate the corresponding attributes for the file type in the Attribute Inspector.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window ● 4. The display settings made for the Mixed Media Types option are applied if you select files of different media types in the Results list or in the Attribute Inspector. Activate the attributes that you want to be displayed. You can edit several attributes simultaneously. 5. Click Configure Defined Attributes again to exit the configuration mode.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Using Media Files The MediaBay window and the Media rack in the right zone of the Project window offer you multiple possibilities to search for specific files, loops, samples, presets, and patterns that you can use in your project. Once you have found the media files that you were looking for, you can load them into your project. Loading Loops and Samples PROCEDURE 1. 2.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Loading Instrument Presets PROCEDURE 1. 2. Do one of the following: ● In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click Plug-in Presets, and select a preset for an instrument plug-in. ● In the Media rack in the right zone, click the VST Instruments tile, and click the following tiles until you can select the preset in the Results list.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Window Loading FX Chain Presets PROCEDURE 1. Do one of the following: ● In the MediaBay, open the media types selector, click FX Chain Presets, and select a preset. ● In the Media rack in the right zone, click Presets > FX Chain Presets, and click the following tiles until you can select the preset in the Results list. 2. In the Project window, select an audio track. 3.
MediaBay and Media Rack Working with Volume Databases ● Double-click the pattern bank to create a new instrument track with the loaded preset. ● Drag the pattern bank and drop it on an instrument track to apply the pattern bank to the track. ● Drag the pattern bank and drop it on the track list to create a new instrument track with the loaded pattern bank. RESULT Groove Agent is loaded as a track instrument.
MediaBay and Media Rack Working with Volume Databases IMPORTANT You must select the topmost directory level for this. You cannot create a database file for a lower-level folder. NOTE If you create a volume database on a network drive, multiple users can access it. However, this can lead to write conflicts as only one user can write to the database at a time. RESULT The file information for this drive is written into a new database file.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Settings ● If you cannot get hold of the other user, and you want to use the database, click Force unlock to remove the lock. Removing Volume Databases If you have worked on another computer using an external hard disk and return to your own computer and connect the external device again as part of your system setup, you no longer need a separate volume database for it.
MediaBay and Media Rack MediaBay Settings NOTE The MediaBay does not warn you if the maximum number of files has been reached. There might be situations where a certain file cannot be found because the maximum number of files was reached. Allow Editing in Results List Allows you to edit attributes in the Results list. If this option is deactivated, attributes can only be edited in the Attribute Inspector. Show File Extensions in Results List Shows file name extensions in the Results list.
Automation In essence, automation means recording the values for a particular MixConsole or effect parameter. When you create your final mix, Cubase can adjust this particular parameter control. Recording your Actions If the settings in your current project are crucial, you may not want to experiment with automation until you know more about how it all fits together. If so, you can create a new project for the following example.
Automation Static Value Line Static Value Line When you open an automation track for the first time, it does not contain any automation events. This is reflected in the event display as a dotted horizontal line, the static value line. This line represents the current parameter setting.
Automation Writing Automation Data Automatic Writing of Automation Data Every action that you perform is automatically recorded on automation tracks which you can later open for viewing and editing. PROCEDURE 1. In the track list, click Show/Hide Automation for a track to open its automation track. 2. Click W to enable the writing of automation data on this track. 3. Start playback. 4. Adjust the parameters in the MixConsole, in the Channel Settings window, or on the effect control panel.
Automation Writing Automation Data RESULT The automated parameter changes with the automation curve, and the corresponding fader in the MixConsole moves accordingly. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Repeat the procedure if you are not happy with the result. If you draw over existing events, a new curve is created. Tools for Drawing Automation Data Apart from the Draw tool, you can use the Object Selection tool and the Line tool to draw automation events.
Automation Editing Automation Events Editing Automation Events Automation events can be edited much like other events. NOTE If you move an event or part on a track and you want the automation events to follow automatically, select Edit > Automation Follows Events. Any automation events at the new position are overwritten. ● You can use the tools on the Project window toolbar to edit automation events. ● You can use the automation event editor to edit selected automation events on ramp automation curves.
Automation Editing Automation Events AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK For even more precise editing, add new automation events to your bézier curve segment. This creates new segments that you can smoothen. Selecting Automation Events ● To select an automation event, click it with the Object Selection tool. ● To select multiple events, drag a selection rectangle with the Object Selection tool or Shift click the events.
Automation Editing Automation Events 1 Tilt Left If you click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can tilt the left part of the curve. This allows you to tilt the event values at the start of the curve upwards or downwards. 2 Compress Left If you Alt/Opt -click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can compress or expand the left part of the curve. This allows you to compress or expand the event values at the start of the curve.
Automation Editing Automation Events NOTE If you select automation events using the Range Selection tool, additional automation events are automatically created at the start and the end of the selection. This ensures that the entire selection is edited. RELATED LINKS Automation Curves on page 630 Quick Vertical Scaling of Automation Events You can scale the curve segment between two automation events vertically without any need to select the events first. PROCEDURE 1.
Automation Automation Tracks NOTE If you press Esc while dragging the selection rectangle, the selection jumps back to its original position. RELATED LINKS Selecting Automation Events on page 635 Removing Automation Events ● To remove an automation event, click on it with the Erase tool. ● To remove multiple automation events, select them and press Backspace or Delete or select Edit > Delete.
Automation Automation Tracks Assigning a Parameter to an Automation Track Parameters are already assigned to automation tracks when you open them, according to their order in the parameter list. PROCEDURE 1. Open an automation track and click on the automation parameter name. A parameter list is shown. The content depends on the track type. 2.
VST Instruments VST instruments are software synthesizers or other sound sources that are contained within Cubase. They are played internally via MIDI. You can add effects or EQ to VST instruments. Cubase allows you to make use of VST instruments in the following ways: ● By adding a VST instrument and assigning one or several MIDI tracks to it. ● By creating an instrument track. This is a combination of a VST instrument, an instrument channel, and a MIDI track.
VST Instruments VST Instrument Control Panel VST Instrument Control Panel The VST instrument control panel allows you to set up the parameters of the selected instrument. The contents, design, and layout of the control panel depend on the selected instrument. The following controls are available: 1 Activate Instrument Activates/Deactivates the instrument. 2 Read Automation/Write Automation Allows you to read/write automation for the instrument parameter settings.
VST Instruments VST Instrument Control Panel Loads the previous/next program in the preset browser. 10 Preset Management Opens a pop-up menu that allows you to save, rename, or remove a preset. 11 Add VST Plug-in Picture to Media Rack Adds a picture of the VST plug-in to the Media rack. This is only available for plug-ins of other vendors. 12 VST Instrument context menu Opens a context menu with specific functions and settings. 13 Show/Hide VST Quick Controls Shows/hides the quick controls.
VST Instruments VST Instrument Selector Closing All Control Panels When you add a VST instrument, the respective plug-in control panel opens automatically. You can close all control panels at once. PROCEDURE ● Select Window > Close All Plug-in Windows. NOTE This also closes VST effect control panels. RESULT The control panels are closed.
VST Instruments Creating Instrument Tracks Creating Instrument Tracks You can create instrument tracks that hold dedicated VST instruments. PROCEDURE 1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track 2. Click Instrument. 3. Open the Instrument pop-up menu and select a VST instrument. 4. Click Add Track. . RESULT The selected VST instrument is loaded for the instrument track. In the MixConsole, an instrument channel is added.
VST Instruments VST Instruments Window VST Instruments Window The VST Instruments window allows you to add VST instruments for MIDI and instrument tracks. All instruments that are used in your project are shown. You can access up to 8 quick controls for each added instrument. To open the VST Instruments window, select Studio > VST Instruments.
VST Instruments VST Instrument Controls ● MIDI Channel follows track selection ensures that the Channel selector follows the MIDI track selection in the Project window. Use this mode if you work with multitimbral instruments. ● Remote-Control Focus for VST Quick Controls follows track selection ensures that the VST Quick Controls remote-control focus follows the track selection. VST Instrument Controls The VST instrument controls allow you to make settings for a loaded VST instrument.
VST Instruments VST Instrument Controls Allows you to select a program. RELATED LINKS Freezing Instruments on page 650 VST Instrument Context Menu The VST instrument control panel context menu and the Functions menu on the VST instrument control panel show functions and settings that are specific for the instrument. Do one of the following: ● Right-click an empty area of the VST instrument control panel. ● Open the Functions pop-up menu on the VST instrument control panel.
VST Instruments Presets for Instruments RELATED LINKS General on page 1076 Presets for Instruments You can load and save presets for instruments. These contain all the settings that are required for the sound that you want. The following presets for instruments are available: ● VST Presets VST presets include the parameter settings of a VST instrument. These are available from the VST Instruments window, from the instrument control panels, and from the Programs field in the Inspector.
VST Instruments Presets for Instruments 3. Optional: Click Show Attribute Inspector and define attributes for the preset. 4. Click OK to save the preset and close the dialog. Loading Track Presets You can load track presets for instrument tracks from the Inspector. PROCEDURE 1. 2. Do one of the following: ● Select the instrument track, and in the Inspector, click the Load Track Preset field. ● Right-click the instrument track, and from the context menu, select Load Track Preset.
VST Instruments Playing Back VST Instruments Saving Track Presets You can save your settings on instrument tracks as track presets for further use. PROCEDURE 1. Right-click the instrument track, and from the context menu, select Save Track Preset. 2. In the Save Track Preset dialog, enter a name for the preset. 3. Optional: Click Show Attribute Inspector and define attributes for the preset. 4. Click OK to save the preset and close the dialog.
VST Instruments Latency ● Select the instrument track and open the top Inspector section. 2. Click Freeze Instrument Channel. 3. In the Freeze Channel Options dialog, make your changes. 4. Click OK. RESULT ● The instrument is rendered to an audio file, and on playback you hear the same sound as before freezing. ● Less CPU load is used. ● The Freeze Channel Options button lights up. ● The MIDI/instrument track controls are grayed out. ● The MIDI parts are locked.
VST Instruments Import and Export Options If the latency is too high to allow comfortable real time VST instrument playback from a keyboard, you can use another MIDI sound source for live playback and recording, and switch to the VST instrument for playback. RELATED LINKS Selecting an Audio Driver on page 17 Delay Compensation During playback, Cubase automatically compensates any delay inherent in the VST plug-ins you use.
VST Instruments Import and Export Options 2. Optional: On the toolbar, open the Select Media Types menu, and activate MIDI Loops and Plug-in Presets. 3. In the Results list, select a MIDI loop and drag it to an empty section in the Project window. RESULT An instrument track is created and the instrument part is inserted at the position where you dragged the file.
VST Instruments Side-Chaining for VST Instruments macOS: /Users//Library/Application Support/Steinberg/MIDI Loops/ The default folder cannot be changed. However, you can create subfolders within this folder to organize your MIDI loops. To create a subfolder, click New Folder in the Save MIDI Loop dialog. Exporting Instrument Tracks as MIDI Files You can export instrument tracks as standard MIDI files. PROCEDURE 1. Select an instrument track. 2. Select File > Export > MIDI File. 3.
VST Instruments Side-Chaining for VST Instruments Using Instruments as Effects on Audio Tracks You can use instruments that support side-chaining to modify the audio on audio tracks. The following example shows you how to apply the parameters in Retrologue to a drum loop. PREREQUISITE You have a drum loop on an audio track. You have created an instrument track with Retrologue loaded. PROCEDURE 1. On the Retrologue control panel, click Activate/Deactivate Side-Chaining. 2.
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins Cubase supports the VST 2 and VST 3 plug-in standards. You can install effects and instruments that comply with these formats. NOTE Cubase only supports 64-bit plug-ins. A plug-in is a piece of software that adds a specific functionality to Cubase. The audio effects and instruments that are used in Cubase are VST plug-ins. VST effect or VST instrument plug-ins normally have their own installation application.
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins Plug-ins and Collections VST Plug-in Manager Window You can manage VST effects and VST instruments in the VST Plug-in Manager window. ● To open the VST Plug-in Manager window, select Studio > VST Plug-in Manager. The VST Plug-in Manager is divided into the following sections: VST Effects Lists all VST effects that are loaded in Cubase. To sort the list by a specific attribute, click the corresponding column header.
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins Plug-ins and Collections Plug-in Report Opens the File Explorer/macOS Finder that allows you to save a text file that contains information about your system as well as plug-in information. This is useful for troubleshooting, for example.
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins Adding New Plug-in Collections ● Default activates the default collection. ● New Collection allows you to create a new collection. ● Remove Unavailable Plug-ins from All Collections removes all plug-ins that are not available from all user-created collections. ● Sort By Category sorts the collection by category. NOTE This option is only available for the Default collection. ● Sort By Vendor sorts the collection by vendor.
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins Hiding Plug-ins 2. In the New Collection dialog, enter a name for the new collection and click OK. 3. Optional: Click New Folder. You can then move your plug-ins into these folders to organize them by categories, for example. 4. Enter a name for the new folder and click OK. 5. On the VST Effects tab or the VST Instruments tab, select the plug-ins that you want to add to the collection, and drag them in the new collection.
Installing and Managing VST Plug-ins Reactivating Plug-ins from the Blocklist RELATED LINKS ASIO-Guard on page 1063 Reactivating Plug-ins from the Blocklist You can reactivate 64-bit plug-ins that are on the blocklist. PROCEDURE 1. On the Blocklist tab, select the plug-ins that you want to reactivate. NOTE You cannot reactivate 32-bit plug-ins, because they are not supported. 2. Click Reactivate. RESULT Cubase rescans the plug-in and removes it from the blocklist.
Track Quick Controls Cubase allows you to set up 8 different track parameters or settings as Track Quick Controls for quick access.
Track Quick Controls Parameter Assignment Track Quick Controls rack in the MixConsole Quick Controls assignments are saved with the project. You can assign Track Quick Controls to an external remote control device. For this to work, you must connect Track Quick Controls with your remote controller. You can automate parameter settings in the Quick Controls section using the Read/Write buttons (R and W).
Track Quick Controls Parameter Assignment 2. In the Quick Controls section, click the first slot to open a selector that lists all parameters for the track. 3. Select the parameter that you want to assign to the first Quick Control. The parameter name and its value are displayed in the slot. You can change the value by dragging the slider. 4. Repeat these steps for all slots for which you want to assign track parameters.
Track Quick Controls Parameter Assignment 4. Move the control. RESULT The track parameter is assigned to the corresponding control. RELATED LINKS Controlling Automatable Parameters on page 666 Setting Instrument Parameter Assignments to Default If you have changed the parameter assignment or if you manually routed a MIDI track to a VST instrument, you can retrieve the default assignments. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector for the instrument or MIDI track, open the Quick Controls section. 2.
Track Quick Controls Controlling Automatable Parameters PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector for your track, open the Quick Controls section. 2. In the Quick Controls section, click Preset Management 3. Click Save Preset. 4. Enter a name in the Type in Preset Name dialog. 5. Click OK. . RESULT The Quick Control assignment is saved as a preset.
Track Quick Controls Controlling Automatable Parameters 4. Assign a parameter of one particular channel to Quick Control 1, and another parameter of another channel to Quick Control 2. RESULT The Quick Controls section now allows you to control automatable parameters on different tracks. IMPORTANT You cannot save Quick Control assignments for automatable parameters on different tracks as track presets.
MIDI Remote MIDI Remote allows you to integrate and use third party MIDI controllers in Cubase. The MIDI Remote concept is based on dedicated scripts for specific MIDI controllers. These scripts establish a connection between a specific MIDI controller and Cubase, and include factory mappings to parameters. The layout and functions of MIDI controllers with a script can be shown on the MIDI Remote tab in the lower zone of the Project window.
MIDI Remote MIDI Remote Tab The MIDI Remote tab in the lower zone of the Project window The following elements are available: 1 Info line The MIDI Remote info line. 2 MIDI controller surface Shows which Cubase functions are mapped to which knobs on your MIDI controller. You can use multiple MIDI controllers simultaneously. All available supported MIDI controllers are shown in the overview.
MIDI Remote MIDI Remote Tab MIDI Controller Go to Previous Controller If you have more than one MIDI controller connected, this allows you to go to the previous MIDI controller. MIDI Controller Shows the name of the MIDI controller that is currently shown on the MIDI Remote tab in the lower zone of the Project window. Incoming MIDI Data from Other Controller If you have more than one MIDI controller connected, this shows the activity of the controller that is currently not selected.
MIDI Remote MIDI Remote Tab Activates the next mapping page for the current controller. Open Mapping Assistant Opens the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant. Quick Control Focus Quick Control Focus Shows the name of the item that has the quick control focus, that is, either the track name or the plug-in name. Focus Quick Controls Lock State: Locked/Unlocked Allows you to lock the focus of the quick controls. Focus Quick Controls Indicator Shows which quick controls have the focus.
MIDI Remote MIDI Remote Tab Last Hovered Control Last Hovered Control Shows the control that you last hovered with the mouse on the controller surface, the host parameter that the control is assigned to, and its last value. Scripting Tools Reload Scripts Allows you to reload the scripts. Open MIDI Remote Script Console Opens the MIDI Remote Script Console with script messages. Open Script Folder Opens the location of the scripts folder.
MIDI Remote Using Supported MIDI Controllers with MIDI Remote Using Supported MIDI Controllers with MIDI Remote The layout and functions of supported MIDI controllers, that is, controllers with a script, are shown on the MIDI Remote tab in the lower zone of the Project window.
MIDI Remote Other MIDI Controllers and MIDI Remote Mapping Controls on MIDI Controllers to Cubase Functions on page 675 MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant on page 682 MIDI Remote API on page 696 Adding MIDI Controller Surfaces If you want to use a MIDI controller that is not yet supported and therefore has no script, you must first add a new MIDI controller surface for it.
MIDI Remote Other MIDI Controllers and MIDI Remote Editing MIDI Controller Surfaces You can edit MIDI controller surfaces in the MIDI Controller Surface Editor in the lower zone of the Project window. PREREQUISITE You have added a new surface using the Add MIDI Controller Surface dialog, and clicked Add MIDI Controller Surface and open Editor to open the MIDI Controller Surface Editor. PROCEDURE 1.
MIDI Remote Other MIDI Controllers and MIDI Remote NOTE If the Functions Browser is not shown in the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant, activate Show/Hide Functions Browser. ● Right-click a function in Cubase, and select Pick for MIDI Remote Mapping. The name of the function is shown in the Mapping Assistant. 4. Click Apply Mapping. 5. Repeat the steps above to map more Cubase functions to hardware controls. RESULT The Cubase functions are now mapped to the hardware controls.
MIDI Remote Add MIDI Controller Surface Dialog 2. On the info line, click Edit MIDI Controller Surface. RESULT In the lower zone of the Project window, the MIDI Controller Surface Editor opens where you can make changes to your controller surface. RELATED LINKS MIDI Controller Surface Editor on page 678 Editing MIDI Controller Surfaces on page 675 Add MIDI Controller Surface Dialog The Add MIDI Controller Surface dialog allows you to add a surface that corresponds to the layout of your MIDI controller.
MIDI Remote Add MIDI Controller Surface Dialog Model Allows you to enter information about the model of the connected MIDI controller. Script Creator Allows you to enter information about the script creator of the connected MIDI controller. NOTE Specific characters are not allowed. Input Port Allows you to select the MIDI input port of your MIDI controller. NOTE Make sure that you select the MIDI port of your MIDI controller, otherwise, your surface script will not work as expected.
MIDI Remote Add MIDI Controller Surface Dialog Info line Contains buttons for Undo, Redo, and Open Mapping Assistant. It also shows the information that you entered when you added the MIDI controller surface. Message board Shows if you are in Learn Mode or in Edit Mode, and gives information about the steps that you can perform. Control types Allows you to select the type of control that you want to add. You can add knobs, faders, and buttons.
MIDI Remote Add MIDI Controller Surface Dialog Item Properties on page 680 Item Properties The Item Properties are only available in Edit Mode. They show the properties for the control that you select in the MIDI Controller Surface Editor. ● To show the Item Properties, open the MIDI Controller Surface Editor, use the Learn Mode to create surface controls that are assigned to your MIDI controller, and select a surface control in the surface display to activate Edit Mode.
MIDI Remote Add MIDI Controller Surface Dialog RELATED LINKS MIDI Controller Surface Editor on page 678 Edit Mode on page 682 Learn Mode and Edit Mode The different steps that you must perform when creating a new surface for your MIDI controller in the MIDI Controller Surface Editor are divided into two modes: Learn Mode and Edit Mode. Learn Mode Learn Mode allows you to add controls to the surface display by sending MIDI messages, that is, moving controls on your MIDI controller.
MIDI Remote MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant Edit Mode Edit Mode allows you to edit the selected control. In Edit Mode, the selected control is shown in blue. ● Drag the control handles to change the dimensions of the control. ● Click and drag or use Up Arrow , Down Arrow , Left Arrow , or Right Arrow to move a control. ● Hold down Shift and select another control to select multiple controls. ● Click the trash icon to remove a control.
MIDI Remote MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant The following sections are available: Mapping Assistant Show/Hide Functions Browser Opens/closes the Functions Browser in the right zone.
MIDI Remote MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant The Mapping Assistant guides you through the mapping process. It allows you to select a control on your MIDI controller and a Cubase function for mapping. Bypass MIDI Controller Learn Mode ● If this is deactivated, you can touch a control on your MIDI controller or click a control in the controller surface to select it for mapping. ● If this is activated, you must click a control in the controller surface to select it for mapping.
MIDI Remote MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant Mappings Mapping Page Shows the active mapping page. Mapping Page Settings Opens a menu that allows you to delete, rename, and duplicate the selected mapping page. Add Mapping Page Opens a dialog that allows you to add a new, empty mapping page. Mapping List To sort the list by a specific attribute, click the corresponding column header. ● Mapping Page Type Indicates whether the mapping is saved as a Factory mapping or as a User mapping.
MIDI Remote MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant ● Jump Sends a new value to the Cubase function as soon as you move the control on your MIDI controller. This can result in abrupt value changes. ● Pickup Picks up on the value of the Cubase function as soon as the control that you move on your MIDI controller reaches that value. This results in smooth value changes, but requires you to estimate the pickup value.
MIDI Remote MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant Reset Filter Allows you to reset the search filter. Expand All Expands all entries. Collapse All Collapses all entries. RELATED LINKS Mapping Pages and Mapping Scopes on page 687 Mapping Controls on MIDI Controllers to Cubase Functions on page 675 Adding MIDI Controller Surfaces on page 674 Mapping Pages and Mapping Scopes Mapping Pages All mappings of Cubase functions and controls on your MIDI controller are saved on mapping pages.
MIDI Remote MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant Focus Quick Controls Focus Quick Controls are focus-dependent quick controls. This means that the active window focus determines which parameters respond to your MIDI controller. Focus Quick Controls are the most versatile form of quick controls. You can set them up in the Functions Browser of the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant. To set up the focus behavior for the focus quick controls, activate one of the options in the Quick Control Focus Setup.
MIDI Remote MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant 3. Activate Show/Hide Functions Browser, and in the Focus Quick Controls category in the Functions Browser, select a quick control. 4. Click Apply Mapping. 5. Repeat the steps above to map more Focus Quick Controls to your MIDI controller. RESULT The Focus Quick Controls are now mapped to your MIDI controller.
MIDI Remote MIDI Remote Manager Window 2. ● To lock the focus to a specific plug-in window, open the corresponding window. ● To lock the focus to a specific track, select the track in the track list, and make sure that the Quick Control Focus section is shown on the MIDI Remote info line. Activate the lock by clicking Focus Quick Controls Lock State: Unlocked . RESULT The Quick Control Focus section of the MIDI Remote info line shows the name of the track or the plug-in window that has the focus.
MIDI Remote MIDI Remote Manager Window Scripts The Scripts tab lists all scripts that are installed by the names of the corresponding controllers. To sort the list by a specific attribute, click the corresponding column header. Select a controller name in the list to display information about the script in the bottom part of the window. Add Surface Opens the Add MIDI Controller Surface dialog that allows you to add a new MIDI controller surface for a MIDI controller that has no script.
MIDI Remote MIDI Remote Manager Window Model The model of the selected MIDI controller. Vendor The vendor of the selected MIDI controller. Status The status of the selected MIDI controller. Input Port Shows the MIDI input port of your MIDI controller. Output Port Shows the MIDI output port of your MIDI controller. Show Script Info Opens the Scripts tab for the selected MIDI controller.
MIDI Remote MIDI Remote Manager Window Model The model of the selected MIDI controller. Vendor The vendor of the selected MIDI controller. Script Creator The script creator of the selected MIDI controller. Instances The number of instances of the selected MIDI controller. Surface Editor Script If the selected MIDI controller script was created with the MIDI Controller Surface Editor, this is indicated by a checkmark. Click Edit MIDI Controller Surface to open the MIDI Controller Surface Editor.
MIDI Remote MIDI Remote Script Console RESULT The script is deleted and the controller surface is removed from the MIDI controllers overview. RELATED LINKS Adding MIDI Controller Surfaces on page 674 MIDI Remote Manager Window on page 690 Disabling Controller Scripts You can disable controller scripts. This is useful if you want to use a custom script for a MIDI controller that already has a public controller script assigned, for example. PROCEDURE 1.
MIDI Remote MIDI Remote Script Console Reload Scripts Allows you to reload the scripts that are displayed in the MIDI Remote Script Console. Clear All Messages Clears all messages from the message display. All Messages Shows all messages in the message display. Error Messages Shows error messages in the message display. Log Messages Shows log messages in the message display. MIDI Controller Scripts Shows information about the available MIDI controller scripts.
MIDI Remote MIDI Remote API MIDI Remote API The application programming interface MIDI Remote API allows you to develop a script, that is, a device driver for dedicated MIDI controllers. Scripts describe the layout and order of controls of a specific MIDI controller. They include factory mappings to Cubase parameters. Cubase comes with scripts for the a number of MIDI controllers. If you connect one of these controllers, it is automatically detected and displayed on the MIDI Remote tab.
Remote Controlling Cubase You can control Cubase via MIDI with a connected MIDI device. The supported devices are described in the separate document Remote Control Devices. You can also use a generic MIDI controller to remote-control Cubase. NOTE Most remote-control devices are able to control both MIDI and audio channels in Cubase, but the parameter setup may be different. Audio-specific controls such as EQ are disregarded when controlling MIDI channels.
Remote Controlling Cubase Setting up Remote Devices 4. Click OK. RESULT The remote unit input is removed from the All MIDI Inputs group. RELATED LINKS MIDI Port Setup Page on page 26 Setting up Remote Devices PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2. Click Add in the top left corner and select a remote device from the pop-up menu to add it to the Devices list. NOTE If your device is not available in the pop-up menu, select Generic Remote. 3. In the Devices list, select the device.
Remote Controlling Cubase Setting up Remote Devices You can open a panel for the added device by selecting Studio > More Options. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Depending on your external MIDI control device, you might need to configure the parameters. Resetting Remote Devices Sometimes you must reset remote devices, because the communication between Cubase and a remote device was interrupted or the handshaking protocol fails to create a connection. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2.
Remote Controlling Cubase Remote Devices and Automation Global Options for Remote Controllers On the page for your remote device, global functions may be available. MIDI Input Allows you to select a MIDI input. MIDI Output Allows you to select a MIDI output. User Commands Lists the controls or buttons of your remote device. Smart Switch Delay Allows you to specify a delay for the smart switch function. Functions that support the smart switch behavior are activated for as long as the button is pressed.
Remote Controlling Cubase Assigning Commands to Remote Devices This way, all data for the corresponding parameter is replaced from the position where you moved the control, up to the position where you stop playback. Assigning Commands to Remote Devices You can assign any Cubase command to which a key command can be assigned to remote devices. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2. In the Devices list, select your remote device.
Remote Controlling Cubase Remote Control Editor Remote Control Editor The Remote Control Editor allows you to define your own mapping of VST plug-in parameters to the controls of the supported hardware controllers. This is useful if you think that the automatic mapping of plug-in parameters to remote control devices is not too intuitive. ● To open the Remote Control Editor, right-click the plug-in panel of the plug-in that you want to remote-control, and select Remote Control Editor.
Remote Controlling Cubase Remote Control Editor Shows tools for setting up the layout. 7 Status Bar Shows information on an element when you position the mouse pointer over it in the editor window. RELATED LINKS Remote Control Editor Toolbar on page 703 Remote Control Editor Toolbar Shows tools for setting up the layout. Remove All Assignments Removes all parameter assignments.
Remote Controlling Cubase Remote Control Editor Control Type Settings for Knobs The following control types are available for knobs: Standard A standard knob with undefined LED style. Toggle Switch A knob with 2 states. LED Ring An LED ring around the knob. The setting increases clockwise. LED Ring (counter-clockwise) An LED ring around the knob. The setting increases counter-clockwise.
Remote Controlling Cubase Remote Control Editor Decreasing Stepwise Steps through the available settings in reverse order until the minimum is reached. Increasing Stepwise (cycle) Steps through the available settings, starting over with the minimum value when the maximum is reached. Decreasing Stepwise (cycle) Steps through the available settings in reverse order, starting over with the maximum value when the minimum is reached. Smart Switch Switches between 2 states every time you press the switch.
Remote Controlling Cubase Joysticks ● To step through the controls within the cells in Learn mode, press Shift and use the cursor keys. ● To step through the different layouts, use Tab and Shift - Tab . ● To copy the settings of one cell to another, select a cell, press Alt and drag it to another cell. ● To move a cell, drag it to an empty cell. ● To swap the contents of 2 cells, press Ctrl/Cmd and drag one cell to the other. NOTE Drag and drop also works between different pages.
Remote Controlling Cubase Track Quick Controls Track Quick Controls If you have an external remote control device, you can set it up to control up to 8 parameters of each audio track, MIDI track or instrument track, using the Track Quick Controls feature in Cubase. To show the Track Quick Controls for a specific track, select the track in the track list, and in the Inspector, open the Quick Controls section.
Remote Controlling Cubase VST Quick Controls Setting up Focus Quick Controls in the MIDI Remote Mapping Assistant on page 688 Activating Pick-up Mode for Hardware Controls (Legacy) Pick-up Mode allows you to change configured Quick Control parameters without accidentally modifying the previous values. This is useful if you want the control to pick up the parameter at the value to which it was last set. If you move a hardware control, the parameter only changes once the control reaches the previous value.
Remote Controlling Cubase VST Quick Controls NOTE The number of VST Quick Controls that are shown depends on the size of the VST Instruments window. 3 Set Remote-Control Focus for VST Quick Controls Allows you to activate the VST Quick Controls to remote-control the instrument. Setting up VST Quick Controls with Remote Controllers (Legacy) VST Quick Controls become powerful if you use them together with a remote controller.
Remote Controlling Cubase Generic Remote Page (Legacy) Generic Remote Page (Legacy) You can use a generic MIDI controller to remote-control almost any function in Cubase. After setting up the Generic Remote device, you can control the specified parameters from the MIDI remote device. ● To open the Generic Remote page, select Studio > Studio Setup, and from the Devices list, select Generic Remote.
Remote Controlling Cubase Generic Remote Page (Legacy) The following options are available in the upper table: Control Name Double-click this field to change the name for the control, and enter the one written on the console, for example. This name is automatically reflected in the lower table. MIDI Status Allows you to specify the type of MIDI message sent by the control. MIDI Channel Allows you to select the MIDI channel on which the controller is transmitted.
Remote Controlling Cubase Generic Remote Page (Legacy) Delete Deletes the selected control from the table. Learn Allows you to assign MIDI messages by learning. Cubase Control Assignment Section You can specify the Cubase control assignment section in the lower table of the Generic Remote setup page. Each row in the table is assigned to the controller in the corresponding row in the MIDI remote-control configuration table.
Remote Controlling Cubase Generic Remote Page (Legacy) Bank pop-up menu Allows you to switch banks. This is necessary if your MIDI control device has 16 volume faders, and you are using 32 MixConsole channels in Cubase, for example. Rename Allows you to rename the selected bank. Add Adds banks to the pop-up menu. Delete Deletes the selected bank from the pop-up menu.
Remote Controlling Cubase Generic Remote Page (Legacy) VST Mixer Allows you to control MixConsole functions. If you select one of the available channels or Selected in the Channel/Category column, and one of the options in the Value/ Action column, you can control that function of that specific channel or of the selected channel using your MIDI device. NOTE You can also control all VST Instruments that you added in the Project window, and that are listed in the Device column.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI realtime means that you can change or transform MIDI events on MIDI or instrument tracks before they are sent to the MIDI outputs. This allows you to change the way MIDI data is played back. The actual MIDI events on the track are not affected. Therefore, MIDI realtime changes are not reflected in any MIDI editor.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Track Parameters Track Input Transformer The Track Input Transformer allows you to filter out and change MIDI data coming to a MIDI track before it is recorded. Use the Track Input Transformer for the following purposes: ● Set up split keyboard combinations for recording left and right hands separately. ● Convert a controller, such as a foot pedal, into MIDI notes (for playing bass drum the right way).
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Track Parameters Allows you to select a preset. 3 Event Target Filters Allows you to specify the conditions such as type, attribute, value, or position that a specific element must meet to be found. You can combine any number of filter conditions using And and Or operators. 4 Event Transform Actions Allows you to set up a list of actions that specifies exactly what is done. This is not necessary for all functions.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers MIDI Modifiers MIDI modifiers allow you to modify MIDI events during playback. You can use them for the following purposes: ● To modify already existing MIDI events on MIDI or instrument tracks. ● To modify MIDI events that you play live. NOTE For live playing, select and record-enable the track, and activate MIDI Thru Active in the Preferences dialog (MIDI page).
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers Velocity Compression Allows you to add a multiplier to the velocity of all notes on the track. The value is set with a numerator and a denominator. This parameter also affects the velocity differences between the notes, thus compressing or expanding the velocity scale. Values smaller than 1/1 compress the velocity range. Values greater than 1/1 together with negative Velocity Shift values expand the velocity range.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers NOTE Depending on the track content, certain changes might not be immediately noticeable or might have no effect at all. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Deactivate the random function by opening the Random Target pop-up menu and selecting Off. Setting up Ranges You can filter out pitches or velocities that do not match a specified range, or force them to fit a specified range. PROCEDURE 1. Select a MIDI or instrument track. 2.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Modifiers pitch relationship between keys and notes. The retuning is a continuous process and takes the musical context into account. PROCEDURE 1. Select a MIDI or instrument track. 2. In the Inspector, open the MIDI Modifiers section. 3. Open the Hermode Tuning section and activate Apply Tuning. 4. Activate Use for Analysis to use the notes you play to calculate retuning.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Effects Reference (pure 3/5) Tunes pure thirds and fifths. Classic (pure 3/5 equalized) Tunes pure thirds and fifths. In conflict situations, a slight equalization is applied. This tuning type is suitable for all kinds of music. Pop Jazz (3/5/7) Tunes pure thirds and fifths, and natural sevenths. This tuning type should not be applied to polyphonic music. Try this with pop or jazz. Baroque (3/5 adaptive) Tunes pure thirds and fifths.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Effects MIDI Inserts MIDI insert effects are inserted in the signal chain of MIDI channels. If you add an insert effect to a MIDI track, the MIDI events on the track are sent to the effect and processed by it. The whole signal passes through the effect. ● To open the MIDI Inserts section, select a MIDI track, and in the Inspector, click MIDI Inserts. You can add up to four MIDI insert effects.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Effects NOTE The included MIDI effects are described in the separate document Plug-in Reference. Recording a MIDI Insert Effect You can record the output of a MIDI insert effect, that is, the events are created directly on a MIDI or instrument track. PROCEDURE 1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track 2. Click Instrument. 3. Open the Instrument pop-up menu and select a VST instrument. 4. Click Add Track. .
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects MIDI Effects You can add up to four MIDI send effects. Bypass Allows you to bypass all send effects for the track. Activate Send Allows you to activate/deactivate the selected effect. Pre/Post Activate this to send the MIDI signals to the send effects before the MIDI modifiers and insert effects. Open/Close Send Effect Editor Allows you to open/close the control panel for the selected effect.
MIDI Realtime Parameters and MIDI Effects Transpose and Velocity on the Info Line Presets Some of the MIDI effects come with a number of presets for instant use. 1 MIDI In/MIDI Out Activity Indicates if the plug-in receives or transmits MIDI data. 2 Save Preset/Remove Preset Allows you to save your settings as a preset or to remove saved presets. Saved presets are available in the Select Preset pop-up menu for all instances of that MIDI plug-in, and in all projects.
Using MIDI Devices The MIDI Device Manager allows you to work with MIDI devices, that is, representations of external MIDI hardware. You can install preset MIDI devices or define new ones. This is useful for global control and patch selection. Program Change Messages and Bank Select Messages To select a patch, that is, a sound in your MIDI device you must send a program change message to that device. Program Change Messages You can record program change messages, or enter them in a MIDI part.
Using MIDI Devices Patch Banks Patch Banks The Patch Banks list can have two or more main banks, depending on the selected device. This is due to the fact that different types of patches are handled differently in the instruments. Patches, for example, typically are regular programs that you play one at a time. Performances, however, may be combinations of programs, which could be split across the keyboard, layered, or used for multitimbral playback, and so on.
Using MIDI Devices MIDI Device Manager Installed Devices list Lists the connected MIDI devices and the imported device setups. Install Device Allows you to install a preset device. These presets are simple patch name scripts that do not include any device mapping of parameters and controls and no graphic panels. For more information about patch name scripts, see the separate document MIDI Devices. Remove Device Removes the selected device. Export Setup Exports the MIDI device setup as XML file.
Using MIDI Devices MIDI Device Manager Commands Allows you to edit the selected device. The patch structure for the selected device is shown to the left. MIDI Messages Shows which MIDI messages are sent out to select the patch that is highlighted in the list to the left. Commands for Patches In the MIDI Device Manager, patches can be structured in banks, folders, and presets. NOTE Activate Enable Edit to use the commands pop-up menu for the selected device.
Using MIDI Devices MIDI Device Manager Add Multiple Presets Allows you to set up a range of presets and add them to the selected bank or folder. NOTE You can remove banks, folders, and presets by selecting them and pressing Backspace . IMPORTANT For details on which MIDI events are used for selecting patches in the MIDI device, consult its documentation.
Using MIDI Devices MIDI Device Manager Installing Preset MIDI Devices You can install preset MIDI devices, that is, patch name scripts that do not include device mapping. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > More Options > MIDI Device Manager. 2. Click Install Device. 3. In the Add MIDI Device dialog, do one of the following: ● Select the script of the device in the list.
Using MIDI Devices MIDI Device Manager 4. Select an entry in the list. RESULT The corresponding MIDI message is sent to the device. Renaming Patches in Devices If you have replaced some of the factory presets with your own patches, you can modify the device so that the patch name list matches the actual device. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > More Options > MIDI Device Manager. 2. Select the device in the Installed Devices list. Make sure that the Patch Banks tab is selected. 3. Activate Enable Edit.
MIDI Functions MIDI functions allow you to permanently edit MIDI events or MIDI parts in the Project window or from within a MIDI editor. Which events are affected when you use a MIDI function depends on the function, the active window, and the current selection: ● In the Project window, the MIDI functions apply to all selected parts, affecting all events of the relevant types in them. ● In the MIDI editors, MIDI functions apply to all selected events.
MIDI Functions Merging MIDI Events into a New Part ● Select a root note and a scale type for the current scale in the Current Scale pop-up menus. ● Select a root note and a scale type for the new scale in the New Scale pop-up menus. NOTE If the new root note differs from the current root note, this leads to an entirely different key. Keep Notes in Range Limits the transposition of notes to the note values that you specify with the Highest Note and Lowest Note settings.
MIDI Functions Merging MIDI Events into a New Part RESULT A new part is created between the locators on the destination track, containing the processed MIDI events. RELATED LINKS MIDI Merge Options Dialog on page 736 Freezing MIDI Modifiers on page 722 MIDI Merge Options Dialog ● To open the MIDI Merge Options dialog, select a MIDI part, and select MIDI > Merge MIDI in Loop. The following options are available: Include Inserts Applies MIDI insert effects and MIDI modifiers.
MIDI Functions Dissolve Part Dialog Dissolve Part Dialog You can separate MIDI events in a part according to channels or pitches and dissolve the part to different tracks or lanes. ● To open the Dissolve Part dialog, select the MIDI part you want to dissolve and select MIDI > Dissolve Part. The following settings are available: Separate Channels Separates MIDI events according to their channel. This is useful for MIDI parts on MIDI channel Any that contain events on different MIDI channels.
MIDI Functions Repeating MIDI Events of Independent Track Loops MIDI Channel Setting Setting a track to MIDI channel Any causes each MIDI event to play back on its original MIDI channel, rather than a channel set for the whole track. There are two main situations when Any channel tracks are useful: ● When you record several MIDI channels at the same time. You may for example have a MIDI keyboard with several keyboard zones, where each zone sends MIDI on a separate channel.
MIDI Functions Extending MIDI Notes RELATED LINKS Setting up the Independent Track Loop on page 535 Extending MIDI Notes You can extend MIDI notes so that they reach the next notes. PREREQUISITE A MIDI part with some note events is open in the Key Editor. PROCEDURE 1. Select the note events that you want to extend to the next notes. 2. Select MIDI > Functions > Legato. RESULT The selected note events are extended to the start of the next notes.
MIDI Functions Fixing MIDI Note Velocities Fixing MIDI Note Velocities You can set the velocity of selected MIDI notes to the Note Insert Velocity value. PREREQUISITE A MIDI part with some note events is open in the Key Editor. PROCEDURE 1. On the Key Editor toolbar, open the Set up Insert Velocities pop-up menu and select a velocity value. 2. Select the note events that you want to fix. 3. Select MIDI > Functions > Fixed Velocity.
MIDI Functions Rendering Sustain Pedal Data to Note Lengths Rendering Sustain Pedal Data to Note Lengths You can render sustain pedal data to note lengths. This is useful if you recorded MIDI data with a MIDI keyboard and a sustain pedal, and you want to extend the actual MIDI notes for as long as you held the pedal, in order to edit the notes later. PREREQUISITE You recorded MIDI using a MIDI keyboard and a sustain pedal. The MIDI part is open in the Key Editor. PROCEDURE 1. Select the note events. 2.
MIDI Functions Editing Velocity RELATED LINKS Velocity Dialog on page 742 Velocity Dialog ● To open the Velocity dialog, select a MIDI part, and select MIDI > Functions > Velocity. Add/Subtract Adds the specified value to the velocity value. You can enter positive or negative values. Compress/Expand Compresses or expands the dynamic range of MIDI notes by the specified value. You can enter values from 0 to 300 %).
MIDI Functions Deleting Double Notes Deleting Double Notes You can delete double notes of the same pitch on the exact same position from selected MIDI parts. Double notes can occur when recording in cycle mode, after quantizing, for example. PROCEDURE 1. Select the MIDI part that contains the double notes. 2. Select MIDI > Functions > Delete Doubles. RESULT The double notes are automatically deleted. Deleting Controller Data You can delete controller data from selected MIDI parts. PROCEDURE 1.
MIDI Functions Thinning Out Controller Data RESULT The notes are shortened as required, so that they end before the next note starts. Thinning Out Controller Data You can thin out controller data in selected MIDI parts. Use this to ease the load on your external MIDI devices if you have recorded very dense controller curves. PROCEDURE 1. Select the MIDI parts that contain the controllers that you want to thin out. 2. Select MIDI > Functions > Thin Out Data. RESULT The controller data is thinned out.
MIDI Functions Reversing the Playback Order of MIDI Events Reversing the Playback Order of MIDI Events You can invert the order of the selected events or of all events in selected part rhythmically. This causes the MIDI to play backwards. However, this is different from reversing an audio recording. The individual MIDI notes still play as usual, but the playback order changes. PROCEDURE 1. Select the MIDI events or the MIDI part. 2. Select MIDI > Functions > Reverse.
MIDI Editors There are several ways to edit MIDI in Cubase. You can use the tools and functions in the Project window for large-scale editing or the functions on the MIDI menu to process MIDI parts in various ways. To manually edit your MIDI data on a graphical interface, you can use the MIDI editors. ● The Key Editor presents notes graphically in a piano roll-style grid. The Key Editor also allows for detailed editing of non-note events such as MIDI controllers.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions ● The Zoom tool. ● The Zoom submenu in the Edit menu. When you use the Zoom tool for zooming, you can determine if you want to zoom horizontal only or horizontal and vertical at a time. ● To activate/deactivate the corresponding option, activate/deactivate Zoom Tool Standard Mode: Horizontal Zooming Only in the Preferences dialog (Editing—Tools page).
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions Voice The note events get different colors depending on their voice (soprano, alto, tenor, etc.). Scale/Chords The note events get different colors depending on whether they match the current chord, scale, or both. For all of the options except Part and Sound Slot, the pop-up menu also contains a Setup option. This option opens a dialog in which you can specify the colors that are associated with velocities, pitches, or channels.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions Color Picker on page 90 Pitch Colors Setup You can set up Cubase to color events depending on their pitch. The color scheme is defined in the Pitch Colors Setup dialog. ● To open the event Pitch Colors Setup dialog, open the Event Colors pop-up menu in the Key Editor toolbar, activate Scale/Chords and then select Setup. The following options are available: Color fields Click a field to open the Color Picker that allows you to specify a new color.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions The following options are available: Color fields Click a field to open the Color Picker that allows you to specify a new color. Description Shows further information about the usage of the color. OK Applies your changes and closes the dialog. RELATED LINKS Event Colors Menu on page 747 Color Picker on page 90 Selecting Note Events The selected MIDI editor determines which of the following methods apply.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions NOTE If you select the notes in the event display, the note event is shown in black and only its outline is shown in color. On the keyboard display, the keys that correspond to the note pitches of the selected notes are also shown in color. RELATED LINKS Event Colors Menu on page 747 Select Submenu for Note Events on page 751 Editing on page 1067 Select Submenu for Note Events The Select submenu offers you several options to select note events.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions RELATED LINKS Deleting Note Events on page 752 Muting Note Events You can mute individual note events in a MIDI editor. Muting individual notes allows you to exclude note events from playback. Do one of the following: ● Click on a note event with the Mute tool. ● Drag a rectangle with the Mute tool, enclosing all note events that you want to mute. ● Select the note events and select Edit > Mute.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions you click the field to the right of the graphical length display the scale for the display changes. You can set it to 1/4 bar, one bar, two bars or four bars. Minimum Velocity Allows you to set a minimum note velocity. Notes with a lower velocity than the set value are deleted. Remove when under This option is only available if Minimum Velocity and Minimum Length are both activated.
MIDI Editors Common MIDI Editor Functions You can also press Alt/Opt and drag the right edge of the note events to the right to create copies of the note events. Finding Exact Positions with Snap The Snap function restricts horizontal movement and positioning to certain positions. This helps you find exact positions in the note display when editing note events in a MIDI editor. Affected operations include moving, duplicating, drawing, sizing, etc. ● To activate/deactivate snap, click Snap.
MIDI Editors Controller Display ● To restrict editing operations to the active part, activate Edit Active Part in the Part Editing Mode pop-up menu. ● To change the size of the part, drag the part borders. The part borders display the name of the active part. NOTE If the part that you open for editing is a shared copy, any editing that you perform affects all shared copies of this part. In the Project window, shared copies are indicated by an equal sign in the top right corner of the part.
MIDI Editors Controller Display ● On the Key Editor or the Drum Editor toolbar, click Set up Window Layout, and activate Controller Lanes. The following options are available: 1 Note display Contains a grid in which MIDI notes are displayed as boxes. 2 Controller Selection and Functions menu Allows you to select which controller type is displayed, and contains editing functions for controller lanes and events.
MIDI Editors Controller Display Allows you to add controller lanes so that you can view and edit different controllers at the same time. Each controller lane can show one of the following properties or event types: 7 ● Velocity ● Pitchbend ● Aftertouch ● Poly Pressure ● Program Change ● SysEx (System Exclusive) events ● Continuous Controllers Controller Lane Setup Contains setup functions for controller lanes, and allows you to add and organize presets.
MIDI Editors Controller Display Show/Hide Controller Lanes Shows/Hides the last displayed controller lanes. Controller Lane Context Menu ● To open the controller lane context menu, right-click in the left area of the controller display. The following options are available: Create Controller Lane Creates a controller lane. Remove This Lane Removes the current controller lane. Select All Events on Lane Selects all controller events on the current lane. Cut Cuts the selected events.
MIDI Editors Controller Display The following options are available: Controller event types Lists the event types that you can display on the controller lanes. If automation data already exists for a controller, this is indicated by a rhombus that is displayed to the left of the controller name. Select All Events on Lane Selects all controller events on the current lane. Remove This Lane Hides the current controller lane from view.
MIDI Editors Controller Display The following options are available: Controller event types Lists the event types that you can display on the controller lanes. If automation data already exists for a controller, this is indicated by a rhombus that is displayed to the left of the controller name. Select an event type to add the corresponding controller lane to the controller display. Show Used Controllers Opens all controller lanes that have controller events.
MIDI Editors Controller Display Setting up Available Continuous Controllers on page 761 Displaying a Different Controller Event Type You can select which event type to display on a controller lane. Each controller lane shows one event type at a time. PROCEDURE ● Open the Controller Selection and Functions pop-up menu and select a different event type.
MIDI Editors Controller Display RESULT The corresponding continuous controllers are now available for selection. NOTE The MIDI Controller Setup dialog is available in different areas of the program. The settings are global, that is, the setup you choose here affects all areas of the program where MIDI controllers can be selected.
MIDI Editors Controller Display Saving Controller Lane Presets You can save a controller lane setup as a controller lane preset. This way, you can have a preset with one velocity lane and another preset with a combination of several controller lanes, such as velocity, pitchbend, or modulation. PREREQUISITE You have added at least one controller lane and selected a controller event type for display. PROCEDURE 1. Click Controller Lane Setup. 2. Select Add Preset. 3.
MIDI Editors Controller Display NOTE If there is more than one note at the same position, their velocity bars overlap. To edit the velocity of only one of these notes, select the note in the note display. If no note is selected, all velocity events get the same velocity value. RESULT The velocity values change according to your edits.
MIDI Editors Controller Display RELATED LINKS Adding Controller Lanes on page 760 Line Tool Modes on page 775 Controller Selection and Functions Menu on page 758 Pitchbend Controller Lanes Pitchbend controller lanes allow you to add and edit pitchbend controller events. ● To add a pitchbend controller lane, open the Controller Selection and Functions menu, and select Pitchbend. 1 Curve Type field Shows the controller curve type. You can set this to Step or to Ramp/Curve.
MIDI Editors Controller Display Displays the pitchbend value at the project cursor position. What exactly is shown depends on the Show Semitones Grid setting in the Grid Settings pane: 3 ● If Show Semitones Grid is activated, this value shows the semitones value at the project cursor position. The range goes from +96 semitones to -96 semitones. The value is shown in semitones and cents. ● If Show Semitones Grid is deactivated, this value shows the pitchbend MIDI value at the project cursor position.
MIDI Editors Controller Display Show Semitones Grid The semitones grid shows the semitone values that the events snap to. The amount of grid lines and their width depends on the settings for Pitchbend Range: Down and Pitchbend Range: Up. NOTE The grid is a visual help that allows you to find exact semitone positions for pitchbends easier. Changing the grid does not change the values of pitchbend events. Pitchbend Range: Up Allows you to specify a value between 1 and 96 semitones for the upper grid.
MIDI Editors Controller Display 3. Optional: Activate Snap Pitchbend Events to snap the pitchbend controller events to the set grid. 4. Select the Draw tool and click in the controller display to enter as many pitchbend events as you need. RESULT The pitchbend controller events are added.
MIDI Editors Controller Display A Poly Pressure controller lane is added. It shows a note number value field to the left of the controller display. 3. Do one of the following: ● Select a note event in the note display to set the note number for the corresponding pitch. This only works for the topmost of several poly pressure controller lanes.
MIDI Editors Controller Display 2. Select the Draw tool or the Line tool. 3. Do one of the following: ● To add a single event, click in the controller display. ● To add a multiple events, click and drag in the controller display. ● To add a Modulation (CC 1) event, copy note events from the Key Editor note display and paste them on a controller lane in the controller display.
MIDI Editors Controller Display 2. In the Key Editor, open the Create Controller Lane menu, and select Show Used Controllers. The controller lanes for all controller events that you have recorded are shown in the controller display. 3. Locate the controller lane of the continuous controller that you want to edit, and select a controller event. The info line of the Key Editor displays information about the selected controller event, such as Type, Start position, Value, Channel, and Curve Type. 4.
MIDI Editors Controller Display MIDI controller data from the automation track is also displayed on the controller lane. However, you cannot edit this data on the controller lane. If conflicting controller data exists, you must specify what should happen on playback by selecting an Automation Merge Mode in the MIDI Controller Automation Setup dialog. The resulting curve depends on the automation merge mode.
MIDI Editors Controller Display MIDI Part Data vs. Track Automation You can enter or record MIDI controller data as automation data on an automation track or as part data in the MIDI part. ● If Read Automation for a track is enabled, controller data is written as automation data on an automation track in the Project window. ● If Read Automation is disabled, the controller data is written in the MIDI part and can be viewed and edited for example in the Key Editor.
MIDI Editors Controller Display Record Destination on Conflict (global) Allows you to determine which destination is used if MIDI controller data is received by Cubase and both the Record and the Write Automation buttons are enabled. Select MIDI Part to record MIDI part automation. Select Automation Track to record the controller data on an automation track in the Project window. Automation Merge Mode (global) Allows you to specify the global merge mode for automation.
MIDI Editors Controller Display Automation Merge Modes Automation Merge Modes in the MIDI Controller Automation Setup dialog are only available for controllers that can be recorded both for a part and a track. ● To open the MIDI Controller Automation Setup dialog, select MIDI > CC Automation Setup. Use Global Settings When this is selected, the automation track uses the global automation Merge Mode that is specified in the MIDI Controller Automation Setup dialog.
MIDI Editors Controller Display Parabola In this mode you can draw events on a parabola curve. This gives more natural curves and fades. You can use modifier keys to determine the shape of the parabola curve. ● To reverse the parabola curve, press Ctrl/Cmd . ● To change the position of the whole curve, press Alt/Opt . ● To increase or decrease the exponent, press Shift . NOTE If Snap is activated, the Length Quantize value determines the density of created controller curves.
MIDI Editors Controller Display Controller Event Editor The controller event editor allows you to perform additional scaling operations for selection ranges on existing controller curves. ● To open the controller event editor, activate the Object Selection tool and drag a selection rectangle on the controller lane.
MIDI Editors Key Editor If you Alt/Opt -click in the middle right border of the editor, you can scale the curve relative to its center. This allows you to raise or lower the event values horizontally around the center of the editor. Auto Select Controllers Auto Select Controllers automatically selects controller data of the selected MIDI notes. This is useful as selected controllers for notes will be moved when you move the corresponding notes.
MIDI Editors Key Editor To open a MIDI part in the Key Editor, do one of the following: ● Double-click a MIDI part in the Project window. ● Select a MIDI part in the Project window and press Return or Ctrl/Cmd - E . ● Select a MIDI part in the Project window and select MIDI > Open Key Editor. ● In the Key Commands dialog in the Editors category, assign a key command for Open Key Editor. Select a MIDI part in the Project window and use the key command.
MIDI Editors Key Editor 7 Note display Contains a grid in which MIDI notes are displayed as boxes. 8 Controller display The area below the note display consists of one or multiple controller lanes. NOTE You can activate/deactivate the status line, the info line, and the controller lanes by clicking Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activating/deactivating the corresponding options.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Pitch Visibility Pitch Visibility On/Off Deactivate this to show all pitches in the note display. Activate this to reduce the pitches in the note display according to the selected pitch visibility option. Select Pitch Visibility Options Allows you to determine which pitches are displayed in the note display: ● Show Pitches with Events shows only the pitches for which events are available in the note display.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Erase Deletes events. Trim Trims events. Split Splits events. Glue Glues together events of the same pitch. Mute Mutes events. Zoom Zooms in. Hold Alt/Opt and click to zoom out. Line Creates a series of contiguous events. Auto Select Controllers Auto Select Controllers Automatically selects controller data of the selected MIDI notes. Independent Track Loop Independent Track Loop Activates/Deactivates the independent track loop.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Indicate Transpositions Indicate Transpositions Allows you to display the transposed pitches of MIDI notes. Insert Velocity Note Insert Velocity Allows you to specify a velocity value for new notes. Nudge Nudge Settings Allow you to set up a snap grid for the nudge commands. ● By default, the snap grid for nudge operations is set to Link to Grid, and the step width corresponds to the snap grid.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Transpose Palette Move Up Transposes the selected event up by a half note. Move Down Transposes the selected event down by a half note. Move Up More Transposes the selected event up by an octave. Move Down More Transposes the selected event down by an octave. Snap Snap On/Off Activates/Deactivates the Snap function. Snap Type Allows you to select one of the following snap types: ● Grid snaps events to the grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Quantize Apply Quantize Applies the quantize settings. Quantize Presets Allows you to select a quantize or a groove preset. Soft Quantize On/Off Activates/Deactivates soft quantize. Open Quantize Panel Opens the Quantize Panel. Length Quantize Length Quantize Allows you to set a value for quantizing event lengths. Multiple Part Controls Show Part Borders Shows/Hides part borders for the active MIDI part within the left and right locators.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Move Insert Mode Moves all note events to the right of the step input position to the right to make room for the inserted event when you insert notes. NOTE This only works if Step Input is activated. Record Pitch Includes the pitch when you insert notes. Record NoteOn Velocity Includes the NoteOn velocity when you insert notes. Record NoteOff Velocity Includes the NoteOff velocity when you insert notes. Event Colors Event Colors Allows you to select event colors.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Set up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible. RELATED LINKS Zooming in MIDI Editors on page 746 Status Line The status line shows information about the mouse time position, the mouse value, and the current chord. ● To show the status line, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate Status Line.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Key Editor Inspector In a MIDI editor, the Inspector is located left of the note display. The Key Editor Inspector contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data. Note Expression Contains functions and settings related to Note Expression. Chord Editing Allows you to enter chords instead of single notes. Quantize Allows you to access the main quantize parameters. These are identical with the functions on the Quantize panel.
MIDI Editors Key Editor RELATED LINKS Note Expression Inspector Section on page 866 Quantize Panel on page 289 Transpose Functions on page 318 Opening the Editor Inspector on page 55 Scale Assistant in the Key Editor on page 789 Scale Assistant in the Key Editor The Scale Assistant section of the Key Editor Inspector helps you to match note events to a musical scale. Scale Assistant Status Indicator Shows the on/off status of the Scale Assistant.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Snap Pitch Editing Snaps the pitches or the notes to the selected scale when you add, edit, or move them. NOTE Snap Pitch Editing does not apply when you change pitches using the Pitch value field on the info line or if you record notes via MIDI input. Snap Live Input Automatically corrects the pitches of incoming notes according to the selected scale. NOTE This only works if Record in Editor is activated.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Note Display The note display is the main zone in the Key Editor. It contains a grid in which note events are shown as boxes. The width of a box corresponds to the note length. The vertical position of a box corresponds to the note number (pitch), with higher note events higher up in the grid. Depending on the zoom factor, the note events show the note names.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Key Editor Piano Keyboard Display The piano keyboard display is shown to the left of the note display in the Key Editor. The piano keyboard gives you a visual orientation over the pitch positions in the note display, helping you to find specific note pitches. You can click a key to listen to the pitch and the sound of the connected instrument.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Key Editor on page 778 Pitch Notation on page 1074 Pitch Visibility Options on page 794 Event Colors Menu on page 747 Showing Specific Pitches in the Key Editor You can define which pitches are visible in the event display and the piano keyboard display of the Key Editor. By hiding pitches that you do not need, you can save screen space. This is useful if you add note events that span more than one octave and you want to display all of them, for example. PROCEDURE 1.
MIDI Editors Key Editor RELATED LINKS Pitch Visibility Options on page 794 Key Editor Toolbar on page 780 Note Display on page 791 Key Editor Piano Keyboard Display on page 792 Pitch Visibility Options The pitch visibility options allow you to show or hide specific pitches from the Key Editor event display and the piano keyboard display. Pitch visibility options are saved with the program. If a setting leads to a situation where no pitches would be shown, all pitches are shown instead.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Pitch Editing with Reduced Pitch Visibility If you edit pitches and you reduced the pitch visibility using one of the Select Pitch Visibility Options, you must consider some general program behavior. As a general rule, you can only move note events to pitch positions that are visible. This applies to moving note events upwards/downwards with the mouse, using the corresponding key command, or using the cursor keys.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations NOTE To view the color scheme of the selected color mode, open the Event Colors pop-up menu and select Setup. 6. Open the Scale Suggestions pop-up menu, and select one of the options. 7. Optional: On the Key Editor toolbar, open the Select Pitch Visibility Options pop-up menu, and select Show Pitches from Scale Assistant. This filters the note display and the piano keyboard display so that they show only the pitches that match the selected musical scale.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations This changes the colors of the note events in the event display according to whether or not the pitches match the selected musical scale. NOTE To view the color scheme of the selected color mode, open the Event Colors pop-up menu and select Setup. 6. Optional: On the Key Editor toolbar, open the Select Pitch Visibility Options pop-up menu, and select Show Pitches from Scale Assistant.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations RESULT All note pitches that do not match the selected scale are quantized to the nearest pitches in the scale.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations 3. Activate Snap Pitch Editing. 4. Do one of the following: ● Insert a note event with the Draw tool, the Object Selection tool, or with the Line tool. ● Drag a note event upwards or downwards with the mouse. ● Select a note event and use the Up Arrow / Down Arrow keys. RESULT The notes snap to pitches of the selected scale. You cannot place notes on pitches outside of the scale.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations NOTE If Double-Click Opens Note Expression Editor is activated on the Key Editor toolbar, double-clicking a note event opens the note expression editor instead. RESULT The note event is deleted. RELATED LINKS Key Editor Toolbar on page 780 Note Expression Event Editor on page 874 Drawing Note Events with the Draw Tool The Draw tool allows you to insert single note events in the note display.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations NOTE You can activate/deactivate Snap temporarily by holding down Ctrl/Cmd . Drawing Note Events with the Line Tool In the note display, the Line tool allows you to draw a series of contiguous note events along different line shapes. ● To create contiguous note events, click and drag in the note display. ● To restrict movement to horizontal, press Ctrl/Cmd and drag. The notes have the same pitch.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations ● To move note events via the buttons in the Nudge section on the toolbar, select the note events and click a button. ● To move note events to the project cursor position, select the note events and select Edit > Move > Event Starts to Cursor. ● To move a note event via the info line, select a note event and edit the Position or Pitch on the info line.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Using the Trim Tool The Trim tool allows you to change the length of note events by cutting off the end or the beginning of notes. Using the Trim tool means moving the note-on or the note-off event for one or several notes to a position defined with the mouse. PROCEDURE 1. Select Trim on the toolbar. The mouse pointer changes to a knife symbol. 2. To edit a single note, click it. The range between the mouse pointer and the end of the note is removed.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations 2. In the note display, select the notes that you want to edit. If the chord is recognized, the root note, chord type, and tensions are indicated in the Chord Type field. This also works with arpeggiated notes. 3. In the Chord Editing section, activate one of the 3-Note Chords/Triads buttons or 4-Note Chords buttons. The selected notes are transposed so that they fit the selected chord type. 4. Use the Up Arrow / Down Arrow keys to change the pitch of the chord.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Chord Editing Section The Chord Editing section in the Key Editor Inspector allows you to insert and edit chords, and change voicings. Chord type of selected notes Shows the chord type of the selected chords. Add to Chord Track Adds the chord indicated in the Chord type of selected notes field to the chord track. The chord event is inserted at the position on the chord track that corresponds to the position of the MIDI notes.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations 4-Note Chords Allows you to insert 4-note chords to the note display. You can also click one of the 4-Note Chords buttons to transpose the selected notes so that they fit to the selected chord type. Inversions - Move Up Inverts the lowest note of a chord. The corresponding notes are transposed by as many octaves as needed. Inversions - Move Down Inverts the highest note of a chord. The corresponding notes are transposed by as many octaves as needed.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations Applying Chord Events to Note Events You can apply chord events from the chord track to notes in the MIDI editor. PREREQUISITE Create a chord track and add chord events. PROCEDURE 1. Open the MIDI editor. 2. In the Key Editor Inspector, open the Chord Editing section. 3. Select Match with Chord Track. RESULT The first chord event of the chord track is applied to the selected notes. Only the basic chord type is applied. Tensions are not taken into account.
MIDI Editors Key Editor Operations AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK To try another setting, select the note again and play a note on your MIDI instrument. Step Input Step input, or step recording, allows you to enter note events or chords one at a time without worrying about the exact timing. This is useful, for example, when you know the part that you want to record but are not able to play it exactly as you want it. PROCEDURE 1. On the toolbar, activate Step Input. 2.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Score Editor The basic Score Editor shows MIDI notes as a musical score. This offers basic score editing and printing options. You can open the Score Editor in a separate window or in the lower zone of the Project window. Opening the Score Editor in the lower zone of the Project window is useful if you want to access the Score Editor functions from within a fixed zone of the Project window.
MIDI Editors Score Editor ● To open one or several parts in the Score Editor, select one or several tracks or any number of parts, and select MIDI > Open Score Editor. If you have selected parts on several tracks, you get one staff for each track. The staves are tied together by barlines and placed in the order of the tracks in the Project window. ● To rearrange the staves, close the editor and in the Project window, rearrange the tracks. Then reopen the Score Editor.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Automatically plays back events when you move or transpose them, or when you create them by drawing. Tool Buttons Object Selection Selects events and parts. Insert Note Inserts notes. Erase Deletes events. Split Splits events. Glue Glues together events of the same pitch. Insert Text Inserts text. Insert Velocity Note Insert Velocity Allows you to specify a velocity value for new notes.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Soft Quantize On/Off Activates/Deactivates soft quantize. Open Quantize Panel Opens the Quantize Panel. Length Quantize Length Quantize Allows you to set a value for quantizing event lengths. Step/MIDI Input Computer Keyboard Input Activates/Deactivates computer keyboard input. Step Input Activates/Deactivates MIDI step input. MIDI Input Activates/Deactivates MIDI input and note expression MIDI input.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Window Zone Controls Open in Separate Window This button is available in the Editor tab in the lower zone. It opens the editor in a separate window. Open in Lower Zone This button is available in the editor window. It opens the Editor tab in the lower zone of the Project window. Show/Hide Left Zone Shows/Hides the left zone. Set up Window Layout Allows you to set up the window layout. Set up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible.
MIDI Editors Score Editor The on/off status of the info line in the Score Editor window and in the Editor tab in the lower zone of the Project window are independent of each other. RELATED LINKS Changing the Ruler Display Format on page 746 Score Editor Extended Toolbar The extended toolbar contains note value buttons and enharmonic shift buttons. ● To show the extended toolbar, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate Tools. Note Value Buttons Allows you to select a note value for input.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations All MIDI input is directed to one of the tracks, which is called the active staff. The active staff is indicated by a rectangle to the left of the clef symbol. ● To change the active staff, click on the staff that you want to activate. Score Editor Operations This section describes the principal editing operations within the Score Editor.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations Staff Mode The Staff Mode determines how the staff is shown. ● In Single mode, all notes in the part are shown in the same staff. ● In Split mode, the part is split on the screen into a bass and treble clef, as in a piano score. The Split Point value determines where you want the split to occur. Notes above and including the split note appear on the upper staff, and notes below the split note appear on the lower staff.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations Clef/Key In this section, you can set the correct clef and key. Clef/Key display Allows you to select the clef or key via the scrollbar. Lower Staff Sets the clef and key to the lower staff. Auto Clef If this option is activated, Cubase attempts to guess the correct clef, judging from the pitch of the music. Display Transpose In this section, you can specify a separate display transpose setting for each staff (track).
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations Shuffle If this option is activated and you have played a shuffle beat, the beat is displayed as straight notes, not as triplets. This is very common in jazz notation. Quantize Value When you move the mouse pointer over the score, the Mouse Time Position field on the status line tracks your movement and shows the current position in bars, beats, 16th notes, and ticks. The quantize value controls the positioning on screen.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations RESULT The note appears in the score. The notes get the insert velocity value that is set in the Note Insert Velocity field on the toolbar. NOTE If the notes that you enter appear to have the wrong note value, you may have to adjust the Display Quantize settings. For example, if you entered a 1/32 note that is displayed as a 1/16 note. RELATED LINKS Setting Velocity Values on page 754 Display Quantize on page 816 Moving and Transposing Notes PROCEDURE 1.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations RELATED LINKS Improving the Score Display on page 815 Editing Note Events on the Info Line on page 753 Splitting and Gluing Note Events ● To split 2 notes that are strung together by a tie, click on the tied note head with the Split tool. ● The note is split into 2, with the respective length of the main and the tied note. ● To glue a note to the next note with the same pitch, click on a note with the Glue tool.
MIDI Editors Score Editor Operations This opens the text for editing. Use the Up Arrow , Down Arrow , Left Arrow , and Right Arrow keys to move the cursor, delete characters with the Delete or Backspace keys, press Return when you are finished. ● To delete text blocks, select them with the Object Selection tool and press Backspace or Delete . ● To move text blocks, drag them to a new position. ● To duplicate text blocks, press Alt/Opt and drag them to a new position.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Font options Determine whether the text is formatted bold, italic, and/or underlined. Printing the Score PROCEDURE 1. Open the parts that you want to print in the Score Editor. 2. Select File > Page Setup and make sure that all your printer settings are correct. IMPORTANT If you change your setting for paper size, scale, and margins now, the score may change its look. 3. Click OK. 4. Select File > Print. 5. In the Print dialog, make your changes. 6. Click Print.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor The Drum Editor is divided into several sections: 1 Toolbar Contains tools and settings. 2 Status line Informs about the mouse time position and the mouse value. 3 Info line Displays information about the selected event. 4 Drum Editor Inspector Contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data. 5 Drum sound list Lists all drum sounds. 6 Ruler Displays the time line. 7 Note display Contains a grid in which notes are displayed.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Drum Editor Toolbar The toolbar contains tools and various settings for the Drum Editor. ● To show or hide the toolbar elements, right-click the toolbar and activate or deactivate the elements. Retrospective Record Insert MIDI Retrospective Recording in Editor Allows you to recover MIDI notes that you played in stop mode or during playback. Left Divider Left Divider Allows you to use the left divider. Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Select Auto-Scroll Settings Allows you to activate Page Scroll or Stationary Cursor and to activate Suspend Auto-Scroll When Editing. Acoustic Feedback Acoustic Feedback Automatically plays back events when you move or transpose them, or when you create them by drawing. Tool Buttons Object Selection Selects events and parts. Drumstick Draws drum events. Erase Deletes events. Mute Mutes events. Zoom Zooms in. Hold Alt/Opt and click to zoom out.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Nudge Nudge Settings Allow you to set up a snap grid for the nudge commands. ● By default, the snap grid for nudge operations is set to Link to Grid, and the step width corresponds to the snap grid. ● If you activate Link to Primary Time Format, the snap grid for nudge operations follows the primary time format, and you can set up the step width in the Nudge Settings pop-up menu.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Move Up More Transposes the selected event up by an octave. Move Down More Transposes the selected event down by an octave. Insert Velocity Note Insert Velocity Allows you to specify a velocity value for new notes. Notes Length Insert Length Allows you to determine a length for newly created notes. Show Note Length On/Off Shows drum notes as boxes that display the note length. Snap Snap On/Off Activates/Deactivates the Snap function.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor ● Use Quantize activates a grid where events snap to the value that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu. ● Adapt to Zoom activates a grid where events snap to the zoom level. ● Use Snap from Drum Map activates a grid where events snap to the Snap value that is selected in the drum map. Quantize Apply Quantize Applies the quantize settings. Quantize Presets Allows you to select a quantize or a groove preset. Soft Quantize On/Off Activates/Deactivates soft quantize.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Step/MIDI Input Step Input Activates/Deactivates MIDI step input. MIDI Input/Note Expression MIDI Input Activates/Deactivates MIDI input and note expression MIDI input. Move Insert Mode Moves all note events to the right of the step input position to the right to make room for the inserted event when you insert notes. NOTE This only works if Step Input is activated. Record Pitch Includes the pitch when you insert notes.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Show/Hide Left Zone Shows/Hides the left zone. Show/Hide Controller Lanes Shows/Hides the controller lanes. Set up Window Layout Allows you to set up the window layout. Set up Toolbar Opens a pop-up menu where you can set up which toolbar elements are visible. RELATED LINKS Zooming in MIDI Editors on page 746 Status Line The status line is displayed below the toolbar. It displays important mouse information.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Length and position values are displayed in the selected ruler display format. The on/off status of the info line in the Drum Editor window and in the Editor tab in the lower zone of the Project window are independent of each other. RELATED LINKS Editing Note Events on the Info Line on page 753 Drum Editor Inspector The Drum Editor Inspector is located to the left of the note display. It contains tools and functions for working with MIDI data.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Transpose Functions on page 318 Opening the Editor Inspector on page 55 Note Display The note display of the Drum Editor contains a grid in which note events are shown. The notes are displayed as diamond symbols. If you activate Show Note Length On/Off on the toolbar, notes are displayed as boxes and show the note length. The vertical position of the notes corresponds to the drum sound list to the left, while the horizontal position corresponds to the note’s position in time.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor NOTE The number of columns in the list depends on whether a drum map is selected for the track or not. Pitch Note number of the drum sound. Instrument Name of the drum sound. Snap This is used when entering and editing notes. Mute Allows you to mute drum sounds. I-Note Input note for the drum sound. When you play this note, it is mapped to the corresponding drum sound and automatically transposed according to the Pitch setting for the sound.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Operations Drum Map and Names Menus Below the drum sound list are pop-up menus that are used for selecting a drum map for the edited track or, if no drum map is selected, a list of drum sound names. RELATED LINKS Drum Maps on page 837 Drum Editor Operations This section describes the general editing operations within the Drum Editor. Inserting Drum Note Events You can insert note events with the Object Selection tool or the Drumstick tool.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Operations NOTE If you want to snap positions according to the Quantize Presets setting on the toolbar, activate Use Quantize. PROCEDURE ● Perform one of the following actions: ● On the toolbar, select the Object Selection tool, double-click in the event display and drag to the right. ● On the toolbar, select the Drumstick tool, click in the event display and drag to the right. RESULT The note events are inserted.
MIDI Editors Drum Editor Operations 3. Release the mouse button. RESULT The note length is changed. Snap is taken into account. Deleting Drum Note Events PROCEDURE ● Perform one of the following actions: ● Select the Erase tool and click the event. ● Select the Object Selection tool and double-click the event. ● Select the Drumstick tool and click the event. RESULT The note event is deleted.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps ● To mute all other drum sounds, click Solo Instrument (Requires Drum Map) on the toolbar. RELATED LINKS Selecting a Drum Map for a Track on page 840 Drum Maps A drum kit in a MIDI instrument is most often a set of different drum sounds with each sound placed on a separate key. For example, the different sounds are assigned to different MIDI note numbers. One key plays a bass drum sound, another a snare, and so on. Different MIDI instruments often use different key assignments.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps The list on the left shows the loaded drum maps. The sounds and settings of the selected drum map are displayed on the right. NOTE The settings for the drum sounds are the same as in the Drum Editor. Output Allows you to select the output for the drum map sounds. Drum Sound list Lists all drum sounds and their settings. To audition a drum sound, click the leftmost column.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps RELATED LINKS Drum Map Settings on page 839 Channel and Output Settings on page 840 Drum Map Settings A drum map consists of settings for 128 drum sounds, one for each MIDI note number. ● To get an overview of the drum map settings, open the Drum Editor and use the Map pop-up menu below the drum sound list to select the GM Map drum map. The GM map is set up according to the General MIDI standard.
MIDI Editors Drum Maps Channel and Output Settings You can set separate MIDI channels and/or MIDI outputs for each sound in a drum map. When a drum map is selected for a track, the MIDI channel settings in the drum map override the MIDI channel setting for the track. You can select different channels and/or outputs for different sounds. This allows you to construct drum kits with sounds from several different MIDI devices, etc.
MIDI Editors List Editor I-Notes (Input Notes) When you play a note on your MIDI instrument, the program looks for this note number among the I-notes in the drum map. If you play the note A1, the program finds that this is the I-note of the bass drum sound. This is where the first transformation happens: the note gets a new note number according to the pitch setting for the drum sound. In our case, the note is transformed to a C1 note, because that is the pitch of the bass drum sound.
MIDI Editors List Editor The List Editor is divided into several sections: 1 Toolbar 2 Status line 3 Filters bar 4 Event list 5 Ruler 6 Event display 7 Value display NOTE The filters, the status line, and the value display can be activated/deactivated by clicking Set up Window Layout on the toolbar and activating/deactivating the corresponding options. List Editor Toolbar The toolbar contains tools and various settings for the List Editor.
MIDI Editors List Editor Retrospective Record Insert MIDI Retrospective Recording in Editor Allows you to recover MIDI notes that you played in stop mode or during playback. Auto-Scroll Auto-Scroll Keeps the project cursor visible during playback. Select Auto-Scroll Settings Allows you to activate Page Scroll or Stationary Cursor and to activate Suspend Auto-Scroll When Editing.
MIDI Editors List Editor Activates/Deactivates the independent track loop. Insert Type Insert Event Type Allows you to determine an event type for newly created events. Insert Velocity Note Insert Velocity Allows you to specify a velocity value for new notes. Nudge Nudge Settings Allow you to set up a snap grid for the nudge commands. ● By default, the snap grid for nudge operations is set to Link to Grid, and the step width corresponds to the snap grid.
MIDI Editors List Editor Nudge End Right Increases the length of the selected event by moving its end to the right. Snap Snap On/Off Activates/Deactivates the Snap function. Snap Type Allows you to select one of the following snap types: ● Grid snaps events to the grid that is selected in the Quantize Presets pop-up menu. ● Grid Relative keeps the relative positions when snapping events to the grid. ● Events snaps events to the start or end of other events.
MIDI Editors List Editor Multiple Part Controls Show Part Borders Shows/Hides part borders for the active MIDI part within the left and right locators. Part Editing Mode Sets the editing mode for parts. ● Edit All Parts allows you to edit all parts that are opened in the Editor at the same time. ● Edit Active Parts restricts editing operations to the part that is selected in the Activate Part for Editing pop-up menu.
MIDI Editors List Editor Event Colors Event Colors Allows you to select event colors. Right Divider Right Divider Allows you to use the right divider. Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown. Edit VST Instrument Edit VST Instrument Opens the VST instrument that the track is routed to. Window Zone Controls Show/Hide Left Zone Shows/Hides the left zone. Show/Hide Right Zone Shows/Hides the right zone. Set up Window Layout Allows you to set up the window layout.
MIDI Editors List Editor Current Chord Display When the project cursor is positioned over notes that form a chord, this chord is displayed here. Track Loop Start/End If Independent Track Loop is activated on the toolbar, its start/end position are displayed. RELATED LINKS Drum Editor Toolbar on page 824 Filters Bar The filters bar allows you to hide events from view, based on their type and other properties. ● To show the filters bar, click Set up Window Layout on the toolbar, and activate Filters.
MIDI Editors List Editor ● To move the cursor to the start of the event, click in the auditioning column of an event. ● To move the cursor position and start/stop playback, double-click in the column for an event. Type Event type. Cannot be changed. Start Starting position of the event, displayed in the format selected for the ruler. Changing it has the same effect as moving the event. NOTE If you move the event past any other event in the list, the list is resorted.
MIDI Editors List Editor The vertical position of an event in the display corresponds to its entry in the list, that is, to the playback order. The horizontal position corresponds to the actual event position in the project. In the event display, you can add new parts or events, and drag events to another position. Value Display The value display to the right of the event display is a tool for quick viewing and editing of multiple values, for example, velocities or controller amounts.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations NOTE For note events, there is also a value in the Data 3 column, which is used for note-off velocity. NOTE For SMF and text events, no values are displayed. List Editor Operations This section describes the principal editing operations within the List Editor. Drawing Events The Draw tool allows you to insert single events in the event display. When you move the cursor inside the event display, its position is indicated on the status line.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations Filtering the Event List You can filter the event list with the Filters bar that is displayed below the toolbar in the List Editor. ● To filter the event list based on complex criteria, open the Focus pop-up menu and select a filter. ● To hide an event type, activate the corresponding checkbox on the Filters bar. ● To hide all event types except one, press Ctrl/Cmd and click the checkbox of the event type that you want to view.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations RELATED LINKS Event Colors Menu on page 747 Editing in the Value Display ● To edit values in the value display, click and drag. The mouse pointer automatically takes on the shape of the Draw tool when you move it over the value display. SysEx Messages SysEx (System Exclusive) messages are model-specific messages for setting various parameters of a MIDI device. This makes it possible to address device parameters that would not be available via normal MIDI syntax.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations 4. When you have finished recording, select the new part and select MIDI > List Editor. This allows you to check that the SysEx dump was recorded. There should be one or several SysEx events in the part/event list. Transmitting a Bulk Dump Back to a Device PREREQUISITE Route the MIDI track with the SysEx (System Exclusive) data to the device. Check your device’s documentation to find details about which MIDI channel should be used, etc. PROCEDURE 1. Solo the track. 2.
MIDI Editors List Editor Operations 2. Make sure that the instrument is set to transmit changes of front panel controls as SysEx messages. 3. Record. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK In the List Editor, check if the events were recorded properly. MIDI SysEx Editor ● To open the MIDI SysEx Editor for a SysEx event, click in the Comments column for the event in the List Editor. In the MIDI SysEx Editor, the bytes are displayed as follows: Address Shows at what position in the message a value is located.
MIDI Editors In-Place Editor Editing Byte Values You can edit the selected byte value in the main display of the MIDI SysEx Editor, or in the ASCII, decimal, and binary displays. ● To edit the selected value, open the MIDI SysEx Editor, click on a byte, and type in the value. Importing and Exporting SysEx Data You can import SysEx data from disk and export the edited data to a file. The file has to be in MIDI SysEx (.syx) binary format. Only the first dump in a SYX file will be loaded.
MIDI Editors In-Place Editor In-Place Editor Toolbar The toolbar contains tools and settings for the In-Place Editor. ● To open the toolbar, click on the triangle in the upper right corner of the track list for the edited track. Acoustic Feedback Acoustic Feedback Automatically plays back events when you move or transpose them, or when you create them by drawing. Multiple Part Controls Part Editing Mode Sets the editing mode for parts.
MIDI Editors In-Place Editor Insert Velocity Note Insert Velocity Allows you to specify a velocity value for new notes. Length Quantize Length Quantize Allows you to set a value for quantizing event lengths. Event Colors Event Colors Allows you to select event colors. Working with the In-Place Editor ● To zoom or scroll the In-Place Editor, point at the left part of the piano keyboard display so that the pointer changes to a hand.
Note Expression Note expression allows you to edit MIDI notes and their expressions as one unit. Note expression allows you to associate expression events with MIDI notes, so that they are treated as a unit. When you quantize, move, copy, duplicate, or delete MIDI notes, all their associated controller information follows. This allows for an intuitive and accurate editing of note-related data.
Note Expression VST Note Expressions RELATED LINKS VST Note Expressions on page 860 MIDI Controllers on page 861 MIDI Input Devices that Support MPE on page 861 VST Note Expressions VST note expressions are note-specific. They are suitable for polyphonic contexts, as they allow you to edit the expression of each individual note in a chord. VST note expressions are provided by VST instruments.
Note Expression MIDI Controllers MIDI Controllers MIDI controllers are channel-specific, with the exception of poly pressure messages. They affect the entire voice, regardless of whether they are inserted for a part or a note. The fact that MIDI controllers are channel-specific limits the potential of note expression to monophonic (solo) performances.
Note Expression MIDI Controllers Cubase allows you to capture three dimensions of input movements polyphonically. The Note Expression Input Device page provides the sections Pressure, Horizontal/X, and Vertical/Y that allow you to view, and if needed, edit which MIDI messages are used for these three dimensions of control. The following options are available: MIDI Input Allows you to select the MIDI input port to which your input device is connected.
Note Expression MIDI Controllers MIDI Message Allows you to assign a MIDI message to the Horizontal/X input movement on your note expression input device. The default assignment is Pitchbend. Send Initial Value Allows you to transmit the start position of the input movement to Cubase. ● Off Transmits the absolute position. This corresponds to the following initial values: Absolute: On (Sensel Morph), Relative: Off (LinnStrument). ● Center (64) Transmits the center value first.
Note Expression MIDI Controllers ● Max (127) Transmits the maximum value first. Input movements cause the value to decrease. VST Note Expression Assignment Shows the assignment of MPE input movements to VST note expressions. The following options are available in the MIDI Channels section: Multi-Channel Input Mode Allows you to choose a multi-channel input mode. The following options are available: ● MPE Mode Activates MPE mode, and sets channel 1 as base channel.
Note Expression MIDI Controllers The following options are available as Preferred and Alternative assignments: Expression Name Contains Allows you to assign all note expressions to an input movement whose name contains the text that you specify in the field to the right. Note Expression Number Allows you to assign all note expressions to an input movement whose number corresponds to the one you specify in the field to the right.
Note Expression Note Expression Inspector Section Note Expression Inspector Section The Note Expression Inspector section features most of the functions that you need to work with note expression. ● To open the Note Expression section, select a MIDI or an instrument track, and click Note Expression in the Inspector. The following sections are available: 1 Section header/Bypass button Shows the section name. The bypass button allows you to bypass all note expression data for the track.
Note Expression Note Expression Inspector Section Expression Section The expression section shows VST note expressions and MIDI controllers. Which VST note expressions are available depends on the instrument that is used. Which MIDI control change messages are available depends on the settings in the MIDI Controller Setup dialog. The expression section is available in the Note Expression section of the Inspector.
Note Expression Note Expression Inspector Section Parameter Color Allows you to specify a color for the selected expression. Input Allows you to specify the input assignment for the selected expression. MIDI Learn Click this button and move the fader or knob on your external MIDI controller to assign the selected expression to it. Max. Value/Min. Value Allows you to specify a value range that is used for the selected expression.
Note Expression Note Expression Tools Shows only the expressions in the list for which data exists. These are marked with an asterisk (*) in front of the expression name. ● Make all Expressions visible Shows all available expressions in the event display. ● Make only edited Expression visible Shows only the selected expression in the event display. ● Load Input Assignment Allows you to load mapping presets. ● Save Input Assignment Allows you to save mapping presets.
Note Expression Controller Mapping Mapping Controllers via the Inspector You can use the Inspector to map the knobs and faders of your MIDI instrument to expressions. PROCEDURE 1. In the expression section, select the expression that you want to map to a MIDI controller. 2. Open the Input pop-up menu and select the controller that you want to map to the selected note expression. 3.
Note Expression Recording RESULT You can now record note expression data using the controls on your MIDI device that you just assigned. Using Mapping Presets You can save your expression mapping as a preset and load it later for use with the same MIDI device. PROCEDURE 1. In the Global section, click Show Additional Functions to open the pop-up menu. 2. Select Save Input Assignment. 3. In the file dialog that opens, specify a name and a location for the file. RESULT A file with the extension *.
Note Expression Recording Recording Notes and Note Expression Data You can use an external MIDI device to record MIDI notes together with note expression data. PROCEDURE 1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track . 2. Click Instrument. 3. Open the Instrument pop-up menu and select HALion Sonic SE, for example. 4. Click Add Track. The instrument track is added to the track list, and the control panel of the selected VST instrument is opened. 5.
Note Expression Recording NOTE Make sure that the MIDI channel is not set to Any. 6. In the Inspector, open the Note Expression section. The expressions should be correctly mapped to the input movements of your MPE device. 7. Use your MPE input device to record MIDI notes together with note expression data. RESULT The notes are recorded together with the note expression data.
Note Expression Note Expression Event Editor 2. Activate Latch Buffer and set the knobs and faders on the MIDI controller to the corresponding values. 3. Activate Overdub. 4. Use the mapped controls on your MIDI device to record note expression data for the note that is playing. RESULT The values for all controls are attached to the notes that are passed during overdub recording, and replace any existing controller data of the same type.
Note Expression Note Expression Event Editor Note Expression Editor is deactivated) to opening the note expression event editor (Double-Click Opens Note Expression Editor is activated). ● ● If you select several notes in the Key Editor, and you double-click any of them, the note expression event editor opens for all these notes. In this case, any editing affects all the notes that are present at the time position where you perform the editing. To close the editor, click in the event display.
Note Expression Note Expression Event Editor Click this and drag up or down to change the size of the editor. This allows you to switch between 3 different window sizes. 7 Parameter Selection Shows the selected parameter. Click this to open a pop-up menu with all the parameters that are used for the note. To make more parameters available, select them in the Inspector.
Note Expression Note Expression Event Editor If you click on the lower border of the editor, you can stretch the curve horizontally. This allows you to move the event values of the curve to the left or to the right. Navigation in the Note Expression Event Editor You can navigate to the next/previous note while the note expression event editor is open. ● To navigate to the next/previous note, use the Left Arrow / Right Arrow keys. ● To step through the notes, press Tab and Shift - Tab .
Note Expression Note Expression Event Editor RESULT The selected note expression events are deleted from the note. RELATED LINKS Adding Velocity Events on page 764 Pasting Note Expression Events to Different Notes You can copy all note expression events from one or more notes and paste them to one or more other notes. PREREQUISITE You have set up a key command for Paste Note Expression in the Key Commands dialog (Note Expression category). PROCEDURE 1.
Note Expression Note Expression Event Editor 2. Select the note expression events of the parameter that you want to copy. 3. Select Edit > Copy. 4. Select the parameter to which you want to paste the note expression events. 5. Select Edit > Paste. RESULT All copied note expression events are pasted to the selected parameter. Repeating Note Expression Events PROCEDURE 1. Double-click the note that contains the note expression events to open the note expression event editor. 2.
Note Expression Trimming Note Expression Data RESULT The release phase is added to the note. NOTE You can change the release phase for several notes by opening the editor for these notes, and holding down Alt while setting the release length. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Add controller events in the release phase by overdubbing or by manually entering note expression events in the editor.
Note Expression Note Expression MIDI Setup Dialog Note Expression MIDI Setup Dialog The Note Expression MIDI Setup dialog allows you to specify exactly which MIDI messages are used every time you record MIDI control change messages as note expression data or you convert them. ● To open the Note Expression MIDI Setup dialog, select MIDI > Note Expression > Note Expression MIDI Setup. The following options are available: Controller Activates MIDI control change messages.
Note Expression Note Expression MIDI Setup Dialog Save as Default Allows you to save the current settings as default settings. Recording MIDI Control Change Messages as Note Expression Data You can record MIDI control change messages as note expression data. PROCEDURE 1. In the Inspector, open the Note Expression section and activate MIDI as Note Expression. 2. Optional: Set the MIDI track to Any channel. MIDI control change messages, with the exception of poly pressure, are channel-specific.
Note Expression Note Expression MIDI Setup Dialog IMPORTANT If you want to edit the MIDI notes after the conversion, you might need to consolidate the controller data. RELATED LINKS Note Expression MIDI Setup Dialog on page 881 Adding Release Phases to Notes on page 879 Consolidating Note Expression Overlaps If you move or quantize notes so that they overlap, and if these overlapping notes contain data for the same control change message, you might need to consolidate the note expression overlaps.
Note Expression Note Expression MIDI Setup Dialog Converting Note Expression Data to MIDI Controller Data You can convert note expression data of MIDI controller parameters to MIDI controller data on controller lanes. PROCEDURE ● Select MIDI > Note Expression > Dissolve Note Expression. RESULT The note expression data is converted. If you open the controller display and show the controller lanes for the corresponding event type, the data is displayed.
Chord Functions The chord functions provide you with many possibilities for working with chords. The chord functions allow you to: ● Build chord progressions by adding chord events to the chord track. ● Convert chord events to MIDI. ● Use the chord track to control MIDI playback. ● Use the chord track voicing to change the pitches of your MIDI. ● Extract chord events from MIDI data to get an overview of the harmonic structure of a MIDI file. ● Extract chord events from audio events.
Chord Functions Chord Events RELATED LINKS Chord Track on page 147 Chord Events Chord events are representations of chords that allow you to control or transpose playback on MIDI, instrument, and audio tracks. Chord events alter the pitches of MIDI notes and VariAudio segments if their tracks are set up to follow the chord track. Chord events have a specific start position. Their end, however, is determined by the start of the next chord event.
Chord Functions Chord Events The chord event on the chord track changes accordingly. 4. Optional: Select a chord type, tension, and bass note. 5. Optional: Click Add Chord or press Tab to add a new undefined chord event on the chord track, and define it. 6. To close the Editor, click anywhere outside the Editor. RELATED LINKS Adding the Chord Track on page 885 Chord Editor The Chord Editor allows you to define or change chord events, and to add new chord events.
Chord Functions Chord Events Activate MIDI Input Allows you to define a chord by playing a chord on your MIDI keyboard. If the chord is recognized, it is reflected by the chord buttons and the keyboard display. Define Chord by Text Input Allows you to define a chord using the computer keyboard. Defining Chords by Text Input In the chord Editor, you can use the text input field to define a chord with the computer keyboard. PROCEDURE 1. Double-click a chord event to open the chord Editor. 2.
Chord Functions Chord Events ● To open the Detected tab, double-click a chord event that was extracted from an audio event, and click Detected. NOTE Chord events that were extracted from audio events are indicated by a symbol in the upper right corner of the event. RELATED LINKS Chord Assistant – Circle of Fifths on page 889 Chord Assistant – Detected on page 890 Chord Assistant – Circle of Fifths The Circle of Fifths shows the chords in an interactive visualization of the circle of fifths.
Chord Functions Chord Events ● The inner circle displays the corresponding parallel minor chords. ● The roman numerals mark the chords of the current key with their scale degree. You can use these chords to create typical chord progressions or you can use the other chords for more creative results. ● To play a chord and assign it to the selected chord event, click it. The last 3 chords that you clicked are shown in bold.
Chord Functions Chord Events NOTE Chord events that were created from audio events are indicated by a symbol in the upper right corner of the event. Go to Previous Chord/Go to Next Chord Allow you to select the previous/next chord on the chord track for editing. Add Chord Adds a new undefined chord event on the chord track. NOTE This works only if the last chord event on the chord track is selected. Audio Event The name of the audio event from which the chord events were detected.
Chord Functions Scale Events RESULT The chord events on the chord track now trigger the sound of the assigned instrument on the MIDI or instrument track. RELATED LINKS Chord Track on page 147 Add Track Dialog – Instrument on page 120 Changing How Chord Events Are Displayed You can change how chord events are displayed. This is useful if chord events overlap each other at low zoom levels or if you do not like the font type. PROCEDURE 1. On the chord track, activate Resolve Display Conflicts. 2.
Chord Functions Scale Events A scale event is shown on the scale lane. 3. Do one of the following: ● Click the first scale event on the chord track, and on the info line, select a Root Key and Type. ● Double-click the scale event, and in the keyboard that appears, select a Root Key and Type of the scale. The keys that correspond to the scale are highlighted.
Chord Functions Scale Events Add Scale Adds a new scale to the list. Use the keyboard display to define the scale pitches. All scales start with C as a root note. Factory Defaults Resets all scales. Use Activates a scale. NOTE Activated musical scales are used in the chord track, in the Scale Assistant section of the Key Editor Inspector, in the Transpose Setup window, and in the MIDI Modifiers section of the Inspector. Name The name of the scale. Double-click to change it.
Chord Functions Voicings Voicings Voicings determine how chord events are set up. They define the vertical spacing and order of the pitches in a chord, but also the instrumentation and genre of a musical piece. For example, a C chord can be spread over a wide range of pitches, and a pianist will choose different notes than a guitarist. The pianist may also play completely different pitches for different musical genres. ● You can set up voicing for the entire chord track in the chord track Inspector.
Chord Functions Voicings Shift Chords If you enter a negative number of ticks, the chord events will affect the MIDI notes that have been triggered too early. RELATED LINKS Custom Voicing Panel on page 896 Custom Voicing Panel If you click Set up Voicing in the Chords section of the Inspector, you can configure your own voicing parameters for a specific voicing scheme. ● To open the Custom Voicing panel, click Set up Voicing in the Chords section of the Inspector.
Chord Functions Voicings 4-Note Chords (Open Jazz) Sets a 4-note chord without root note and without fifth. Chords with fewer than 3 notes are not changed. 5-Note Chords Sets a 5-note chord with a ninth. Chords with fewer than 4 notes are not changed. In the Options section for Piano voicings, you can set up the following parameters: Add Root Note Adds a root note. Duplicate Root Duplicates the root note. Fatten up Duplicates the tenor.
Chord Functions Converting Chord Events to MIDI Converting Chord Events to MIDI You can convert chord events to MIDI for further editing or for printing a lead sheet in the Score Editor. PROCEDURE 1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track 2. Do one of the following: ● Click Instrument to add an instrument track. ● Click MIDI to add a MIDI track. 3. Click Add Track. 4. Do one of the following: .
Chord Functions Controlling MIDI Playback Using the Chord Track Follow Chord Track Select an option to determine how the events on your track are mapped to the chord track. This Track’s Voicings Allows you to select a voicing library or to use the voicings from the chord track. This is only available if you selected Voicings or Single Voice in the Follow Chord Track pop-up menu. Live Input Allows you to transpose the MIDI input live to a chord progression on the chord track.
Chord Functions Controlling MIDI Playback Using the Chord Track Using Follow Chord Track This allows you to match an existing recording to a chord progression on the chord track. PROCEDURE 1. Select the track that you want to match to the chord track. 2. In the Inspector, click Chords. 3. Open the Follow Chord Track pop-up menu and select a mode. NOTE If this is the first time that you open this pop-up menu for the track, the Follow Chord Track dialog opens. 4.
Chord Functions Controlling MIDI Playback Using the Chord Track Chords This transposes MIDI notes to match the key note and maps them to the current chord. Scales This transposes MIDI notes to match the current scale. This allows a bigger variety of notes and a more natural performance. Root Notes This transposes MIDI notes to match the root note of the chord event. The effect corresponds to using the transpose track. This option is suitable for bass tracks.
Chord Functions Assigning Voices to Notes Using Map to Chord Track This allows you to match individual parts or events to a chord progression on the chord track. PROCEDURE 1. In the Project window, select the events or parts that you want to map to the chord track. 2. Select Project > Chord Track > Map to Chord Track. 3. From the Mapping Mode pop-up menu, select a mapping mode. NOTE If you select Voicings and no voices are found, Auto mode is used instead. 4. Click OK.
Chord Functions Creating Chord Events from MIDI Creating Chord Events from MIDI You can extract chords from MIDI notes, parts, or tracks. This is useful if you have a MIDI file and want to show its harmonic structure, and use this file as starting point for further experimenting. PREREQUISITE ● You have added a chord track. ● On a MIDI track, you have created a MIDI part with MIDI events that can be interpreted as chords. Drums, monophonic bass, or lead tracks are not suitable. PROCEDURE 1.
Chord Functions Creating Chord Events from Audio Events Interpret Sustain Pedal Activate this if you want your chord events to contain sustain pedal chords, that is, notes that are played while the sustain pedal is held. Ignore Notes Shorter Than Allows you to determine the minimum length of the MIDI events that are taken into account. RELATED LINKS Chord Editing Section on page 805 Creating Chord Events from MIDI on page 903 Creating Chord Events from Audio Events You can extract chords from audio events.
Chord Functions Recording Chord Events with a MIDI Keyboard Editing Chord Events That Were Detected from Audio Events If you are not satisfied with the chord events that were detected from audio events, you can edit them. The algorithm normally provides several possible results for chord types. PREREQUISITE ● You have detected chord events from audio events. ● You have connected the chord track to the output of an instrument or a MIDI track. This allows you to audition the chords. PROCEDURE 1.
Chord Pads Chord pads allow you to play with chords, and to change their voicings and tensions. In terms of harmonies and rhythms, they allow for a more playful and spontaneous approach to composition than the chord track functions. You can: ● Perform with chords in real time via a MIDI keyboard. ● Record your performance as MIDI events on a MIDI or instrument track or even on the chord track. NOTE We assume that you have a MIDI keyboard connected and set up.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Zone NOTE If Record-Enable allows MIDI Thru is deactivated in the Preferences dialog (Record—MIDI page), you must activate Monitor to use the chord pads. 2 Current Player Shows the selected player and opens a pop-up menu where you can select another player. 3 Current Mode Shows the selected player mode and opens a pop-up menu where you can select another player mode. 4 Chord Pad Each chord pad can contain a chord symbol.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Zone Players and Voicings on page 918 Opening Chord Pads on page 61 Player Modes—Sections on page 922 Chord Pad Controls The chord pad controls allow you to edit the chord pads. ● To show the chord pad controls, move the mouse over a chord pad. 1 Open Editor Opens the Chord Editor that allows you to select a chord for the chord pad. 2 Voicing indicators Shows the voicing used for the chord.
Chord Pads Functions Menu Adaptive Voicing All chord pads follow the adaptive voicing. This is indicated by a check mark. If you change the voicing for a pad manually, adaptive voicing is deactivated. Adaptive Voicings Reference Sets the current pad as adaptive voicing reference. If set, the automatic voicings for the following pads are set in a way that they do not get too far away from the reference voicing. Only one pad can be set as adaptive voicing reference.
Chord Pads Chord Assistant Chord Assistant The Chord Assistant allows you to use a chord as a starting point for suggestions for the next chord. It assists you in finding the right chords for creating a chord progression for your song. ● Click Show/Hide Chord Assistant on the left side of the chord pads area to open the Chord Assistant. You must define an origin chord as follows: ● Right-click the chord pad with the chord you want to use as origin and select Use X as Origin for Chord Assistant.
Chord Pads Chord Assignment ● To play a chord, click it. The last 3 chords that you clicked are shown in bold. ● To assign a chord to the next unassigned chord pad, right-click the suggested chord and select Assign to Pad. You can also drag the suggested chord and drop it on a chord pad. ● To assign a suggestion to the next unassigned chord pad and use this chord as origin, right-click the chord and select Assign to Pad and Use as Origin.
Chord Pads Chord Assignment Assigning Chords with the Chord Editor If you know exactly which chord you want to assign to a specific chord pad, you can use the Chord Editor. PROCEDURE 1. Move the mouse pointer to the left edge of the chord pad, and click Open Editor. 2. In the Chord Editor window, use the chord definition buttons to define a root note, a chord type, a tension, and a bass note. The new chord is triggered automatically to give an acoustic feedback.
Chord Pads Chord Assignment Assigning Chords with the MIDI Keyboard If you know which chord you want to assign to a specific chord pad, you can use a MIDI keyboard or the On-Screen Keyboard. PREREQUISITE You have selected a MIDI track or an instrument track. PROCEDURE 1. Right-click the chord pad that you want to use for the new chord, and select Assign Pad from MIDI Input. The borders of the chord pad change their color to indicate that it is now ready for recording. 2.
Chord Pads Swapping Chord Assignments Swapping Chord Assignments You can swap the chord assignments of 2 pads. PROCEDURE ● Click a chord pad and drag it to another chord pad. While you drag, the border of the destination chord pad changes its color. RESULT When you drop the pad on another, the chord assignments are swapped together with their settings, except for the Adaptive Voicing Reference. Copying Chord Assignments You can copy the chord assignment of one pad and paste it on another pad.
Chord Pads Playing Back and Recording Chords Playing Back Chord Pads Using Exclusive Instrument Tracks on page 915 Playing Back Chord Pads Using Any Instrument Track You can play back chord pads using any MIDI or instrument track where Record Enable or Monitor is activated. PREREQUISITE You have connected and set up a MIDI keyboard. PROCEDURE 1. In the global track controls area of the track list, click Add Track 2. Click Instrument. 3. Open the Instrument pop-up menu and select a VST instrument. 4.
Chord Pads Playing Back and Recording Chords The instrument track is added to the track list, and the control panel of the selected VST instrument is opened. 5. On the instrument track, click Record Enable or Monitor. NOTE If Record-Enable allows MIDI Thru is deactivated in the Preferences dialog (Record—MIDI page), you must activate Monitor to use the chord pads. 6. In the Inspector for the instrument track, open the Input Routing pop-up menu, and select Chord Pads. 7.
Chord Pads Player Setup AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK Open the Key Editor and fine-tune your recorded MIDI parts using the chord editing functions, for example. You can also use MIDI > Dissolve Part to dissolve the recorded chords by pitches/ channels. Recording Chords on the Chord Track You can record chords that are triggered by chord pads on the chord track. This way, you can easily create chord events for a lead sheet, for example.
Chord Pads Player Setup In the Select Player section, the following options are available: List of Added Players Shows the added players, and allows you to activate a player and use its voicing style and play mode for the chord pads. Player Options Allows you to add a player and to rename or remove the current player. In the Selected Player Settings section, the following options are available: Chord Voicing Style Allows you to select a chord voicing style for the selected player.
Chord Pads Player Setup If you want to set the voicing of a specific chord pad manually, and do not want it changed automatically, you can use the voicing control to the right of a chord pad. When you assign your own voicing, adaptive voicing is deactivated for that chord pad, so that the pad does no longer follows the voice leading rules of the voicing reference. To activate adaptive voicing again, right-click the chord pad and activate Adaptive Voicing.
Chord Pads Player Setup Player Modes—Pattern If you select Pattern in the Player Modes pop-up menu, this allows you to play the notes that make up the chord one after another as an arpeggio based on the notes of the pattern. ● Click Show/Hide Player Setup to open the Player Setup, and in the Player Modes pop-up menu, select Pattern.
Chord Pads Player Setup NOTE The loop or part must have between 3 and 5 voices. In the MediaBay, the number of voices is indicated in the Voices column of the Result list. The loop or part is taken as a reference and defines how the chord is played. 4. In the Velocity from field, select a velocity source for the notes.
Chord Pads Player Setup RELATED LINKS Add Track Dialog – Instrument on page 120 Player Modes—Sections You can control the playback of single notes or groups of notes, so called sections, of a chord that is assigned to a chord pad. Sections hold the chord notes, starting from bottom to top: the first section represents the lowest note or voicing of a chord, usually the bass. The second section represents the tenor, and so on.
Chord Pads Player Setup The following settings are available: Play Modes ● Chord Pads Allows you to hear the chord notes that correspond to the section if you press the remote key for a specific section on your MIDI keyboard. ● Sections On your MIDI keyboard, first press a key that is assigned to a chord pad, then press the remote key for a specific section to hear the chord notes that correspond to the section.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Setup Dialog Mute Sections Excludes a section from being played. This is useful if you want to exclude specific voicings from playback. Subsection Assignments These are available if you have set up remote keys for subsections on the Player Remote Control tab. ● Open the assigned to pop-up menu to assign a subsection to a section. ● Use the Offset controls to specify an offset from the section.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Setup Dialog Pad Remote Control Allows you to specify a range of remote keys that trigger the chords that are assigned to the chord pads. Here, you can also set up chord modifiers that allow you to specify how the chords are played back. Player Remote Control Allows you to specify a range of remote keys that trigger the chord notes, and that select or mute players. Pad Layout Allows you to change the layout that is used for the chord pads.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Setup Dialog In the Chord Pad Triggers section, the following options are available: Latch Chords Activate this if you want the chord pad to play back until it is triggered again. Pads Remote Range Start Allows you to set the start note for the remote range. By default, this is set to C1. Pads Remote Range End Allows you to set the end note for the remote range. By default, this is set to B1.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Setup Dialog NOTE If you use MIDI controllers that are already assigned to other remote control features, for example, the Track Quick Controls or the VST Quick Controls, all previous assignments are lost. In the Voicing Modifiers section, the following options are available: Next Voicing Plays back the next voicing of the last played chord. Previous Voicing Plays back the previous voicing of the last played chord.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Setup Dialog Transpose All Pads Allows you to transpose all chord pads using one of the following modifiers: ● No Modifier ● Aftertouch ● Pitchbend ● Controller If you select Controller, you can set the controller number in the Controller Number field. MIDI Learn Activates/Deactivates the MIDI Learn function to assign MIDI input to the parameters for changing transpose. Changing the Pads Remote Range You can widen the pads remote range to access more chord pads.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Setup Dialog Sections Allows you to assign remote keys for up to 5 sections. You can use the section remote keys together with a pad remote key to trigger the chord notes that correspond to the sections. By default, Section 1 is set to G2, Section 2 is set to A2, Section 3 is set to B2, and Section 4 is set to C3. MIDI Learn Activates/Deactivates the MIDI Learn function to assign MIDI input to the sections.
Chord Pads Chord Pads Presets Pad Layout Tab The Pad Layout tab in the Chord Pads Setup dialog allows you to change the layout that is used for the chord pads. NOTE By default, the keyboard layout is active, but you can change to a grid layout if you prefer. After changing the pad layout, you may need to adjust the remote setup. ● To open the Pad Layout tab, click Set up Chord Pads, and in the Chord Pads Setup dialog, click Pad Layout.
Chord Pads Creating Chord Events from Chord Pads In the same way, you can also load only the player configurations of Chord Pads Presets. This is useful if you have saved very complex player settings and want to reuse them on other chord pads without changing the assigned chords. ● To load only the player settings of Chord Pads Presets, click Chord Pads Presets and select Load Players from Preset. Saving Chord Pads Presets If you have set up the chord pads, you can save them as Chord Pads Presets.
Project Input Transformer The Project Input Transformer is a powerful tool for search and replace functions on MIDI data. The Project Input Transformer works in real time. It filters out and transforms MIDI data while it is recorded. All settings that you make in the Project Input Transformer always affect the actual MIDI events you record. You can use the Project Input Transformer as follows: ● You can set up filter conditions to find certain elements.
Project Input Transformer Project Input Transformer Presets Browser 1 Module Allows you to view and edit a module. 2 Preset Allows you to select a preset. 3 Event Target Filters Allows you to specify the conditions such as type, attribute, value, or position that a specific element must meet to be found. You can combine any number of filter conditions using And and Or operators. 4 Event Transform Actions Allows you to set up a list of actions that specifies exactly what is done.
Project Input Transformer Project Input Transformer Presets Browser Expand Tree Expands the tree. Collapse Tree Collapses the tree. Search Allows you to search for presets by typing in the preset name or parts of the preset or category name. Save Changes as Preset Allows you to save your changes as a user preset. User Presets Lists all user presets that you have saved. Factory Presets Lists all factory presets. Show User Presets Location Opens a file dialog containing the user presets.
Project Input Transformer Project Input Transformer Presets Browser Automatic Migration of Presets from Earlier Versions If you update Cubase from an earlier version, all factory and user presets that are found in the Preferences folder are automatically migrated. You can find them in the Earlier Presets subfolder of your current User Presets folder.
Project Input Transformer Project Input Transformer Filter Settings AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK In the file browser of your operating system, you can navigate to the user presets location and create subfolders to organize your user presets. Here, you can also rename, delete, and move presets to other folders.
Project Input Transformer Project Input Transformer Filter Settings Project Input Transformer Filter Targets Value 1 Searches for different meanings depending on the event type. Value 2 Searches for different meanings depending on the event type. Channel ● To search for MIDI channels, set up the MIDI channel in the Parameter 1 column. If you select Inside Range or Outside Range, use Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 to set the start and the end of the range.
Project Input Transformer Project Input Transformer Filter Settings ● Value 2 The MIDI controller value. Program Change ● Value 1 The program change number. ● Value 2 Not used. Aftertouch ● Value 1 The amount of pressure. ● Value 2 Not used. Pitchbend ● Value 1 The tuning of the bend. Not always used. ● Value 2 The coarse amount of bend. NOTE SysEx (System Exclusive) events do not use Value 1 and Value 2.
Project Input Transformer Project Input Transformer Filter Settings Outside Range Has a value that is not between the values set up in the Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 columns. Note is Equal to Is the note specified in the Parameter 1 column only, regardless of octave. For example, lets you find all C notes, in all octaves. This is only available if the Filter Target is set to Value 1, that is, Pitch. All Types All event types. NOTE The conditions for the Property filter target are different.
Project Input Transformer Project Input Transformer Functions 4. Click in the Parameter 1 column, and enter a value. 5. In the Event Target Filters section, click Insert to insert another filter line, and set it up. 6. Click the Bool column of the first filter line and do one of the following: ● Activate And if you want both filter lines to be fulfilled for an element to be found. ● Activate Or if you want at least one of the filter lines to be fulfilled for an element to be found.
Project Input Transformer Project Input Transformer Action Settings The following Functions are only available in the Transformer MIDI effect: Insert Creates new elements and inserts these into the output stream. The new elements are based on the elements found by the filter conditions, but with any changes you have set up in the action list applied. Insert Exclusive Transforms the found elements according to the action list.
Project Input Transformer Project Input Transformer Action Settings Project Input Transformer Action Targets Action Targets in the Event Transform Actions section allow you to select the property that is changed in the events. Actions are only available if you set the functions pop-up menu to Transform. Value 1 Adjusts Value 1 in the events. What is displayed for value 1 depends on the event type. For notes, Value 1 is the pitch. Value 2 Adjusts Value 2 in the events.
Project Input Transformer Project Input Transformer Operations Project Input Transformer Operations The Operation column allows you to determine what to do with the Action Target. The available operations depend on the selected Action Target. The following options are available: Add Adds the value specified in the Parameter 1 column to the Action Target. Subtract Subtracts the value specified in the Parameter 1 column from the Action Target.
Logical Editor The Logical Editor is a powerful tool for search and replace functions on MIDI data. You can use the Logical Editor as follows: ● You can set up filter conditions to find certain elements. This can be elements of a certain type, with certain attributes or values, or on certain positions, in any combination. You can combine any number of filter conditions and make composite conditions using And/Or operators. ● You can select the basic function to be performed.
Logical Editor Logical Editor Presets Browser NOTE You can resize the Event Target Filters and the Event Transform Actions sections by dragging the divider between them. Logical Editor Presets Browser The presets browser of the Logical Editor allows you to load, save, and manage presets. ● To open the presets browser, open the Logical Editor, and click the Preset field. Expand Tree Expands the tree. Collapse Tree Collapses the tree.
Logical Editor Logical Editor Presets Browser Logical Editor Presets The Logical Editor comes with a set of factory presets, but you can also save your own user presets. Cubase uses dedicated and separate locations for factory presets and user presets: ● Factory presets are saved in a dedicated Logical Edit folder in the Presets folder of the application. ● User presets are saved in a dedicated Logical Edit folder under \Users\\Documents\Steinberg\\User Presets.
Logical Editor Logical Editor Filter Settings 2. Select MIDI > Logical Edit > Apply Preset to open the preset browser. 3. Do one of the following: ● Enter a preset name in the search field, and in the reduced tree, select the preset. ● Click Expand Tree to show all presets, and select the desired preset. RESULT All Event Target Filters, Event Transform Actions, and Functions that were saved in the preset are directly applied to the MIDI parts in the Project window.
Logical Editor Logical Editor Filter Settings Left bracket Together with the right bracket, this allows you to combine multiple filters, that is, multiple lines with the boolean operators And/Or. Filter Target Sets the property of the element. This setting affects the available options in the other columns. Condition Determines the comparison of the property in the Filter Target column to the values in the Parameter columns. The available options depend on the Filter Target setting.
Logical Editor Logical Editor Filter Settings Logical Editor Filter Targets Position Searches for elements by their position. ● To search for events starting at a specific position, set up the position with Parameter 1. ● To search for events inside or outside a specific range, select Inside Range or Outside Range in the Condition column, and set up the start and end positions of the range with Parameter 1 and Parameter 2.
Logical Editor Logical Editor Filter Settings Context Variable Searches for chord properties and parameters. This allows you to search for the lowest/highest note in a MIDI part or in a selection of notes, the average pitch, or the average velocity. RELATED LINKS Value 1, Value 2, and Value 3 on page 950 Context Variable on page 951 Value 1, Value 2, and Value 3 MIDI events can be composed of different values.
Logical Editor Logical Editor Filter Settings ● Value 2 Not used. Pitchbend ● Value 1 The tuning of the bend. Not always used. ● Value 2 The coarse amount of bend. VST 3 Event ● Value 1 Not used. ● Value 2 The value of the VST 3 event parameter. The value range of the VST 3 event (0.0 to 1.0) is transformed into the MIDI value range (0-127), that is, the VST 3 event value 0.5 corresponds to 64.
Logical Editor Logical Editor Filter Settings Position in Chord (Part) If you set Parameter 2 to the position in the chord, this finds chords with the specified chord interval in the MIDI part or a selection of notes in this part. Note Number in Chord (lowest = 0) If you set Parameter 2 to the voicing number of the chord, this finds chords with the specified voicing number in the MIDI part or a selection of notes in this part.
Logical Editor Logical Editor Filter Settings Inside Range Has a value that is between the values set up in the Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 columns. Parameter 1 should be the lower value and Parameter 2 the higher. Outside Range Has a value that is not between the values set up in the Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 columns. Inside Bar Range Has a value that is within the zone set up in the Bar Range/Time Base column, in each bar within the current selection.
Logical Editor Logical Editor Filter Settings RELATED LINKS Setting up Logical Editor Filter Lines on page 954 Setting up Logical Editor Filter Lines PREREQUISITE You have selected a MIDI part in your project, and selected MIDI > Logical Edit > Setup to open the Logical Editor. PROCEDURE 1. In the Event Target Filters section, click Insert. A filter line is added to the list. 2. Click in the Filter Target column, and select an option from the pop-up menu. 3.
Logical Editor Logical Editor Filter Settings PROCEDURE 1. In the Event Target Filters section, click Insert. A filter line is added to the list. 2. Click in the Filter Target column, and select an option from the pop-up menu. 3. Click in the Condition column, and select an option from the pop-up menu. 4. Click in the Parameter 1 column, and enter a value. 5. In the Event Target Filters section, click Insert to insert another filter line, and set it up. 6.
Logical Editor Logical Editor Filter Settings NOTE The Length parameter is interpreted via the time base setting in the Bar Range/Time Base column, that is, in PPQ, seconds, samples, or frames. 2. Open the Parameter 1 pop-up menu and set the length that you want to search for. 3. Open the Condition pop-up menu and select an option. If you select Inside Range or Outside Range, use Parameter 1 and Parameter 2 to set the start and the end of the range. 4. Click Insert to add another condition line.
Logical Editor Logical Editor Functions You can find all notes that either have the pitch C3 or the MIDI channel 1, but no non-note events. Logical Editor Functions The Functions pop-up menu allows you to select the basic type of editing that you want to be performed. The following functions are available: Delete Deletes all found elements. Transform Transforms all events that match the Event Target Filters according to the Event Transform Actions.
Logical Editor Logical Editor Action Settings RELATED LINKS Setting up Logical Editor Actions on page 961 Logical Editor Action Settings Action Targets in the Event Transform Actions section allow you to select the property that is changed in the events. Actions are only available if you set the functions pop-up menu to Transform. To set up an action, make the following settings: Action Target Sets the property that is changed in the events. Operation Determines what to do with the Action Target.
Logical Editor Logical Editor Action Settings Type Allows you to change the event type, that is, transform aftertouch events to modulation events, or pitchbend events to VST 3 tuning events. Value 3 Adjusts Value 3 in the events, which is used for note-off velocity when searching for properties. NoteExp Operation Allows you to specify a note expression operation in the Operation column. VST 3 Value Operation Allows you to perform common operations within the VST 3 value range (0.0 to 1.
Logical Editor Logical Editor Action Settings Mirror This is only available if you set Action Target to Value 1 or Value 2. When this option is selected, the values are mirrored around the value set in the Parameter 1 column. In the case of notes, this inverts the scale, with the key set in the Parameter 1 column as center point. Invert Inverts note expression data containing the specified VST 3 event parameter. Add Length This is only available if you set Action Target to Position.
Logical Editor Logical Editor Action Settings Setting up Logical Editor Actions You can set up actions, that is, changes that are made to the found events. Actions are not relevant for the Functions Select and Delete. PREREQUISITE You have set up at least one filter line in the Event Target Filters section. You have set the functions pop-up menu to Transform. PROCEDURE 1. In the Event Transform Actions section, click Insert. An action line is added to the list. 2.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature You can set up a tempo and time signature for your project. By default, the tempo is set to 120 bpm, and the time signature to 4/4. Project Tempo Modes For every project you can set a tempo mode, depending on whether your music has a fixed tempo or if it changes throughout the project.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Track Editor RELATED LINKS Instrument Track Inspector on page 121 MIDI Track Inspector on page 128 Audio Track Inspector on page 118 Tempo Track Editor The Tempo Track Editor provides an overview of the project tempo settings. It allows you to add and edit tempo events. To open the Tempo Track Editor, do one of the following: ● Select Project > Tempo Track. ● Press Ctrl/Cmd - T .
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Track Editor Activate Tempo Track Activate Tempo Track Switches the project tempo between fixed tempo mode and tempo track mode. Left Divider Left Divider Tools that are placed to the left of the divider are always shown. Auto-Scroll Auto-Scroll Keeps the project cursor visible during playback. Select Auto-Scroll Settings Allows you to activate Page Scroll or Stationary Cursor and to activate Suspend Auto-Scroll When Editing.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Track Snap Snap On/Off Restricts horizontal movement and positioning to the positions specified by the Snap Type. Time signature events always snap to the beginning of bars. Snap Type Allows you to specify to what positions you want events to snap. Right Divider Right Divider Tools that are placed to the right of the divider are always shown. Show Info Line Show/Hide Info Opens/Closes the info line.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Changes for Projects The tempo event editor features the following smart controls for specific editing modes: 1 Tilt Left If you click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can tilt the left part of the curve. This allows you to tilt the event values at the start of the curve upwards or downwards. 2 Compress Left If you Alt/Opt -click in the upper left corner of the editor, you can compress or expand the left part of the curve.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Tempo Changes for Projects NOTE If you work in tempo track mode, make sure that the display format in the Project window ruler is set to Bars+Beats. Otherwise, you may get confusing results. If you activate Activate Tempo Track on the Transport panel, the tempo track curve is displayed in the tempo curve display. If you know the tempo of your music, you can adjust the tempo value as follows: ● By adding tempo events in the Tempo Track Editor.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Setting up a Fixed Project Tempo NOTE If Snap is activated, this determines at which time positions you can insert tempo curve points. RESULT The tempo event is added to the tempo curve. Editing Tempo Events In the Tempo Track Editor, you can edit selected tempo events. Use the following methods: ● With the Object Selection tool, click and drag horizontally and/or vertically. ● On the info line, adjust the tempo value in the Value field.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Setting up a Fixed Project Tempo RELATED LINKS Setting the Project Tempo from a Recording on page 969 Setting the Project Tempo from an Audio Loop on page 970 Setting the Project Tempo from a Recording You can calculate the tempo of freely recorded audio or MIDI material with the Beat Calculator and set it as the project tempo. PREREQUISITE The Tempo Track is deactivated, that is, the tempo mode is set to Fixed. PROCEDURE 1.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Beat Calculator 6. Click one of the buttons in the Insert Tempo into Tempo Track section to insert the calculated tempo into the tempo track. RESULT The project tempo is set to the tapped tempo. RELATED LINKS Setting up a Fixed Project Tempo on page 968 Setting the Project Tempo from an Audio Loop You can set the project tempo from the tempo of an audio loop. PREREQUISITE Your project contains an audio loop that is not in Musical Mode. PROCEDURE 1.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Copying Warp Markers to Other Events Tap Tempo Opens a window where you can specify a tempo by tapping. At Tempo Track Start If your project is in tempo track mode, the calculated tempo is set as the first tempo curve point. If your project is in fixed tempo mode, the calculated tempo is set for the entire project. At Selection Start If your project is in tempo track mode, the calculated tempo is set as a new tempo event at the start of the selection.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Time Signature Events Save Definition in Project Only Saves the tempo information in the project file only. Write Definition to Audio Files Writes the tempo information to the selected audio files. This is useful if you want to use them in other projects together with the tempo information. Set all Tracks to Musical Time Base Sets all tracks to musical time base. If this is deactivated, only the tracks with the selected events are set to musical time base.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Time Signature Events Transport Bar on page 52 Signature Track on page 142 Adding Time Signature Events in the Tempo Track Editor on page 973 Setting up a Click Pattern for a Time Signature Event on page 973 Adding Time Signature Events in the Tempo Track Editor PROCEDURE 1. Select Project > Tempo Track to open the Tempo Track Editor. 2.
Editing Tempo and Time Signature Time Signature Events ● Select one of the patterns that are available for the current time signature in the Pattern pop-up menu. ● Set up a new user pattern by changing the number of clicks in the Clicks value field. You can also change the accent level for a beat by changing its vertical position in the event display. 3. When you are done, click outside the Click Pattern Editor to close it. 4.
Rendering Audio and MIDI You can render existing material to new audio material. You can render the following: ● Audio tracks ● Instrument tracks ● Audio events or parts on audio tracks ● MIDI parts on instrument tracks ● Range selections on audio or instrument tracks ● Range selections on multiple audio or instrument tracks IMPORTANT The rendering function does not support side-chain routing. Render Tracks Dialog The Render Tracks dialog allows you to customize the track render settings.
Rendering Audio and MIDI Render Tracks Dialog The following settings are available in the Mode section: As Separate Events Creates one or more tracks that contain separate events or parts that are saved as separate audio files. As Block Events Creates one or more tracks that contain adjacent events/parts that are combined to blocks. Every block is saved as a separate audio file. As One Event Creates one or more tracks that contain the events/parts and combines them to one event/part.
Rendering Audio and MIDI Render Tracks Dialog activated. The resulting audio file format is determined by the output channel of the source track. A mono track that is routed to a stereo bus results in a stereo audio file. Complete Signal Path + Master FX Renders the complete signal path and the master bus settings into the resulting audio files. This includes all channel settings, group channel settings, FX send channel settings, and panner settings.
Rendering Audio and MIDI Render Selection Dialog RELATED LINKS Pan Control on page 356 Rendering Tracks You can render selected tracks either via the Render Tracks dialog or by directly using the Render (with Current Settings) command. PROCEDURE 1. Deselect all events. 2. Select one or more audio, MIDI, or instrument tracks. 3. Select Edit > Render in Place > Render Settings. 4. Specify the render options. 5. Click Render.
Rendering Audio and MIDI Render Selection Dialog The following settings are available in the Mode section: As Separate Events Creates one or more tracks that contain separate events or parts that are saved as separate audio files. As Block Events Creates one or more tracks that contain adjacent events/parts that are combined to blocks. Every block is saved as a separate audio file. As One Event Creates one or more tracks that contain the events/parts and combines them to one event/part.
Rendering Audio and MIDI Render Selection Dialog activated. The resulting audio file format is determined by the output channel of the source track. A mono track that is routed to a stereo bus results in a stereo audio file. Complete Signal Path + Master FX Renders the complete signal path and the master bus settings into the resulting audio files. This includes all channel settings, group channel settings, FX send channel settings, and panner settings.
Rendering Audio and MIDI Render Selection Dialog 4. Click Render. RESULT All selected source material is processed according to your render settings. Your render options are saved and used for all further render operations. NOTE You can also start the rendering operation directly by selecting Edit > Render in Place > Render (with Current Settings).
Export Audio Mixdown The Export Audio Mixdown function allows you to mix down and export all audio that is contained between the left and right locators of a project. ● To open the Export Audio Mixdown dialog, select File > Export > Audio Mixdown. Export Audio Mixdown Dialog The Export Audio Mixdown dialog allows you to set up how audio is mixed down and exported. ● To open the Export Audio Mixdown dialog, select File > Export > Audio Mixdown.
Export Audio Mixdown Export Audio Mixdown Dialog Export Channel In the Export Channel pop-up menu, you can select a channel for export. File Location In the File Location section, the following options are available: Name Allows you to specify the name of the mixdown file. Click File Name Options to open a pop-up menu with naming options: ● Set to Project Name inserts the project name into the Name field.
Export Audio Mixdown Export Audio Mixdown Dialog The Mixdown folder is automatically created in your project folder. It is used by default if no export path information is available, that is, if you create a new empty project, or if you load or create a project from a template. ● Recent Paths allows you to select recently selected file locations. The Mixdown folder is not added to the list of Recent Paths. ● Clear Recent Paths allows you to delete all recently selected file locations.
Export Audio Mixdown Export Audio Mixdown Dialog Export as Allows you to select a channel mode for the mixdown file: ● Interleaved Allows you to export to an interleaved file. ● Split Channels Allows you to export the 2 channels of a stereo bus as separate mono files. ● Mono Downmix Allows you to downmix the 2 channels of a stereo bus to a single mono file. For stereo, the Stereo Pan Law as defined in the Project Setup dialog is applied to avoid clipping.
Export Audio Mixdown Export Audio Mixdown Dialog Quality (OggVorbis) Sets the quality for the variable bit rate encoding. This setting determines between which limits the bit rate will vary. The higher the value, the higher the sound quality but also the larger the files. After Export ● Do Nothing does nothing after export. ● Open in WaveLab opens your mixdown file in a WaveLab version after export. This requires that a WaveLab version is installed on your computer.
Export Audio Mixdown Export Audio Mixdown Dialog Naming Scheme Dialog The Naming Scheme dialog allows you to define naming schemes for the file name of the audio material that you want to export. The naming attributes that are available in this dialog depend on the channel that you selected for export. ● To open the Naming Scheme dialog, open the Export Audio Mixdown dialog, and in the File Location section, to the right of the Name field, click Set up Naming Scheme.
Export Audio Mixdown Export Audio Mixdown Dialog Preview Displays a preview of your current settings. Defining Naming Schemes You can define a naming scheme by combining attributes that determine the structure of the file names for the exported audio files. PROCEDURE 1. In the Naming Scheme dialog, drag up to 5 attributes into the Result section. You can also double-click an attribute to add it to the Result section. 2.
Export Audio Mixdown Mixing Down to Audio Files 4. In the Result field, double-click the Free Text label and enter the text that you want to add. 5. Press Return to confirm your changes. 6. Click OK. RESULT The text that you entered is added to the file name scheme and will be applied on export. Mixing Down to Audio Files You can mix selected channels down to audio files. PREREQUISITE ● You have set up the left and right locators so that they encompass the range that you want to mix down.
Export Audio Mixdown File Formats AIFF file This is an audio file format standard defined by Apple Inc. AIFF files are used on most computer platforms. The files can contain embedded text strings. AIFF files have the extension .aif. MPEG 1 Layer 3 file This is a family of standards used for encoding audio-visual information such as movies, video, and music in a digital compressed format. Cubase can read MPEG Layer 2 and MPEG Layer 3.
Export Audio Mixdown File Formats Export as Allows you to select a channel mode for the mixdown file: ● Interleaved Allows you to export to an interleaved file. ● Split Channels Allows you to export the 2 channels of a stereo bus as separate mono files. ● Mono Downmix Allows you to downmix the 2 channels of a stereo bus to a single mono file. For stereo, the Stereo Pan Law as defined in the Project Setup dialog is applied to avoid clipping.
Export Audio Mixdown File Formats NOTE If you set the value lower than the project sample rate, the audio quality degrades and the high-frequency content is reduced. If you set the value higher than the project sample rate, the file size increases without increasing the audio quality. For CD burning, select 44.100 kHz, because this is the sample rate used on audio CDs. Bit Depth Allows you to select a bit depth for the mixdown file.
Export Audio Mixdown File Formats MP3 (MPEG 1 Layer 3) Files MP3 files are highly compressed files that still provide good audio quality. They have the extension .mp3. ● To open the settings for MP3 files, select MPEG 1 Layer 3 in the File Type pop-up menu. Sample Rate Sets the sample rate for the mixdown file. Bit Rate Sets the bit rate for the MP3 file. The higher the bit rate, the better the audio quality and the larger the file.
Export Audio Mixdown File Formats project sample rate, the file size increases without increasing the audio quality. For CD burning, select 44.100 kHz, because this is the sample rate used on audio CDs. Bit Depth Allows you to select a bit depth for the mixdown file. You can select 8 bit, 16 bit, 24 bit, 32 bit, 32 bit (float), or 64 bit (float). If you plan to re-import the mixdown file into Cubase, select 32 bit (float). This is the resolution used for audio processing in Cubase.
Export Audio Mixdown Saving File Format Presets Allows you to downmix the 2 channels of a stereo bus to a single mono file. For stereo, the Stereo Pan Law as defined in the Project Setup dialog is applied to avoid clipping. RELATED LINKS Saving File Format Presets on page 995 Saving File Format Presets You can create file format presets from your favorite or most used file format settings. PROCEDURE 1.
Synchronization Synchronization is the process of getting 2 or more devices to play back together at the same speed, position, and phase. These devices can range from audio and video tape machines to digital audio workstations, MIDI sequencers, synchronization controllers, and digital video devices. If you know the position and speed for the master device, you can resolve the speed and position of the slave device to it, so that the 2 devices play in perfect sync with one another.
Synchronization Timecode Formats Any device receiving the timecode and synchronizing or locking to it. ● Machine Control Master The device that issues transport commands to the system. ● Machine Control Slave The device receiving timecode commands and responding to them. Cubase can be the machine control master, sending transport commands to an external device which in turn sends timecode and audio clock information back to Cubase. In that case, Cubase would also be the timecode slave.
Synchronization Timecode Formats 25 fps PAL (P) This is the broadcast video standard frame count for European (and other PAL countries) television broadcast. 30 fps non-drop SMPTE (N) This is the frame count of NTSC broadcast video. However, the actual frame rate or speed of the video format runs at 29.97 fps. This timecode clock does not run in real time. It is slightly slower by 0.1 %. 30 fps drop-frame SMPTE (D) The 30 fps drop-frame count is an adaptation that allows a timecode display running at 29.
Synchronization Clock Sources Clock Sources Once the position is established, the next essential factor for synchronization is the playback speed. Once 2 devices start playing from the same position, they must run at exactly the same speed in order to remain in sync. Therefore, a single speed reference must be used and all devices in the system must follow that reference. With digital audio, the speed is determined by the audio clock rate. With video, the speed is determined by the video sync signal.
Synchronization Project Synchronization Setup Dialog NOTE If you activate Steinberg SyncStation as the input source, there are several options for how these commands are routed within the SyncStation itself. For details refer to the documentation that comes with the SyncStation.
Synchronization Project Synchronization Setup Dialog Sources Page The Sources page allows you to set up the synchronization inputs, and to determine which external signals enter the application. In the topmost section, the following options are available: Activate External Sync Activates/Deactivates the external synchronization. Timecode Source The Timecode Source section allows you to determine whether Cubase is acting as timecode master or slave.
Synchronization Project Synchronization Setup Dialog VST System Link Sets VST System Link as timecode source. This allows for all aspects of sampleaccurate synchronization between different computers that are connected via VST System Link. NOTE Discrepancies between the Project Frame Rate and the incoming timecode can cause problems during postproduction, even if Cubase is able to lock to that timecode.
Synchronization Project Synchronization Setup Dialog Destinations Page The Destinations page allows you to set up the synchronization outputs, and to determine which external signals leave the application. MIDI Clock Destinations In the MIDI Clock Destinations section, you can select any MIDI ports that you want to output MIDI clock. Some MIDI devices, such as drum machines, can match their tempo and location to incoming MIDI clock.
Synchronization Project Synchronization Setup Dialog NOTE Some MIDI interfaces send MTC over all ports by default. If this is the case, only select one port of the interface for the MTC. MIDI Timecode Preferences In the MIDI Timecode Preferences section, the following options are available: MIDI Timecode Follows Project Time Ensures that the MIDI output always follows the time position of Cubase.
Synchronization External Synchronization MIDI Input Determines which MIDI port in your system receives MMC commands. Set this to a MIDI port that is connected to the desired MIDI device. MIDI Output Determines which MIDI port in your system sends MMC commands. Set this to a MIDI port that is connected to the desired MIDI device. MMC Device ID Set this to the same device ID as in the Machine Control Input Settings section.
VST System Link VST System Link is a digital audio network system that allows you to link several computers using digital audio hardware and cables. Linking up 2 or more computers allows you to split different tasks and different tracks between different computers. You can run CPU-intensive processes, such as send effect plug-ins or VST instruments on one computer, and record audio tracks on another one.
VST System Link Setting up VST System Link Active Activates VST System Link. Online Puts the computer online. ASIO Input Allows you to define the networking input channel. ASIO Output Allows you to define the networking output channel. Use Selected ASIO Ports for Data only Activate this if you want to devote more bandwidth to MIDI, and send VST System Link information on the entire channel. This channel is then no longer available for audio transfer.
VST System Link Setting up VST System Link Self test Allows you to test the network. Receiving Lights up if the computer is active. Sending Lights up if the computer is active. List Shows the name of each computer. Setting up a Network You can set up a network by connecting computers. PROCEDURE 1. Use a digital audio cable to connect the digital output of computer 1 to the digital input of computer 2. If you have more than 2 computers, add the others one by one. 2.
VST System Link Setting up VST System Link However, if you use an external clock from a digital mixing desk or a special word clock synchronizer, for example, you must leave all your ASIO cards in clock slave or AutoSync mode and make sure that each of them is listening for the signal coming from the synchronizer. This signal is usually passed through your ADAT cables or word clock connectors in a daisy chain fashion.
VST System Link Setting up VST System Link ● Digital signal processing, such as pan or effects, must be turned off for the VST System Link signal. ● For RME Audio Hammerfall DSP audio hardware, select the default or plain preset for the Totalmix function. Otherwise signal loops might occur and VST System Link cannot work. Setting up Sample Rates All projects on all computer must be set up to the same sample rate. PROCEDURE 1. Select Project > Project Setup. 2.
VST System Link Activating VST System Link The audio that is played back should now appear in the application running on computer 2, and the input bus level meters should move. RESULT You have now verified that the digital connection works as it should. You can reverse this procedure so that computer 2 plays back and computer 1 listens. Activating VST System Link You must activate VST System Link on all network computers to be able to work with VST System Link. PROCEDURE 1.
VST System Link Activating VST System Link 5. Activate Active at the top left of the VST System Link setup. 6. Repeat the steps for each computer in the network. RESULT The sending and receiving indicators on each active computer flash, and the name of each computer appears in the list in the Self test section of the dialog. Each computer is assigned a random number. The name will be shown in the VST System Link window of every computer on the network.
VST System Link Application Examples Activating MIDI Ports for VST System Link You can activate MIDI input and output ports for VST System Link. This allows you to route MIDI tracks to VST instruments running on another computer. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Studio Setup. 2. In the Devices list, select VST System Link. 3. Specify the number of MIDI ports you need using the MIDI Inputs and MIDI Outputs value fields. 4. Create a MIDI track.
VST System Link Application Examples 2. On computer 2, route each of the 2 audio tracks to a separate output bus connected to the digital outputs, bus 1 and 2, for example. 3. Route the FX channel track to another VST System Link bus, bus 3, for example. 4. Route the VST instrument channel to yet another bus, bus 4, for example. 5. On computer 1, check the corresponding 4 VST System Link input busses. If you start playback on computer 2, the audio should appear on the input busses on computer 1.
VST System Link Application Examples 3. On computer 2, open the VST Instruments window and assign an instrument to the first slot in the rack. 4. Route the VST instrument channel to the desired output bus. If you are using computer 1 as your main mixing computer, this would be one of the VST System Link output busses, connected to computer 1. 5. Create a new MIDI track in the Project window of computer 2 and assign the MIDI output of the track to the VST instrument you created. 6.
VST System Link Application Examples Recording Tracks on Other Computers You can record tracks on another computer. This is useful if the hard drive on one computer is not fast enough to run as many audio tracks as you need. PROCEDURE ● Add tracks on another computer and record on them. RESULT This creates a virtual RAID system, with several disks all operating together. All tracks will remain locked together just as tightly as if they were all running on the same machine.
Video Cubase allows you to work with video content. You can play back video files in various formats and via different output devices from within Cubase, extract the audio material from a video file, and edit your music to the video. The video export function allows you to share your videos with clients or other users. IMPORTANT Videos are exported with a resolution of 1920 x 1080 px (Full HD). Video files with a lower or higher resolution than Full HD are upscaled or downscaled on export.
Video Frame Rates MPEG-4 This format can contain various metadata for streaming, editing, local playback, and interchange of content. Its file extension is .mp4. AVI This is a multimedia container format introduced by Microsoft. Codecs Codecs are methods of data compression used to make video and audio files smaller and more manageable for computers. For further details, refer to the support area at steinberg.net. Frame Rates Cubase supports different video and film frame rates.
Video Preparations for Creating Video Projects Dedicated Video Cards You can use a dedicated video card. Video is sent directly to the output of this video device. The following video cards are supported: ● Blackmagic Design video output devices IMPORTANT ● You must install the appropriate driver for the video device and set the video card output to the video file resolution used in your project. ● Video output via FireWire is not supported.
Video Preparations for Creating Video Projects RELATED LINKS Pool on page 567 Extracting Audio from Video on page 1027 Adopting the Project Frame Rate To ensure that the time display of Cubase corresponds to the actual frames in the video, you must set the project frame rate to the frame rate of the imported video file. PREREQUISITE The frame rate of the imported video file differs from the project frame rate. PROCEDURE 1. Select Project > Project Setup. 2.
Video Preparations for Video Playback ● In the Project window, select the video event and select Media > Generate Thumbnail Cache. NOTE You can only refresh already existing thumbnail cache files from within the Pool. RESULT The thumbnail cache file is generated in the background so that you can continue working with Cubase. Preparations for Video Playback You can play back imported video files from within Cubase by using the transport controls.
Video Preparations for Video Playback NOTE The Onscreen Window device only supports a fixed format. Offset If the video image does not match the audio, you can enter an offset value in milliseconds to specify how much earlier the video should be delivered. This compensates for the display delay. The offset is only used during playback. It is saved globally for each output device and is independent of the project. Active Allows you to activate the device that you want to use for playing back video.
Video Preparations for Video Playback Fullscreen Mode Sets the window to full screen mode. To exit full screen mode, open the context menu and select Exit Fullscreen Mode or press Esc . Quarter Size Reduces the window to a quarter of the actual size. Half Size Reduces the window to half the actual size. Actual Size Sets the window to the size of the video. Double Size Enlarges the window to twice the actual size. Aspect Ratio You can also drag the borders of the Video Player window to resize it.
Video Editing Video Scrubbing Video You can scrub video events, that is, play them back forwards or backwards. PROCEDURE 1. Select Studio > Video Player. 2. Do one of the following: ● Click in the Video Player window and move the mouse to the left or to the right. ● Use a jog wheel on a remote controller. Editing Video Video events are created automatically when you import a video file.
Video Export Video RELATED LINKS Export Video Dialog on page 1025 Exporting Video Files on page 1026 Export Video Dialog The Export Video dialog provides settings for exporting a video file from your project. ● To open the Export Video dialog, select File > Export > Video. The Export Video dialog is divided into several sections. File Location File Name Allows you to specify the name of the exported video file. File Path Allows you to specify the file path of the exported video file.
Video Export Video Audio Settings Channel Selection Allows you to select a stereo output channel for export. MixConsole settings and insert effects are taken into account. Realtime Export Allows you to export the audio mixdown in real time. Realtime export takes at least the same time as regular playback. Activate this if you use external effects or instruments, or if you use VST plug-ins that require time to update correctly during the mixdown.
Video Extracting Audio from Video NOTE You can only add a stereo output channel to the exported video file. We recommend that you route all mono, stereo, or multi-channel channels that you want to export to a stereo output channel via send. 3. Select File > Export > Video. 4. In the Export Video dialog, select the stereo output channel that you want to export. NOTE Make sure that the selected output channel contains all audio that you want to use for the exported file.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications Cubase supports a number of file formats that you can use to exchange files with other applications. RELATED LINKS AAF Files on page 1028 AAF Files The Advanced Authoring Format (AAF) is a multimedia file format that allows you to exchange digital media and metadata between different systems and applications across multiple platforms. Metadata include fades, automation, and processing information.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications AAF Files RELATED LINKS AAF Import Options Dialog on page 1029 AAF Import Options Dialog The AAF Import Options dialog allows you to activate tracks for import and to specify the destination in the active project. ● To open the AAF Import Options dialog, select File > Import > AAF. Import Allows you to select a track for import. Type Shows the media type of the track. Track Name Shows the track name. Select All Tracks Selects all tracks for import.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications AAF Files Import at Relative Position Places imported track data relative to the start time of your active project, taking the source project start time into account. For example, if the source project starts at timecode 01:00:00:00 with an event located at 02:00:00:00, and if the active project starts at 02:00:00:00, the imported event is placed at timecode 03:00:00:00.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications AAF Files Export Allows you to select a track for export. Track Name Shows the track name. Select All Selects all tracks in the project for export. From Left to Right Locator Allows you to export the range between the locators only. Media Destination Path Allows you to specify a location for exported media files.
Exchanging Files with Other Applications AAF Files NOTE When exporting audio that is not referenced as a clip in the Pool, for example, when using real-time effects, corresponding audio files are always created in a subfolder within the folder specified as Media Destination Path, even if Copy Media is deactivated. Export Muted Events with Volume -inf dB Sets muted events to a volume -inf dB on export. Consolidate Events Allows you to copy only the portions of audio files that are used in the project.
Key Commands Key commands are assigned to most main menus and functions in Cubase. They are stored as Preferences that are used for all your projects. You can view and add key commands in the Key Commands dialog. Key command assignments are also shown in the tooltips. Tooltips that show an exclamation mark at the end have no key command assigned yet. You can save key commands settings as a key commands file, which is stored separately and can be imported into any project.
Key Commands Key Commands Dialog The following options are available: + All Expands all folders. - All Reduces all folders. Search Allows you to search for Cubase functions. This is useful if you want to know which key command is assigned to a specific function. Reset Current Key Command Allows you to reset the selected key command back to the default setting. Commands list Shows the Cubase functions for that you can assign key commands arranged in category folders.
Key Commands Key Commands Dialog Resetting Key Commands on page 1038 Removing Key Commands on page 1037 Loading Key Command Presets on page 1038 Saving Key Commands Presets on page 1038 Setting up Macros on page 1037 Macros Section The Macros section allows you to set up a combination of several functions or commands that you want to be performed in one go. ● To open the Macros section, select Edit > Key Commands, and click Show Macros. Macros list Shows all added macros.
Key Commands Assigning Key Commands RELATED LINKS Key Commands Dialog on page 1033 Setting up Macros on page 1037 Assigning Key Commands You can add key commands in the Key Commands dialog. PROCEDURE 1. Select Edit > Key Commands. 2. Do one of the following: ● In the Commands list, click the plus sign to open a category folder, and select the function to which you want to assign a key command. ● In the search field, enter the name of the function to which you want to assign a key command.
Key Commands Removing Key Commands RESULT The first matching command is selected and displayed in the Commands list. The Keys column and the Keys list show the assigned key commands, if any. Removing Key Commands PROCEDURE 1. Select Edit > Key Commands. 2. In the Commands list, click the plus sign to open a category folder, and select the function for which you want to remove a key command. 3. Select the key command in the Keys list and click Delete selected key command. 4.
Key Commands Saving Key Commands Presets Saving Key Commands Presets You can save key commands settings as presets. PREREQUISITE You have set up the key commands to your liking. PROCEDURE 1. In the Presets section, click Save. 2. Enter a name for the preset and click OK. RESULT Your key commands settings are now available as a preset on the Presets pop-up menu. Loading Key Command Presets You can load key commands presets.
Key Commands Default Key Commands Default Key Commands The default key commands are arranged in categories. NOTE When the On-Screen Keyboard is displayed, the usual key commands are blocked because they are reserved for the On-Screen Keyboard. The only exceptions are: Ctrl/Cmd - S (Save), Num * (Start/Stop Record), Space (Start/Stop Playback), Num 1 (Jump to Left Locator), Delete or Backspace (Delete), Num / (Cycle on/off), F2 (Show/Hide Transport panel), and Alt/Opt - K (Show/Hide On-Screen Keyboard).
Key Commands Default Key Commands Devices (Studio) Category Option Key command Audio Connections F4 Audio Performance F12 MixConsole F3 MixConsole in Project Window Alt/Opt - F3 On-Screen Keyboard Alt/Opt - K Video Player F8 VST Instruments F11 Direct Offline Processing Category Option Key command Direct Offline Processing F7 Edit Category Option Key command Activate/Deactivate Focused Object Alt/Opt - A Auto-Scroll On/Off F Copy Ctrl/Cmd - C Cut Ctrl/Cmd - X Cut Time Ctrl/Cm
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Find Track/Channel Ctrl/Cmd - F Group Ctrl/Cmd - G Insert Silence Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - E Invert Alt/Opt - F Invert Selection Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - I Left Selection Side to Cursor E Lock Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - L Move Event Starts to Cursor Ctrl/Cmd - L Move Events to Front U Mute M Mute Events Shift - M Mute/Unmute Objects Alt/Opt - M Open Ctrl/Cmd - E Paste Ctrl/Cmd - V Paste at Origin Alt/Opt - V Paste Relative to Cursor Shift
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Secondary Parameter: Increase Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - Right Arrow Select All Ctrl/Cmd - A Select None Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - A Snap On/Off J Solo S Split At Cursor Alt/Opt - X Split Range Shift - X Stationary Cursor Alt/Opt - C Undo Ctrl/Cmd - Z Ungroup Ctrl/Cmd - U Unlock Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - U Unmute Events Shift - U Write W Editors Category Option Key command Edit In-Place Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - I Open Score Editor Ctrl/Cmd - R Open
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Quit Ctrl/Cmd - Q Save Ctrl/Cmd - S Save As Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - S Save New Version Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - S Media Category Option Key command Open MediaBay F5 Open/Close Attribute Inspector Ctrl - Alt/Opt - Num 6 Open/Close Favorites Ctrl - Alt/Opt - Num 8 Open/Close File Browser Ctrl - Alt/Opt - Num 4 Open/Close Filters Ctrl - Alt/Opt - Num 5 Open/Close Previewer Ctrl - Alt/Opt - Num 2 Preview Cycle On/Off Shift - Num / Preview St
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Redo MixConsole Step Alt/Opt - Shift - Z Navigate Category Option Key command Add Down: Shift - Down Arrow Expand/Undo selection in the Project window to the bottom/Move selected event in the Key Editor down 1 octave Add Left: Shift - Left Arrow Expand/Undo selection in the Project window/Key Editor to the left Add Right: Shift - Right Arrow Expand/Undo selection in the Project window/Key Editor to the right Add Up: Shift - Up Arrow Expand/
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Up: Up Arrow Select next in the Project window/ Move selected event in the Key Editor one semitone up Nudge Category Option Key command Left Ctrl/Cmd - Left Arrow Right Ctrl/Cmd - Right Arrow Nudge Bottom Down Alt/Opt - Down Arrow Nudge Bottom Up Alt/Opt - Shift - Up Arrow Nudge End Left Alt/Opt - Shift - Left Arrow Nudge End Right Alt/Opt - Right Arrow Nudge Start Left Alt/Opt - Left Arrow Nudge Start Right Alt/Opt - Shift - Right
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Setup Shift - S Quantize Category Option Key command Quantize Q Set Insert Length Category Option Key command 1/1 Alt/Opt - 1 1/2 Alt/Opt - 2 1/4 Alt/Opt - 3 1/8 Alt/Opt - 4 1/16 Alt/Opt - 5 1/32 Alt/Opt - 6 1/64 Alt/Opt - 7 1/128 Alt/Opt - 8 Toggle Dotted Alt/Opt - .
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Glue Tool 4 Mute Tool 7 Next Tool F10 Object Selection Tool 1 Play Tool 9 Previous Tool F9 Range Selection Tool 2 Split Tool 3 Zoom Tool 6 Track Versions Category Option Key command Duplicate Version Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - D New Version Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - N Next Version Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - H Previous Version Ctrl/Cmd - Shift - G Transport Category Option Key command Activate External Sync Alt/Opt - Shift - T Activate Metronom
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Enter Locator Range Duration Shift - D Enter Project Cursor Position Shift - P Enter Punch In Position Shift - I Enter Punch Out Position Shift - O Enter Right Locator Shift - R Enter Tempo Shift - T Enter Time Signature Shift - C Exchange Time Formats . Fast Forward Shift - Num + Fast Rewind Shift - Num - Forward Num + Go to Left Locator Num 1 Go to Project Start Num .
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command MIDI Retrospective Record: Insert from All MIDI Inputs Shift - Num - - * Nudge Cursor Left Ctrl/Cmd - Num - Nudge Cursor Right Ctrl/Cmd - Num + Panel (Transport panel) F2 Play Selection Range Alt/Opt - Space Recall Cycle Marker 1 to 9 Shift - Num 1 to Num 9 Record Num * Rewind Num - Set Left Locator to Project Cursor Position Ctrl/Cmd - Num 1 Set Marker 1 Ctrl/Cmd - 1 Set Marker 2 Ctrl/Cmd - 2 Set Marker 3 to 9 Ctrl/Cmd - Num 3 t
Key Commands Default Key Commands Option Key command Show/Hide Upper Zone Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - U Show/Hide Lower Zone Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - E or Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt B Show/Hide Transport Bar Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - T Show Previous Tab Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - Left Arrow Show Next Tab Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - Right Arrow Show Previous Page Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - Up Arrow or Page Up Show Next Page Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt - Down Arrow or Page Down Show/Hide Info Line Ctrl/Cmd - I Show/Hide Overview Alt/Opt - O
Key Commands Setting up Tool Modifier Keys Option Key command Zoom In Vertically Shift - H Zoom Out G Zoom Out Of Waveform Vertically Alt/Opt - G Zoom Out Tracks Ctrl/Cmd - Up Arrow Zoom Out Vertically Shift - G Zoom to Event Shift - E Zoom to Selection Alt/Opt - S Zoom Tracks Exclusive Z Setting up Tool Modifier Keys You can set up tool modifier keys that allow you to get an alternative function when using a tool. PROCEDURE 1. In the Preferences dialog, select Editing > Tool Modifiers.
Customizing In Cubase you can organize windows and dialogs in workspaces, and set up the appearance of specific elements. RELATED LINKS Workspaces on page 1052 Setup Options on page 1055 Workspaces Workspaces in Cubase allow you to organize windows and specific dialogs for your common work routines. A workspace saves the size, position, and layout or setting of important windows and dialogs, such as the Project window, MixConsole, or Transport panel. You can define several workspaces.
Customizing Workspaces Workspaces for External Projects You can determine the view of external projects when you open them in Cubase. When you open external projects, which are projects that have been created on other computers, the window and dialog settings that you last used on your computer are applied by default. This can either be the last used view that was saved on your computer or one of your specified global workspaces.
Customizing Workspaces 3. On the Workspaces menu, select one of the following: ● To update your current workspace, click Update Workspace. ● To save your workspace as a different workspace or workspace type, click Add Workspace. RELATED LINKS Creating Workspaces on page 1053 Workspaces Organizer The Workspaces Organizer allows you to manage the existing workspaces. ● To open the Workspaces Organizer, click Workspaces > Organize.
Customizing Setup Options NOTE ● You can also click and drag a workspace to another position within a list. ● You can move workspaces only within a list. For a global workspace to become a project workspace and vice versa, you must save it as a different type of workspace. ● To rename a workspace, you can double-click the workspace name.
Customizing Setup Options The info line setup context menu Setup Dialog The setup dialog allows you to specify which elements are visible/hidden and in what order they are shown. You can save and recall setup presets. ● To open a setup dialog, right-click the element that you want to set up, and select Setup. Hidden Items Lists the elements that are hidden. Visible Items Lists the elements that are visible. Add Select an item in the list of Hidden Items, and click Add to make it visible.
Customizing Windows Dialog Move Up Select an item in the list of Visible Items, and click Move Up to reorder the items. Move Down Select an item in the list of Visible Items, and click Move Down to reorder the items. Store Allows you to name the current configuration and save it as a preset. Delete Remove a selected preset. Reset All Reverts to the default configuration. Windows Dialog The Windows dialog allows you to manage open windows in Cubase. ● To open the Windows dialog, select Window > Windows.
Customizing Where are the Settings Stored? Restore Restores the selected or all windows. Close Windows Closes the selected or all windows. Reset Layout Resets the layout of the selected window. Where are the Settings Stored? There is a large number of ways in which you can customize Cubase. While some of the settings you make are stored with each project, others are stored in separate preference files.
Customizing Safe Mode Dialog The following options are available in the Plug-Ins section: Deactivate all third-party plug-ins Temporarily disables all third-party plug-ins. After startup, only Steinberg plug-ins are available. The following options are available in the Preferences section: Use current program preferences Opens the program with the current preference settings. Disable program preferences Disables the current preferences and opens the program with the factory default settings instead.
Customizing Safe Mode Dialog Disables the current preferences, and opens the program with the factory default settings instead. ● Delete program preferences Deletes the preferences and opens the program with the factory default settings instead. This process cannot be undone. Note that this affects all versions of Cubase installed on your computer. 4. Click OK. AFTER COMPLETING THIS TASK If the program works fine with disabled preferences, consider deleting and re-initializing the preferences.
Optimizing Audio Performance To get the most out of your Cubase system, performance-wise, you can optimize specific settings. NOTE For details and current information on system requirements and hardware properties refer to the Steinberg web site. Performance Aspects Tracks and Effects The faster your computer, the more tracks, effects, and EQs you are able to play. Exactly what constitutes a fast computer is almost a science in itself, but some hints are given below.
Optimizing Audio Performance Settings That Affect Performance ● Under macOS, audio hardware with properly written macOS (Core Audio) drivers can be very efficient and produce very low latency times. However, there are additional features only available with ASIO drivers, such as the ASIO Positioning Protocol. Settings That Affect Performance Audio Buffer Settings Audio buffers affect how audio is sent to and from the audio hardware.
Optimizing Audio Performance ASIO-Guard Realtime Shows the average load of all audio realtime processes. ASIO-Guard Shows the average load of processes that can be preprocessed. NOTE Preprocessing only takes place if you activate Activate ASIO-Guard on the Audio System page of the Studio Setup dialog. Peak Shows the processing load in the real-time path of the audio engine. The higher this value, the higher the risk that dropouts occur.
Optimizing Audio Performance ASIO-Guard ASIO-Guard Latency High ASIO-Guard levels lead to an increased ASIO-Guard latency. When you adjust a volume fader, for example, you will hear the parameter changes with a slight delay. The ASIO-Guard latency, in contrast to the latency of the audio hardware, is independent from live input.
Preferences The Preferences dialog provides options and settings that control the global behavior of the program. Preferences Dialog The Preferences dialog is divided into a navigation list and a settings page. Clicking one of the entries in the navigation list opens a settings page. ● To open the Preferences dialog, select Edit > Preferences. In addition to the settings, the dialog provides the following options: Preference Presets Allows you to select a saved preference preset.
Preferences Preferences Dialog OK Applies any changes that you have made and closes the dialog. Cancel Closes the dialog without saving any changes. Saving Preference Presets You can save complete or partial preference settings as presets. PROCEDURE 1. In the Preferences dialog, make your changes. 2. Click Store in the lower left section of the dialog. 3. Enter a preset name and click OK. RESULT Your settings are now available on the Preference Presets pop-up menu.
Preferences Editing Editing ‘Edit Solo’/’Record in MIDI Editors’ Follow Focus Suspends Record in Editor and Solo Editor in the MIDI editor if the Project window gets the focus. Default Track Time Type Allows you to select the default track time type for new tracks. ● Musical Sets new tracks to musical time base. ● Time Linear Sets new tracks to linear time base. ● Follow Transport Main Display Sets new tracks to follow the primary time format: Bars+Beats format sets new tracks to musical time base.
Preferences Editing Use Up/Down Navigation Commands for Selecting Tracks only Uses the Up Arrow / Down Arrow keys for track selection, not for event/part selection. Track Selection Follows Event Selection Automatically selects the corresponding track if you select an event in the Project window. Automation Reduction Level Allows you to remove all superfluous automation events. A reduction level value of 0% removes repeated automation points only.
Preferences Editing On Processing Shared Clips Determines what happens when you apply processing to a shared clip that is used by more than one event in the project. ● Open Options Dialog Opens the Options dialog that allows you to select whether you want to create a new version of the clip or apply the processing to the existing clip. ● Create New Version Creates a new editing version of the clip, and applies the processing to that version leaving the original clip unaffected.
Preferences Editing Clicking and dragging in a circular motion changes the setting. Clicking anywhere along the encoder’s edge immediately changes the setting. ● Relative Circular Clicking anywhere on an encoder and dragging changes the current setting. There is no need to click on the exact current position. ● Linear Clicking on an encoder and dragging up or down, or left or right changes the setting. Slider Mode Allows you to select your preferred way of controlling value sliders.
Preferences Editing NOTE If you just split a part and play back the result, it will sound the same regardless of this setting. However, if you split a part and delete the first half or move the second half to a different position in the project, you may want to activate Split MIDI Controllers to make sure all controllers have the correct value at the beginning of the second part. Editing - Project & MixConsole Select Channel/Track on Solo Selects channels/tracks when you click their Solo button.
Preferences Editing Categories Action Modifiers Info Line All Events Same Value Ctrl/Cmd Range Tool Exclude Row Ctrl/Cmd Select Full Vertical Ctrl/Cmd - Shift Edit Velocity Ctrl/Cmd - Shift Set Position Alt/Opt - Shift Slip Event Content Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt Split Event Alt/Opt Common Position no default assignment Disable Snapping Ctrl/Cmd Repeat Event Alt/Opt Size with Fade Ctrl/Cmd - Alt/Opt Time Stretch no default assignment Split Tool Split repeated Alt/Opt Trim Tool Con
Preferences Editors Zoom Tool Standard Mode: Horizontal Zooming Only Zooms the window horizontally without changing the track height when you zoom with the Zoom tool. Select Tool: Show Extra Info Displays the current pointer position and the name of the track and event at which you are pointing when you use the Object Selection tool in the Project window event display. Show Notification when Switching Tool Mode with Key Command Shows a notification when you switch the tool mode by using a key command.
Preferences Event Display NOTE ● If you reduce the event opacity, it might be helpful to increase the Waveform Brightness for audio events or the Note Brightness for MIDI events. ● Reducing the opacity may result in a less responsive user interface. Smallest Track Height to Show Data Determines from which track height the track contents are displayed. Smallest Track Height to Show Name Determines from which track height the track names are displayed.
Preferences Event Display Displays ‘B’ as a pitch name. This is only available if you selected English in the Note Name pop-up menu. ● Display ‘B’ as ‘H’ Displays ‘H’ as a pitch name. This is only available if you selected English in the Note Name pop-up menu. ● Enharmonics from Chord Track Uses the chord events on the chord track to determine if enharmonically equivalent notes in the Key Editor and in the List Editor are displayed as sharp or flat.
Preferences General Event Display - Folders Show Event Details Displays event details instead of data blocks. This setting depends on the Show Data on Folder Tracks setting. Show Data on Folder Tracks Determines in which case data blocks or event details are displayed on folder tracks. ● Always Show Data Displays data blocks or event details always. ● Never Show Data Displays nothing. ● Hide Data When Expanded Hides the display of events when you open folder tracks.
Preferences General The Application Scaling menu allows you to scale the Cubase user interface relatively to the Windows scaling setting. NOTE On macOS, you can disable HiDPI support in the Cubase application folder by invoking Get Info and checking Open in Low Resolution. Usage Logger Options If you activate this option, Cubase gathers usage information and writes it in a log file that you can find in the following location: ● On Windows: \Users\\AppData\Local\Steinberg\usagelogger On macOS: /U
Preferences MIDI ● Always Uses the view that you last used on your computer. Use Hub Opens the Hub when you start Cubase or create a new project using the File menu. RELATED LINKS VST Instrument Context Menu on page 647 General - Personalization Default Author Name Allows you to specify an author name that is used by default for new projects. This is included as metadata when exporting audio files with an iXML chunk.
Preferences MIDI as well as on all the parts to the left of it. Deactivate this for very large projects, as it slows down processes such as positioning and soloing. MIDI Display Resolution Allows you to set the display resolution for viewing and editing MIDI data. Extend Playback Range of Notes that start before the Part Extends the playback range of MIDI notes that start before the part in ticks. This is useful if MIDI events start shortly before the start of the MIDI part.
Preferences MIDI Export Inserts Includes MIDI modifiers and MIDI inserts in the MIDI file. Export Sends Includes MIDI sends in the MIDI file. Export Markers Includes markers as standard MIDI file marker events in the MIDI file. Export as Type 0 Exports a type 0 MIDI file with all data on a single track, but on different MIDI channels. If you deactivate this option, a type 1 MIDI file with data on separate tracks is exported.
Preferences MIDI Import Markers Imports Standard MIDI File Markers in the file and converts them to Cubase markers. Import Dropped File as Single Part Places the file on one track if you drag a MIDI file into the project. Ignore Master Track Events on Merge Ignores tempo track data if you import a MIDI file into the current project. The imported MIDI file will play according to the current tempo track in the project. Auto Dissolve Format 0 Automatically dissolves imported MIDI files of type 0.
Preferences MediaBay MediaBay Maximum Items in Results List Sets the maximum number of files that are displayed in the Results list. Allow Editing in Results List Enables editing of attributes in the Results list. Show File Extensions in Results List Displays file name extensions in the Results list. Scan Folders Only When MediaBay Is Open Scans for media files when the MediaBay window is open. NOTE During playback or recording no folder scans are performed. Scan Unknown File Types Scans all file types.
Preferences Record Record This page contains settings related to audio and MIDI recording. Deactivate Punch In on Stop Deactivates Punch In on the Transport panel whenever you enter stop mode. Stop after Automatic Punch Out Stops playback after automatic Punch Out. If the post-roll value on the Transport panel is set to a value other than zero, playback will continue for the set time before stopping.
Preferences Transport Retrospective Record Buffer Size You can capture MIDI data that you played in Stop mode or during playback and turn them into a MIDI part. Retrospective Record Buffer Size determines how much MIDI data can be captured in the buffer. ASIO Latency Compensation Active by Default Determines the initial state of the ASIO Latency Compensation button in the track list for MIDI or instrument tracks.
Preferences Transport Wind Speed Options These options affect the fast forward/rewind speed. ● Adjust to Zoom adapts the wind speed to the horizontal zoom factor. If you zoom in very close for detailed editing, you probably do not want to have a high fast forward/rewind speed. Because of this, the Speed Factor does not have any effect in this mode. The Fast Wind Factor still applies. ● Fixed keeps a fixed wind speed regardless of the horizontal zoom factor.
Preferences User Interface User Interface This page contains options that allow you to adjust the default user interface colors. Color Schemes Allows you to adjust the color scheme for the application and the desktop cover. ● Click the Custom Color Scheme field to open the Color Picker, and select one of the colors in the Default Colors section to apply a pre-defined color. ● Click the color field for a specific item to open the Color Picker and select a custom color for it.
Preferences VST Use Previous Track Color New tracks get the same color as the track above them in the track list. Use Previous Track Color +1 This is similar to Use Previous Track Color, except that new tracks get the next color in the color palette. Use Last Applied Color New tracks get the color that you last applied to an event/part. Use Random Track Color New tracks get random track colors. Colorize Tracks and MixConsole Channels Applies the track/channel color to track/channel controls.
Preferences VST Group Channels: Mute Sources as well Mutes channels that are directly routed to a group channel when you mute the group channel. Channels that were muted prior to the group channel being muted will not remember their mute status and will be unmuted when the group channel is unmuted. NOTE This does not affect how mute automation is written.
Preferences VariAudio VST - Plug-ins Warn before Removing Modified Effects Shows a warning if you remove an effect plug-in for which you have made parameter changes. Open Effect Editor after Loading It Opens the effect control panel when you load VST effects or VST instruments. Create MIDI Track when Loading VSTi Allows you to determine if a MIDI track is created when you add a rack instrument. ● Always A MIDI track is always created. ● Do not No MIDI track is created.
Index A AAF files 1028 ACID® loops 485 Activate Extend Process Range Direct Offline Processing 425 Activate Project 102 Activate tempo track 963 Adapt to Zoom 73 Grid type 79 ADAT Lightpipe Synchronization 999 Add Cycle Marker Track Control 111 Add Latency to MIDI-Thru Processing 1083 Add Marker Track Control 111 Add Track dialog 115 Audio tracks 116 Folder tracks 138 FX channel tracks 134 Group channel tracks 131 Instrument tracks 120 MIDI tracks 127 Ruler tracks 136 Sampler tracks 124 Adding chords 886 AE
Index Audio Recording (continued) Record Folder 261 Record Modes 263 Recovering 265 Recovering recordings 264 Undo 264 With Effects 264 Audio regions 185 Audio System 17 Audio tracks 116 Add Track dialog 116 Inspector 118 AudioWarp Copying warp markers 971 Correcting warp marker positions 491 Creating warp markers for multiple events 491 Deleting warp markers 491 Free Warp 489 Resetting 492 Audition VariAudio 501 Audition chords 891 Audition through MIDI Inserts/Sends 1078 Auditioning Audio events 188 Audi
Index Channel racks 351, 360 EQ 365 Filters 362 Gain 363 Inserts 364 Phase 363 Pre 362 Routing 361 Sends 376 Strips 368 Channel settings 379 Channel Faders 391 Channel Inserts 383 Channel Sends 390 Channel Strip 384–387 Copying 360 Equalizer 389 Channel Settings Toolbar 381 Channel strip rack 368 Compressor 368 EQ position 368 Gate 368 Limiter 368 Presets 375 Saturation 368 Transformer 368 Channel types MixConsole 348 Channels Color 157 Linking 352 Chase Events 250, 1078 Chord Assistant 888, 910 Assigning
Index Colors MixConsole Channels 378 Preferences 1086 Tracks 85, 87 User Interface 1086 Colors Setup Dialog Events 748 Project 87 Combine Selection Tools 190 Object Selection 190 Range Selection 190 Compress Left Automation Event Editor 635 Tempo Event Editor 965 Compress Right Automation Event Editor 635 Tempo Event Editor 965 Compressor Strip module 368 Connect Sends automatically for each newly created Channel 1087 Connecting Audio 16 MIDI 24 Constrain Delay Compensation 652 Continuous controllers Addin
Index Direct Offline Processing 421 Applying 424 Applying permanently 427 Applying to multiple events 425 Bypassing 426 Copying 427 Deleting 425 Envelope 428 Extend Process Range 425 Fade In 428 Fade Out 428 Gain 429 Invert Phase 430 Key Commands 436 Modifying 425 Normalize 430 Pitch Shift 430 Pool 583 Remove DC Offset 433 Resample 433 Resetting 425 Reverse 434 Silence 434 Stereo Flip 434 Time Stretch 434 Toolbar 423 Window 422 Workflow 422 Disable Acoustic Feedback during Playback 1069 Display format Rule
Index Event Details Showing 1076 Event display 46 Editing events 852 Folder tracks 164 Modifying on folder tracks 164 Event Handling Opacity 1073 Event lengths Changing with Trim tool 803 Event list Editing events 852 Filtering events 852 Event name Showing 1073 Event Opacity 1073 Event Volume Curves Showing 1074 Events 183 Arranging at a Specific Distance 195 Combine Selection Tools 190 Copying and Pasting 202 Creating new files from events 184 Displaying on folder tracks 164 Duplicating 202 Editing 188 E
Index Focus Quick Controls Focus lock 689 Focus setup 689 Setting up 688 Folder parts 188 Folder tracks 138 Add Track dialog 138 Displaying events 164 Inspector 140 Modifying event display 164 Track controls 140 Follow Chord Track 900 Auto 900 Chords 900 Directly 901 Scale events 901 Single Voice 900 Synchronizing Track Data 901 Using 900 Formant Shifting VariAudio 520 Frame count 997 Frame rates Mismatch 1020 Synchronization 997 Video 1020 Free Warp 489 In the Sample Editor 490 Freeze Sampler tracks 565 V
Index Indicate Transpositions Key Editor 323 Info line Project window 51 Score Editor 813 Transpose 324 Inhibit warning when applying Offline Processes 1089 Inhibit warning when changing the Sample Data 1089 Input busses Adding 32 Removing 34 Renaming 31 Routing 361 Input gain MixConsole 363 Input levels 16 Input ports 23 Inputs Meter position options 357 Insert effects 393, 395 Adding to busses 396 Adding to group channels 397 Routing 396 Insert MIDI Retrospective Recording in Editor 273 Insert presets Co
Index Link groups 352 Q-Link 353 Link Project and Lower Zone Cursors 65 Link to Grid Nudge Settings 193 Link to Primary Time Format Nudge Settings 193 List Editor 841 Editing events 852 Editing operations 851 Event display 849 Event list 848 Filters bar 848 Inserting events 851 Showing/Hiding events 848 Status line 847 Toolbar 842 Value display 850 Live input Chord track 899 Loading Multi-Track Presets 179 Locate Track Control 111 Locate When Clicked in Empty Space 1084 Locator Range Duration 234 Locators
Index MediaBay (continued) Defining user attributes 622 Editing attributes 619 Editing attributes of multiple files 620 File Browser 601 Filters 614, 616 Finding file locations 605 Hiding sections 601 Instrument Presets 649 Logical Filter 614, 615 Media Type Filter 605 Media Types 606 Previewer 609 Rating filter 607 Refresh Views 603 Reset Filter 617 Results 603, 604, 608 Scanning 602 Select Media Type 605 Settings 628 Show in Explorer/Reveal in Finder 605 Showing sections 601 Shuffle Results 605 Tagging 6
Index MIDI part data Automation 773 MIDI parts Creating 187 Handling several 754 Independent Track Loop 755 Processing 746 MIDI Polyphonic Expression 861 MIDI Port Setup 266 MIDI ports Setting up 25 MIDI Record Catch Range in ms 1083 MIDI Record Mode 270 MIDI Recording Channel and Output 267 Continuous messages 269 Different types of messages 268 Instruments and channels 266 MIDI Input setting 266 Naming MIDI ports 266 Notes 269 Preparations 266 Program Change Messages 269 Record mode 270 Recovering 272 Re
Index MPEX algorithm 438 Multi processing 1062 Musical Mode 485 Musical Scales Finding 795, 796 Key Editor 789 Live Input 798 Quantize Pitches 797 Setup 893 Snap Pitch Editing 798 Musical Time Base 962 Mute MixConsole 356 Track Control 111 Transpose track 322 Mute Automation Track Control 111 Mute Pre-Send when Mute 1087 Muting events 207 N Name Track Control 111 Naming schemes Export Audio Mixdown 987, 988 Navigating MixConsole 391 Never Reset Chased Controllers 1078 Normalize Direct Offline Processing 4
Index O O-notes (Output notes) 840 Object Selection Combine Selection Tools 190 Object Selection tool Inserting note events 799 Offline Processing Applying permanently 427 Ogg Vorbis files 994 Importing 278 On Import Audio Files 1068 On Processing Shared Clips 1068 On-Screen Keyboard 252 Computer keyboard 253 Modulation 253 Note velocity level 253 Octave offset 253 Options 253 Piano keyboard 253 Pitchbend 253 Recording MIDI 252 One-Shot Mode Note Expression Event Editor 874 Open Effect Editor after Loading
Index Pool (continued) Key commands 579 Managing large sound databases 577 Managing media files 567 Organizing files in subfolders 583 Reducing the project size 584 Reference file 567 Renaming clips and regions 573 Resolve missing files dialog 578 Sampler tracks 567 Toolbar 570 Position markers 326 Post fader sends 405 Post-roll Recording 257 Transport panel 237 Pre fader sends 405 Pre-Record time Audio recording 264 Pre-roll Recording 257 Transport panel 237 Preferences Colors 1086 Dialog 1065 Disabling 1
Index Punch Out 238, 256, 257 Stop after automatic 1083 Punch Points 238 Q Q-Link 353 QC Learn Mode Track Quick Controls 664 Quantize Panel 289 Quantizing to a grid 291 Quantizing to a groove 293 Quantize value 818 Quantizing 285 Catch Range 291 Original position 293 Pre-Quantize 293 Swing 291 Tuplets 291 Using groove presets 291 Quick Controls Focus lock 689 Focus setup 689 MIDI Remote 688 Quick Zoom 1067 R Rack settings 352 Copying 360 Racks MixConsole 360 RAM Recording 262 Ramp/Step Continuous control
Index Resizing events 196 Resolve Display Conflicts Track Control 111 Retrospective MIDI Recording 272, 273 Empty Buffer 274 Insert from All MIDI Inputs 272 Retrospective Record 1083 Retrospective Record Buffer 271 Retrospective Recording Buffer 271 MIDI 271 Return to Start Position on Stop 1084 Reverse Audio 434 Direct Offline Processing 434 MIDI 745 REX/REX2 files Importing 281 Loading into Sampler Control 544 Right locator Setting 234 Right Locator 232 Right zone 67 Media rack 70, 71, 587, 590, 592, 593
Index Scanning MediaBay 602 Score display 815 Score Editor 809 Display 814 Info line 813 Lower zone 63 Staff settings 815 Status line 813 Toolbar 810 Score font Setting 821 Score text Adding 820 Editing 820 Scores Printing 822 Scripts MIDI Remote Manager 692 MIDI Remote Script Console 694 Scroll to selected Track 1071 Scrub Tool 189 Scrub Volume 1085 Scrubbing Scrub tool 189 Secondary Time Format Selecting 237 Sections Chord Pads 917 Segments VariAudio 497 Select Channel/Track on Edit Settings 1071 Select
Index Start Recording at Cursor Common Record Modes 258 Start Recording at Left Locator Common Record Modes 258 Static value line Automation 631 Stationary Cursors 1084 Statistics Audio Functions 447 Status line Project window 50 Score Editor 813 Step recording 808 Stereo Flip Direct Offline Processing 434 Stop playback while winding 1084 Stretch Automation Event Editor 635 Tempo Event Editor 965 Strip presets 375 Strip Presets Loading in MediaBay 625 Studio Setup Dialog 14 Note Expression Input Device 861
Index Tool modifier keys 1051, 1072 Toolbar Pool 570 Project window 38 Score Editor 810 Toolbar Divider Project window 45 Toolbox Project window 45 Toolbox on Right-Click 1072 Track automation data Automation 773 Track Color Resetting 85 Track Controls 111 Track Controls Settings 110 Track Folding 163 Track Height 159 Track Inspector Opening 54 Track list 45 Dividing 45 Track parameters Track Quick Controls 663 Track pictures Browser 158 MixConsole 377 Track list 157 Track presets Quick Control assignment
Index Transport pop-up window 231 Transport Zone Project window 52 Transpose Exclude Parts or Events 325 Global 325 Independent 325 Indicate Transpositions 323 Info line 324 Lock 323 MIDI function 734 Mute 322 Project Root Key 318 Transpose functions 318 Transpose track 146, 321 Inspector 147 Lock 323 Mute 322 Recording 324 Track controls 147 Transposing 322 Treat Muted Audio Events like Deleted 1068 Trim tool Changing event lengths 803 Tube Compressor Details view 385 Edit Module 385 Tuplets Quantizing 29
Index Voicings (continued) Octave offset 895 Piano 895 Range 895 Volume MixConsole 357 Volume curve 307 Volume databases Creating in the MediaBay 626 Mounting in the MediaBay 628 Removing from the MediaBay 628 Unmounting in the MediaBay 628 VST Input ports 23 Output ports 23 VST 2 394 VST 3 394 VST 3 Suspend plug-in processing 650 VST effect selector 400 VST instrument selector 643 VST instruments Context menu 647 Control panel 641 Freeze Channel Options Dialog 651 Freezing 650 Functions menu 647 Presets 6
Index Zoom history Project window 76 Zoom presets Project window 75 Zoom Tool Standard Mode - Horizontal Zooming Only 1072 Zoom while Locating in Time Scale 1084 Zooming To cycle markers 327 Zooming horizontally 463 Zooming tracks 160 Zooming vertically 462 1111 Cubase Artist 12
